MiCOM P721 & P723

High Impedance Differential Protection

P72x/EN T/C21

Software Version 11.D

Technical Guide
Technical Guide P72x/EN T/C21
Contents
MiCOM P721/723 Page 1/2

MiCOM P721 & P723

HIGH IMPEDANCE DIFFERENTIAL PROTECTION
TECHNICAL GUIDE

CONTENTS

Safety Section Pxxxx/EN SS/G11

Introduction P72x/EN IT/C21

Handling, Installation and Case Dimensions P72x/EN IN/C21

User Guide P72x/EN FT/C21

Menu Content Tables P72x/EN HI/C21

Technical Data P72x/EN TD/A11

Getting Started P72x/EN GS/C21

Application P72x/EN AP/C21

Communication Database P72x/EN CT/A11

Commissioning and Maintenance Guide P72x/EN CM/C21

Connection Diagrams P72x/EN CO/A11

Commissioning Test & Records Sheets P72x/EN RS/A11

Hardware/Software Version History and Compatibility P72x/EN VC/C21

P72x/EN T/C21 Technical Guide
Contents
Page 2/2 MiCOM P721/P723

BLANK PAGE
 Pxxx/EN SS/G11

SAFETY SECTION
 Pxxx/EN SS/G11

Safety Section Page 1/8

STANDARD SAFETY STATEMENTS AND EXTERNAL

LABEL INFORMATION FOR SCHNEIDER ELECTRIC
EQUIPMENT

1. INTRODUCTION 3
2. HEALTH AND SAFETY 3
3. SYMBOLS AND EXTERNAL LABELS ON THE EQUIPMENT 4
3.1 Symbols 4
3.2 Labels 4
4. INSTALLING, COMMISSIONING AND SERVICING 4
5. DECOMMISSIONING AND DISPOSAL 7
6. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR SAFETY 8
6.1 Protective fuse rating 8
6.2 Protective Class 8
6.3 Installation Category 8
6.4 Environment 8
Pxxx/EN SS/G11

Page 2/8 Safety Section

BLANK PAGE
 Pxxx/EN SS/G11

Safety Section Page 3/8

1. INTRODUCTION
This guide and the relevant equipment documentation provide full information on safe
handling, commissioning and testing of this equipment. This Safety Guide also includes
descriptions of equipment label markings.
Documentation for equipment ordered from Schneider Electric is despatched separately from
manufactured goods and may not be received at the same time. Therefore this guide is
provided to ensure that printed information which may be present on the equipment is fully
understood by the recipient.
The technical data in this safety guide is typical only, see the technical data section of the
relevant product publication(s) for data specific to a particular equipment.

Before carrying out any work on the equipment the user should be familiar with the
contents of this Safety Guide and the ratings on the equipment’s rating label.

Reference should be made to the external connection diagram before the equipment is
installed, commissioned or serviced.
Language specific, self-adhesive User Interface labels are provided in a bag for some
equipment.

2. HEALTH AND SAFETY

The information in the Safety Section of the equipment documentation is intended to ensure
that equipment is properly installed and handled in order to maintain it in a safe condition.
It is assumed that everyone who will be associated with the equipment will be familiar with
the contents of that Safety Section, or this Safety Guide.
When electrical equipment is in operation, dangerous voltages will be present in certain parts
of the equipment. Failure to observe warning notices, incorrect use, or improper use may
endanger personnel and equipment and also cause personal injury or physical damage.
Before working in the terminal strip area, the equipment must be isolated.
Proper and safe operation of the equipment depends on appropriate shipping and handling,
proper storage, installation and commissioning, and on careful operation, maintenance and
servicing. For this reason only qualified personnel may work on or operate the equipment.
Qualified personnel are individuals who:

• Are familiar with the installation, commissioning, and operation of the equipment and
of the system to which it is being connected;

• Are able to safely perform switching operations in accordance with accepted safety
engineering practices and are authorised to energize and de-energize equipment and
to isolate, ground, and label it;

• Are trained in the care and use of safety apparatus in accordance with safety
engineering practices;

• Are trained in emergency procedures (first aid).

The equipment documentation gives instructions for its installation, commissioning, and
operation. However, the manual cannot cover all conceivable circumstances or include
detailed information on all topics. In the event of questions or specific problems, do not take
any action without proper authorization. Contact the appropriate Schneider Electric technical
sales office and request the necessary information.
Pxxx/EN SS/G11

Page 4/8 Safety Section

3. SYMBOLS AND EXTERNAL LABELS ON THE EQUIPMENT

For safety reasons the following symbols and external labels, which may be used on the
equipment or referred to in the equipment documentation, should be understood before the
equipment is installed or commissioned.
3.1 Symbols

Caution: refer to equipment documentation Caution: risk of electric shock

Protective Conductor (*Earth) terminal Functional/Protective Conductor (*Earth)

terminal.
Note: This symbol may also be used for a
Protective Conductor (Earth) Terminal if that
terminal is part of a terminal block or sub-
assembly e.g. power supply.

*NOTE: THE TERM EARTH USED THROUGHOUT THIS GUIDE IS THE

DIRECT EQUIVALENT OF THE NORTH AMERICAN TERM
GROUND.
3.2 Labels
See Safety Guide (SFTY/4L M/G11) for equipment labelling information.

4. INSTALLING, COMMISSIONING AND SERVICING

Equipment connections
Personnel undertaking installation, commissioning or servicing work for this
equipment should be aware of the correct working procedures to ensure safety.
The equipment documentation should be consulted before installing,
commissioning, or servicing the equipment.
Terminals exposed during installation, commissioning and maintenance may
present a hazardous voltage unless the equipment is electrically isolated.
The clamping screws of all terminal block connectors, for field wiring, using M4
screws shall be tightened to a nominal torque of 1.3 Nm.
Equipment intended for rack or panel mounting is for use on a flat surface of a
Type 1 enclosure, as defined by Underwriters Laboratories (UL).
Any disassembly of the equipment may expose parts at hazardous voltage, also
electronic parts may be damaged if suitable electrostatic voltage discharge (ESD)
precautions are not taken.
If there is unlocked access to the rear of the equipment, care should be taken by
all personnel to avoid electric shock or energy hazards.
Voltage and current connections shall be made using insulated crimp terminations
to ensure that terminal block insulation requirements are maintained for safety.
Watchdog (self-monitoring) contacts are provided in numerical relays to indicate
the health of the device. Schneider Electric strongly recommends that these
contacts are hardwired into the substation's automation system, for alarm
purposes.
 Pxxx/EN SS/G11

Safety Section Page 5/8

To ensure that wires are correctly terminated the correct crimp terminal and tool
for the wire size should be used.
The equipment must be connected in accordance with the appropriate connection
diagram.
Protection Class I Equipment
- Before energizing the equipment it must be earthed using the protective
conductor terminal, if provided, or the appropriate termination of the
supply plug in the case of plug connected equipment.
- The protective conductor (earth) connection must not be removed since
the protection against electric shock provided by the equipment would be
lost.
- When the protective (earth) conductor terminal (PCT) is also used to
terminate cable screens, etc., it is essential that the integrity of the
protective (earth) conductor is checked after the addition or removal of
such functional earth connections. For M4 stud PCTs the integrity of the
protective (earth) connections should be ensured by use of a locknut or
similar.
The recommended minimum protective conductor (earth) wire size is 2.5 mm²
(3.3 mm² for North America) unless otherwise stated in the technical data section
of the equipment documentation, or otherwise required by local or country wiring
regulations.
The protective conductor (earth) connection must be low-inductance and as short
as possible.
All connections to the equipment must have a defined potential. Connections that
are pre-wired, but not used, should preferably be grounded when binary inputs
and output relays are isolated. When binary inputs and output relays are
connected to common potential, the pre-wired but unused connections should be
connected to the common potential of the grouped connections.
Before energizing the equipment, the following should be checked:
- Voltage rating/polarity (rating label/equipment documentation),
- CT circuit rating (rating label) and integrity of connections,
- Protective fuse rating,
- Integrity of the protective conductor (earth) connection (where
applicable),
- Voltage and current rating of external wiring, applicable to the application.
Accidental touching of exposed terminals
If working in an area of restricted space, such as a cubicle, where there is a risk of
electric shock due to accidental touching of terminals which do not comply with
IP20 rating, then a suitable protective barrier should be provided.
Equipment use
If the equipment is used in a manner not specified by the manufacturer, the
protection provided by the equipment may be impaired.
Removal of the equipment front panel/cover
Removal of the equipment front panel/cover may expose hazardous live parts,
which must not be touched until the electrical power is removed.
Pxxx/EN SS/G11

Page 6/8 Safety Section

UL and CSA/CUL Listed or Recognized equipment

To maintain UL and CSA/CUL Listing/Recognized status for North America the
equipment should be installed using UL or CSA Listed or Recognized parts for
the following items: connection cables, protective fuses/fuseholders or circuit
breakers, insulation crimp terminals and replacement internal battery, as
specified in the equipment documentation.
For external protective fuses a UL or CSA Listed fuse shall be used. The Listed
type shall be a Class J time delay fuse, with a maximum current rating of 15 A
and a minimum d.c. rating of 250 Vd.c., for example type AJT15.
Where UL or CSA Listing of the equipment is not required, a high rupture
capacity (HRC) fuse type with a maximum current rating of 16 Amps and a
minimum d.c. rating of 250 Vd.c. may be used, for example Red Spot type NIT or
TIA.
Equipment operating conditions
The equipment should be operated within the specified electrical and
environmental limits.
Current transformer circuits
Do not open the secondary circuit of a live CT since the high voltage produced
may be lethal to personnel and could damage insulation. Generally, for safety,
the secondary of the line CT must be shorted before opening any connections to
it.
For most equipment with ring-terminal connections, the threaded terminal block
for current transformer termination has automatic CT shorting on removal of the
module. Therefore external shorting of the CTs may not be required, the
equipment documentation should be checked to see if this applies.
For equipment with pin-terminal connections, the threaded terminal block for
current transformer termination does NOT have automatic CT shorting on removal
of the module.
External resistors, including voltage dependent resistors (VDRs)
Where external resistors, including voltage dependent resistors (VDRs), are fitted
to the equipment, these may present a risk of electric shock or burns, if touched.
Battery replacement
Where internal batteries are fitted they should be replaced with the recommended
type and be installed with the correct polarity to avoid possible damage to the
equipment, buildings and persons.
Insulation and dielectric strength testing
Insulation testing may leave capacitors charged up to a hazardous voltage. At the
end of each part of the test, the voltage should be gradually reduced to zero, to
discharge capacitors, before the test leads are disconnected.
Insertion of modules and pcb cards
Modules and PCB cards must not be inserted into or withdrawn from the
equipment whilst it is energized, since this may result in damage.
Insertion and withdrawal of extender cards
Extender cards are available for some equipment. If an extender card is used,
this should not be inserted or withdrawn from the equipment whilst it is energized.
This is to avoid possible shock or damage hazards. Hazardous live voltages may
be accessible on the extender card.
 Pxxx/EN SS/G11

Safety Section Page 7/8

External test blocks and test plugs

Great care should be taken when using external test blocks and test plugs such
as the MMLG, MMLB and MiCOM P990 types, hazardous voltages may be
accessible when using these. *CT shorting links must be in place before the
insertion or removal of MMLB test plugs, to avoid potentially lethal voltages.
*Note: When a MiCOM P992 Test Plug is inserted into the MiCOM P991 Test
Block, the secondaries of the line CTs are automatically shorted, making
them safe.
Fiber optic communication
Where fiber optic communication devices are fitted, these should not be viewed
directly. Optical power meters should be used to determine the operation or
signal level of the device.
Cleaning
The equipment may be cleaned using a lint free cloth dampened with clean water,
when no connections are energized. Contact fingers of test plugs are normally
protected by petroleum jelly, which should not be removed.

5. DECOMMISSIONING AND DISPOSAL

De-commissioning
The supply input (auxiliary) for the equipment may include capacitors across the
supply or to earth. To avoid electric shock or energy hazards, after completely
isolating the supplies to the equipment (both poles of any dc supply), the
capacitors should be safely discharged via the external terminals prior to
de-commissioning.
Disposal
It is recommended that incineration and disposal to water courses is avoided.
The equipment should be disposed of in a safe manner. Any equipment
containing batteries should have them removed before disposal, taking
precautions to avoid short circuits. Particular regulations within the country of
operation, may apply to the disposal of the equipment.
Pxxx/EN SS/G11

Page 8/8 Safety Section

6. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR SAFETY

Unless otherwise stated in the equipment technical manual, the following data is applicable.
6.1 Protective fuse rating
The recommended maximum rating of the external protective fuse for equipments is 16A,
high rupture capacity (HRC) Red Spot type NIT, or TIA, or equivalent. Unless otherwise
stated in equipment technical manual, the following data is applicable. The protective fuse
should be located as close to the unit as possible.
CAUTION - CTs must NOT be fused since open circuiting them may
produce lethal hazardous voltages.

6.2 Protective Class

IEC 60255-27: 2005 Class I (unless otherwise specified in the equipment

documentation). This equipment requires a protective
EN 60255-27: 2006
conductor (earth) connection to ensure user safety.

6.3 Installation Category

IEC 60255-27: 2005 Installation Category III (Overvoltage Category III):

EN 60255-27: 2006 Distribution level, fixed installation.
Equipment in this category is qualification tested at
5 kV peak, 1.2/50 µs, 500 Ω, 0.5 J, between all
supply circuits and earth and also between
independent circuits.

6.4 Environment
The equipment is intended for indoor installation and use only. If it is required for use in an
outdoor environment then it must be mounted in a specific cabinet or housing which will
enable it to meet the requirements of IEC 60529 with the classification of degree of
protection IP54 (dust and splashing water protected).
Pollution Degree - Pollution Degree 2 Compliance is demonstrated by reference
Altitude - Operation up to 2000m to safety standards.
IEC 60255-27:2005
EN 60255-27: 2006
Introduction P72x/EN IT/C21

MiCOM P721/P723

INTRODUCTION
Introduction P72x/EN IT/C21

MiCOM P721/P723 Page 1/10

CONTENTS

1. INTRODUCTION 3

2. HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL 4

3. INTRODUCTION TO THE MiCOM RANGE 5

4. INTRODUCTION TO THE MiCOM P721 & P723 PROTECTIONS 6

5. MAIN FUNCTIONS 7
5.1 Main functions 7
5.2 General functions 7
5.3 Ordering options 9
P72x/EN IT/C21 Introduction

Page 2/10 MiCOM P721/P723

BLANK PAGE
Introduction P72x/EN IT/C21

MiCOM P721/P723 Page 3/10

1. INTRODUCTION
The differential protections of the MiCOM P72x range are Schneider Electric numerical high
impedance differential protection. MiCOM P721 and P723 have been designed to provide
differential protection and a high impedance differential protection
The differential protection consists to measure the summation of n Current Transformers
(CTs) secondary currents. Without internal fault, this sum is null. If an internal fault occurs,
the protection measures the leak current. If an external fault occurs (with non-saturated CT),
the Kirchhoff's law is conserved and no current is measured.
The high impedance differential protection main application is a CT saturation in a busbar
(when a serious and external fault occurs).
P72x/EN IT/C21 Introduction

Page 4/10 MiCOM P721/P723

2. HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL

This manual provides a description of MiCOM P721 and P723 functions and settings. The
goal of this manual is to allow the user to become familiar with the application, installation,
setting and commissioning of these relays.
This manual has the following format:
P72x/EN IT Introduction
The introduction presents the documentation structure and a
brief presentation of the relay, including functions.
P72x/EN IN Handling, installation and case dimensions
This section provides logistics general instructions for handling,
installing and stocking..
P72x/EN FT User Guide
This section provides relay settings with a brief explanation of
each setting and detailed description. It also provides recording
and measurements functions including the configuration of the
event and disturbance recorder and measurement functions.
P72x/EN HI Menu content tables
This section shows the menu structure of the relays, with a
complete list of all of the menu settings.
P72x/EN AP Application Notes
This section includes a description of common power system
applications of the relay, calculation of suitable settings, some
typical worked examples, and how to apply the settings to the
relay.
P72x/EN TD Technical data and curve characteristics
This section provides technical data including setting ranges,
accuracy limits, recommended operating conditions, ratings and
performance data. Compliance with norms and international
standards is quoted where appropriate.
P72x/EN CT Communication database
This section provides an overview regarding the communication
interfaces of the relay. Detailed protocol mappings, semantics,
profiles and interoperability tables are not provided within this
manual. Separate documents are available per protocol,
available for download from our website.
P72x/EN CM Commissioning and Maintenance Guide
Instructions on how to commission the relay, comprising checks
on the calibration and functionality of the relay.
P72x/EN CO Connection diagrams
This section provides the mechanical and electrical description.
External wiring connections to the relay are indicated.
P72x/EN RS Commissioning test and records sheets
This section contains checks on the calibration and functionality
of the relay.
P72x/EN VC Hardware/Software version history and compatibility
History of all hardware and software releases for the product.
Introduction P72x/EN IT/C21

MiCOM P721/P723 Page 5/10

3. INTRODUCTION TO THE MiCOM RANGE

MiCOM is a comprehensive solution capable of meeting all electricity supply requirements. It
comprises of a range of components, systems and services from Schneider Electric.
Flexibility is central to the MiCOM concept.
MiCOM provides the ability to define an application solution and, through extensive
communication capabilities, to integrate this solution with your power supply control system.
The components within MiCOM are:

• P range protection relays

• C range control products

• M range measurement products for accurate metering and monitoring

• S range versatile PC support and substation control packages

MiCOM products include extensive facilities for recording information on the state and
behaviour of a power system, using disturbance and fault records.
They can also provide measurements of the power system at regular intervals to a control
centre enabling remote monitoring and control to take place.
For up-to-date information on any MiCOM product, refer to the technical publications, which
can be obtained from: Schneider Electric or your local sales office; alternatively visit our web
site.
www.schneider-electric.com
P72x/EN IT/C21 Introduction

Page 6/10 MiCOM P721/P723

4. INTRODUCTION TO THE MiCOM P721 & P723 PROTECTIONS

The range of MiCOM protection relays is built on the success of the MIDOS, K and MODN
ranges by incorporating the last changes in digital technology. Relays from the MiCOM P72x
range are fully compatible and use the same modular box concept.
MiCOM P721 and P723 high impedance differential protections provide differential protection
and high impedance differential protection (with P79x high impedance accessory) for
machines, power transformers and busbar installations as well as for other applications
where differential protection is required.
The P721 relay provides simple restricted earth current fault protection. Furthermore, P723
relay is used for 3-phases fault protection.
In addition to its protective functions, each relay offers control and recording features. They
can be fully integrated to a control system so protection, control, data acquisition and
recording of faults, events and disturbances can be made available.
The relays are equipped on the front panel with a liquid crystal display (LCD) with 2 x 16
back-lit alphanumerical characters, a tactile 7 button keypad (to access all settings, clear
alarms and read measurements) and 8 LEDs that indicate the status of MiCOM P721 and
P723 protections.
In addition, the use of the RS485 communication port makes it possible to read, reinitialise
and change the settings of the relays, if required, from a local or remote PC computer loaded
with MiCOM S1 software.
Its flexibility of use, reduced maintenance requirements and ease of integration allow the
MiCOM P72x range to provide an adaptable solution for the problems of the protection of
electric networks.
Introduction P72x/EN IT/C21

MiCOM P721/P723 Page 7/10

5. MAIN FUNCTIONS
5.1 Main functions
The following table shows the functions available for the different models of the MiCOM
P72x range of relays.

ANSI
FEATURES P721 P723
CODES
Phase segregated high impedance current differential
87 •
protection
95 Phase bus-wire supervision •
87N Restricted earth fault protection • •
95N Earth bus-wire supervision • •
87CZ Check zone input •
50BF Breaker failure detection • •

5.2 General functions

The following table shows the general features available.

GENERAL FEATURES P721 P723

Number of digital inputs 2 5
Total number of outputs
4 8
relays
Events recording 250 250
Fault recording 25 25
Disturbance recording 5 5
Instantaneous records 5 5
Setting group 2 2
Auxiliary timers 2 4
Communication IEC60870-5-103, DNP 3.0 & Modbus RTU
• •
(rear and front port)
Settings software MiCOM S1 • •
Logic equation AND, OR and NOT gates (8 equations) • •
Measurements Neutral supervision / differential currents
• •
(INdiff)
Phase supervision / differential currents
•
(IAdiff, IBdiff and ICdiff)
Maximum differential currents (ImaxAdiff,
•
ImaxBdiff, and ImaxCdiff)
Maximum differential neutral currents
• •
(ImaxNdiff
P72x/EN IT/C21 Introduction

Page 8/10 MiCOM P721/P723

Application overview

FIGURE 1: FUNCTIONAL DIAGRAM

Introduction P72x/EN IT/C21

MiCOM P721/P723 Page 9/10

5.3 Ordering options

Information Required with Order

Relay Type (differential protection) P72 0 0 0

Variant
Simple phase high impedance differential
protection 1
Simple phase or three phase high impedance
protection with binary I/O extension 3
Auxiliary and digital input voltage
Auxiliary voltage digital input voltage
(1)
48-250 Vdc / 48-240 Vac 105-145 Vdc H
48-250 Vdc / 48-240 Vac 48-250 Vdc (ENA UK) T
(1)
48-250 Vdc / 48-240 Vac 110 Vdc –30% / +20% V
(1)
48-250 Vdc / 48-240 Vac 220 Vdc –30% / +20% W
24-250Vdc / 48-240Vac 24-250 Vdc / 24 / 240 Vdc Z
Rear port communication interface
Modbus 1
K-Bus/Courier 2
IEC 60870-5-103 3
DNP 3.0 4
Default HMI language
French 0
English / American 1
Spanish 2
German 3
Italian 4
Portuguese 7
Platform
phase 2 with standard software 2
Software
Unless specified the latest version will be delivered
Mounting option
(2)
None (default) 0
Pre-fixed HMI (no withdrawability) 1
(2)
Sealed cover 2
Pre-fixed HMI + Sealed cover 3
(1)
: special application
(2) :
: not available
P72x/EN IT/C21 Introduction

Page 10/10 MiCOM P721/P723

BLANK PAGE
Handling, Installation and Case Dimensions P72x/EN IN/C21

MiCOM P721/P723

HANDLING, INSTALLATION
AND CASE DIMENSIONS
Handling, Installation and Case Dimensions P72x/EN IN/C21

MiCOM P721/P723 Page 1/10

CONTENTS

1. GENERAL CONSIDERATIONS 3
1.1 Receipt of relays 3
1.2 Electrostatic discharge (ESD) 3

2. HANDLING OF ELECTRONIC EQUIPMENT 4

3. RELAY MOUNTING 5

4. UNPACKING 6

5. STORAGE 7

6. DIMENSIONS 8
6.1 Connection of power terminals, and Signals terminals 8
6.2 Communication port RS485 9
6.3 Earthing 9

7. CASE DIMENSIONS 10
P72x/EN IN/C21 Handling, Installation and Case Dimensions

Page 2/10 MiCOM P721/P723

BLANK PAGE
Handling, Installation and Case Dimensions P72x/EN IN/C21

MiCOM P721/P723 Page 3/10

1. GENERAL CONSIDERATIONS
BEFORE CARRYING OUT ANY WORK ON THE EQUIPMENT, THE
USER SHOULD BE FAMILIAR WITH THE CONTENTS OF THE SAFETY
GUIDE SFTY/4LM/E11 OR LATER ISSUE, OR THE SAFETY AND
TECHNICAL DATA SECTIONS OF THE TECHNICAL MANUAL AND
ALSO THE RATINGS ON THE EQUIPMENT RATING LABEL.

1.1 Receipt of relays

Protective relays, although generally of robust construction, require careful treatment prior to
installation on site. Upon receipt, relays should be examined immediately to ensure no
damage has been sustained in transit. If damage has been sustained during transit a claim
should be made to the transport contractor and Schneider Electric should be promptly
notified.
Relays that are supplied unmounted and not intended to be installed immediately should be
returned with their protective polythene bags.
1.2 Electrostatic discharge (ESD)
The relays use components that are sensitive to electrostatic discharges.
The electronic circuits are well protected by the metal case and the internal module should
not be withdrawn unnecessarily. When handling the module outside its case, care should be
taken to avoid contact with components and electrical connections. If removed from the case
for storage, the module should be placed in an electrically conducting antistatic bag.
There are no setting adjustments within the module and it is advised that it is not
unnecessarily disassembled. Although the printed circuit boards are plugged together, the
connectors are a manufacturing aid and not intended for frequent dismantling; in fact
considerable effort may be required to separate them. Touching the printed circuit board
should be avoided, since complementary metal oxide semiconductors (CMOS) are used,
which can be damaged by static electricity discharged from the body.
P72x/EN IN/C21 Handling, Installation and Case Dimensions

Page 4/10 MiCOM P721/P723

2. HANDLING OF ELECTRONIC EQUIPMENT

A person’s normal movements can easily generate electrostatic potentials of several
thousand volts. Discharge of these voltages into semiconductor devices when handling
electronic circuits can cause serious damage, which often may not be immediately apparent
but the reliability of the circuit will have been reduced.
The electronic circuits are completely safe from electrostatic discharge when housed in the
case. Do not expose them to risk of damage by withdrawing modules unnecessarily.
Each module incorporates the highest practicable protection for its semiconductor devices.
However, if it becomes necessary to withdraw a module, the following precautions should be
taken to preserve the high reliability and long life for which the equipment has been designed
and manufactured.
1. Before removing a module, ensure that you are at the same electrostatic potential as
the equipment by touching the case.
2. Handle the module by its frontplate, frame or edges of the printed circuit board. Avoid
touching the electronic components, printed circuit track or connectors.
3. Do not pass the module to another person without first ensuring you are both at the
same electrostatic potential. Shaking hands achieves equipotential.
4. Place the module on an antistatic surface, or on a conducting surface which is at the
same potential as yourself.
5. Store or transport the module in a conductive bag.
If you are making measurements on the internal electronic circuitry of an equipment in
service, it is preferable that you are earthed to the case with a conductive wrist strap. Wrist
straps should have a resistance to ground between 500kΩ – 10MΩ.
If a wrist strap is not available you should maintain regular contact with the case to prevent a
build-up of static. Instrumentation which may be used for making measurements should be
earthed to the case whenever possible.
More information on safe working procedures for all electronic equipment can be found in
BS5783 and IEC 147-OF. It is strongly recommended that detailed investigations on
electronic circuitry or modification work should be carried out in a special handling area such
as described in the above-mentioned BS and IEC documents.
Handling, Installation and Case Dimensions P72x/EN IN/C21

MiCOM P721/P723 Page 5/10

3. RELAY MOUNTING
Relays are dispatched either individually or as part of a panel/rack assembly.
If an MMLG test block is to be included it should be positioned at the right-hand side of the
assembly (viewed from the front). Modules should remain protected by their metal case
during assembly into a panel or rack.
For individually mounted relays an outline diagram is supplied in section 6 of this chapter
showing the panel cut-outs and hole centres.
P72x/EN IN/C21 Handling, Installation and Case Dimensions

Page 6/10 MiCOM P721/P723

4. UNPACKING
Care must be taken when unpacking and installing the relays so that none of the parts is
damaged or the settings altered. Relays must only be handled by skilled personnel. The
installation should be clean, dry and reasonably free from dust and excessive vibration. The
site should be well lit to facilitate inspection. Relays that have been removed from their cases
should not be left in situations where they are exposed to dust or damp. This particularly
applies to installations which are being carried out at the same time as construction work.
Handling, Installation and Case Dimensions P72x/EN IN/C21

MiCOM P721/P723 Page 7/10

5. STORAGE
If relays are not to be installed immediately upon receipt they should be stored in a place
free from dust and moisture in their original cartons. Where de-humidifier bags have been
included in the packing they should be retained. The action of the de-humidifier crystals will
be impaired if the bag has been exposed to ambient conditions and may be restored by
gently heating the bag for about an hour, prior to replacing it in the carton.
Dust which collects on a carton may, on subsequent unpacking, find its way into the relay; in
damp conditions the carton and packing may become impregnated with moisture and the de-
humifier will lose its efficiency.
Storage temperature: –25°C to +70°C.
P72x/EN IN/C21 Handling, Installation and Case Dimensions

Page 8/10 MiCOM P721/P723

6. DIMENSIONS
6.1 Connection of power terminals, and Signals terminals
The individual equipment are delivered with sufficient M4 screws to connect the relay via
annular terminals, with a maximum recommended of two annular terminals per contact.
If necessary, Schneider Electric can provide annular terminals to crimp. 5 references exist
according to the section of the wire (see below). Each reference corresponds to a sachet of
100 terminals.
Handling, Installation and Case Dimensions P72x/EN IN/C21

MiCOM P721/P723 Page 9/10

To insure the insulation of the terminals and to respect the security and safety instructions,
an isolated sleeve can be used.
We recommend the following cable cross-sections:

− Auxiliary sources Vaux: 1.5 mm²

− Communication Port see paragraph 6.2

− Other circuits 1.0 mm²

Because of the limitations of the annular terminals, the maximum wire cross-section which
can be used for the connector blocks (for current inputs and signals) is of 6mm² by using non
-insulated annular terminals. When only pre- insulated terminals can be used, the maximum
wire cross-section is reduced to 2, 63 mm² per annular terminal. If a more significant wire
cross-section is necessary, two wires can be put in parallel, each one finished by a separate
annular terminal.
All the terminal blocks used for connections, except of the port RS485, must be able to
withstand a nominal voltage of minimum 300V peak value.
We recommend to protect the auxiliary source connection by using a fuse of type NIT or TIA
with a breaking capacity of 16A. For security reasons, do never install fuses in current
transformers circuits. The other circuits must be protected by fuses.
6.2 Communication port RS485
Connections to RS485 is made using annular terminals. It is recommended that a two core
screened cable, is used with a maximum total length of 1000 m or a200nF total cable
capacitance.
Typical specification:

− Each core: 16/0.2 mm copper conductor, PVC insulated.

− Nominal conductor area: 0.5 mm² per core

− Screen: Overall braid, PVC sheathed

− Linear capacitance between conductor and earth: 100pF/m

6.3 Earthing
Each equipment must be connected to a local earth terminal by the intermediary of a M4
earth terminals. We recommend a wire of minimal section of 2.5 mm², with annular terminals
on the side of the equipment. Because of the limitations of the annular terminals, the
possible maximum section is of 6mm² by wire. If a larger section is necessary, one can use
cables connected in parallel, each one ending with an annular terminal separated on the side
of the equipment. One can also use a metal bar.
NOTE: To prevent any electrolytic risk between copper conductor or brass
conductor and the back plate of the equipment, it is necessary to take
precautions to isolate them one from the other. This can be done in
several ways, for example by inserting between the conductor and the
case a plated nickel or insulated ring washer or by using a tin
terminals.
P72x/EN IN/C21 Handling, Installation and Case Dimensions

Page 10/10 MiCOM P721/P723

7. CASE DIMENSIONS
MiCOM P721 and P723 relays are available in a 4U metal case for panel or flush mounting.
Weight: 1.7 to 2.1 Kg
External size: Height case 152 mm
front panel 177 mm
Width case 97 mm
front panel 103 mm
Depth case 226 mm
front panel + case 252 mm

P0078ENb

MiCOM P721 AND P723 RELAYS CASE DIMENSIONS

NOTE: The chassis is normally secured in the case by four screws (Self tap
screws 6x1.4), to ensure good seating. The fixing screws should be
fitted in normal service (do not add washers). Do not discard these
screws.
User Guide P72x/EN FT/C21

MiCOM P721/P723

USER GUIDE
User Guide P72x/EN FT/C21

MiCOM P721/P723 Page 1/38

CONTENTS

1. PRESENTATION OF MiCOM P721 AND P723 PROTECTIONS 3

1.1 USER INTERFACE 4
1.1.1 Relay Overview 4
1.1.2 Front panel description 5
1.1.3 LCD display and keypad description 6
1.1.4 LEDs 7
1.1.5 Description of the two areas under the top and bottom flaps 8
1.1.6 The USB/RS232 cable (to power and set the relay) 8
1.2 Menu structure 9
1.3 Password 9
1.3.1 Password protection 9
1.3.2 Password entry 9
1.3.3 Changing the password 10
1.3.4 Change of setting invalidation 10
1.4 Displays of Alarm & Warning Messages 10
1.4.1 Electrical Network Alarms 10

2. MENUS 13
2.1 Default display 13
2.2 Menu contents description 13
2.3 OP PARAMETERS Menu 14
2.4 CONFIGURATION menu 15
2.4.1 Submenu CONFIGURATION 15
2.4.2 Submenus LED 5 to 8 16
2.4.3 Submenu GROUP SELECT 18
2.4.4 Submenu ALARMS 18
2.4.5 Submenu INPUTS 19
2.4.6 Submenu OUTPUT RELAYS 19
2.5 MEASUREMENTS Menu 20
2.5.1 If Earth protection is selected 20
2.5.2 If Phase protection is selected (P723 only) 20
2.6 COMMUNICATION Menu 21
2.7 PROTECTION Menu 22
2.7.1 Earth protection configuration 22
2.7.2 Phase protection configuration 24
2.8 AUTOMAT. CTRL Menu 25
2.8.1 Submenu Trip Commands 25
2.8.2 Submenu Latch of trip output relay by Function 26
2.8.3 Submenu Blocking Logic 1 / 2 27
2.8.4 Outputs Relays submenu 27
P72x/EN FT/C21 User Guide

Page 2/38 MiCOM P721/P723

2.8.5 Latch of the auxiliary output relays (RL2 to RL8) 29

2.8.6 Inputs submenu 29
2.8.7 CIRCUIT BREAKER FAILURE submenu 31
2.8.8 Submenu Logic Equations 31
2.9 RECORDS Menu 34
2.9.1 Fault Record submenu 34
2.9.2 INSTANTANEOUS RECORDS submenu 35
2.9.3 DISTURBANCE RECORD submenu 35

3. WIRING 36
3.1 Auxiliary supply 36
3.2 Current measurement inputs 36
3.3 Logic inputs 36
3.4 Output relays 36
3.5 Communication 37
3.5.1 RS485 rear communication port 37
3.5.2 RS232 front communication port 37
User Guide P72x/EN FT/C21

MiCOM P721/P723 Page 3/38

1. PRESENTATION OF MiCOM P721 AND P723 PROTECTIONS

MiCOM P721 and P723 are fully numerical relays designed to perform electrical protection
and control functions.
The following section describes the MiCOM P72x range and the main differences between
the different models.
MiCOM relays are powered either from a DC (2 voltage ranges) or an AC auxiliary power
supply.
Using the front panel, the user can easily navigate through the menu and access data,
change settings, read measurements, etc.
Eight LEDs situated in the front panel help the user to quickly know the status of the relay
and the presence of alarms. Alarms that have been detected are stored and can be
displayed on the back-lit LCD.
Any short time voltage interruption (<50ms) is filtered and regulated through the auxiliary
power supply.
Regarding current inputs, MiCOM P721 has one earth current input available for 1A and 5A
rated CTs.
MiCOM P723 has 3 phase and 1 earth current inputs available for 1 and 5 Amps rated CTs.
On each one of these relays, it is possible to combine 1 and 5 Amp current inputs together (i-
e a mix between 1A for earth fault and 5A for phase connections).
MiCOM P721 and P723 relays continuously measure phase and earth currents and take into
account the true RMS current value up to 10th harmonic (at 50 Hz).
Output relays are freely configurable and can be activated by any of the control or protection
functions available in the relay. Logic inputs can also be assigned to various control
functions.
On their rear terminals MiCOM P721 and P723 have a standard RS485 port available. When
ordering, the user can choose between the following communication protocols: ModBus
RTU, IEC 60870-5-103 or DNP3.0.
Using RS485 communication channel, all stored information (measurements, alarms, and
parameters) can be read and settings can be modified when the chosen protocol allows it.
Reading and modification of this data can be carried out on site with a standard PC loaded
with Schneider Electric setting software.
Thanks to its RS485 based communication, MiCOM P721 and P723 relays can be
connected directly to a digital control system. All the available data can then be gathered by
a substation control system and be processed either locally or remotely.
P72x/EN FT/C21 User Guide

Page 4/38 MiCOM P721/P723

1.1 USER INTERFACE

1.1.1 Relay Overview
The next figures show the P721 and P723 protections.

The table shows the case size.

Height Depth Width

4U (177mm) 226mm 20 TE

The hinged covers at the top and bottom of the relay are shown closed. Extra physical
protection for the front panel can be provided by an optional transparent front cover; this
allows read only access to the relays settings and data but does not affect the relays IP
rating. When full access to the relay keypad is required to edit the settings, the transparent
cover can be unclipped and removed when the top and bottom hinged covers are open.
User Guide P72x/EN FT/C21

MiCOM P721/P723 Page 5/38

1.1.2 Front panel description

MiCOM P721 and P723 relay front panel allows the user to easily enter relay settings,
display measured values and alarms and to clearly display the status of the relay.

Top cover

Fixed
function
LED Keypad

User
programmable
function LEDs

Cover (not used)

Front comms port

P3602ENg

FIGURE 1: MiCOM P721 AND P723 FRONT PANEL DESCRIPTION

The front panel of the relay has three separate sections:

1. The LCD display and the keypad,
2. The LEDs
3. The two zones under the upper and lower flaps.
P72x/EN FT/C21 User Guide

Page 6/38 MiCOM P721/P723

1.1.3 LCD display and keypad description

The front panel components are shown below. The front panel functionality is identical for
the P721 and P723 relays.
1.1.3.1 LCD display
In the front panel, a liquid crystal display (LCD) displays settings, measured values and
alarms. Data is accessed through a menu structure.
The LCD has two lines, with sixteen characters each. A back-light is activated when a key is
pressed and will remain lit for five minutes after the last key press. This allows the user to be
able to read the display in most lighting conditions.

1.1.3.2 Keypad
The keypad has seven keys divided into two groups:

• Two keys located just under the screen (keys  and c).

Keys  and c are used to read and acknowledge alarms. To display successive alarms,
press key c. Alarms are displayed in reverse order of their detection (the most recent alarm
first, the oldest alarm last). To acknowledge the alarms, the user can either acknowledge
each alarm using  or go to the end of the ALARM menu and acknowledge all the alarms
at the same time.
When navigating through submenus, key  is also used to come back to the head line of
the corresponding menu.
NOTE: To acknowledge a relay latched refer to the corresponding submenu
section.

• Four main keys , , ,  located in the middle of the front panel.

They are used to navigate through the different menus and submenus and to do the setting
of the relay.
The key  is used to validate a choice or a value (modification of settings).

Clear key Read key

Arrow keys

Enter key
Arrow keys
P3950ENc
User Guide P72x/EN FT/C21

MiCOM P721/P723 Page 7/38

1.1.4 LEDs
The LED labels on the front panel are by default written in English, however the user has
self-adhesive labels available with MiCOM relays on which it is possible to write using a ball
point pen.
The top four LEDs indicate the status of the relay (Trip condition, alarm LED, equipment
failure, auxiliary supply).
The four lower LEDs are freely programmable by the user and can be assigned to display a
threshold crossing for example (available for all models) or to show the status of the logic
inputs.The description of each one of these eight LEDs located in the left side of the front
view is given hereafter (numbered from the top to bottom from 1 to 8):

LED 1

LED 8 P3951ENa

LED 1 Colour: RED Label: Trip

LED 1 indicates that the relay has issued a trip order to the cut-off element. This LED
recopies the trip order issued to the Trip logic output. Its normal state is unlit. As soon as a
triggering order is issued, the LED lights up. It is cleared when the associated alarm is
acknowledged either through the front panel, or by a remote command, a digital input, or by
a new fault (CONFIGURATION/Alarms menu).
LED 2 Colour: ORANGE Label: ALARM
LED 2 indicates that the relay has detected an alarm. This alarm can either be a threshold
crossing (instantaneous), or a trip order (time delayed). As soon as an alarm is detected, the
LED starts blinking. After all the alarms have been read, the LED lights up continuously.
After acknowledgement of all the alarms, the LED is extinguished.
NOTE: It is possible to configure the instantaneous alarms to be self reset or
not by choosing Yes or No in the CONFIGURATION/Alarms Menu.
The alarm LED can be reset either through the front panel, or by remote command, by a
digital input, or by a new fault (CONFIGURATION/Alarms menu).
LED 3 Colour: ORANGE Label: Warning
LED 3 indicates internal alarms of the relay. When the relay detects a « non critical » internal
alarm (typically a communication failure), the LED starts blinking continuously. When the
relay detects a fault that is considered as « critical », the LED lights up continuously. Only
the disappearance of the cause of the fault can clear this LED (repair of the module,
clearance of the Fault).
LED 4 Colour: GREEN Label: Healthy
LED 4 indicates that the relay is powered by an auxiliary source at the nominal range.
LED 5 to 8 Colour: RED Label: Aux.1 to 4.
P72x/EN FT/C21 User Guide

Page 8/38 MiCOM P721/P723

These LEDs are user programmable and can be set to display information about
instantaneous and time-delayed thresholds as well as the status of the logic inputs. Under
the CONFIGURATION/LED menu of the relay, the user can select the information he wishes
to associate with each LED. He can affect more than one function to one LED. The LED will
then light up when at least one of the associated information is valid (OR gate). The LED is
cleared when all the associated alarms are acknowledged.
1.1.5 Description of the two areas under the top and bottom flaps
1.1.5.1 Relay Identification
Under the upper flap, a label identifies the relay according to its model number (order
number) and its serial number. This information defines the product in a way that is unique.
In all your requests, please make reference to these two numbers.
Under the model and serial number, you will find information about the level of voltage of the
auxiliary supply and the nominal earth current value.
1.1.5.2 Lower flap
Under the lower flap, a RS232 port is available in all MiCOM relays. It can be used either to
download a new version of the application software version into the relay flash memory or to
download/retrieve settings plugging a laptop loaded with MiCOM S1 setting software.
To withdraw more easily the active part of the MiCOM relay (i-e the chassis) from its case,
open and remove the two flaps, then with a 3mm screwdriver, turn the extractor located
under the upper flap, and pull it out of its case pulling the flaps towards you.
1.1.6 The USB/RS232 cable (to power and set the relay)
The USB/RS232 cable is able to perform the following functions:
1. It is able to power the relay from its front port. This allows the user to view or modify
data on the relay even when the auxiliary power supply of the relay has failed or when
the relay is not connected to any power supply. The USB port of the PC supplies the
power necessary to energize the relay. This lasts as long as the battery of the PC can
last.
2. It provides an USB / RS 232 interface between the MiCOM relay and the PC. This
allows the user to be able to change the setting of the relay using a PC with its USB
port.
It eases the use of the relay allowing the retrieval of records and disturbance files for
example when the auxiliary supply has failed or is not available.
The associated driver (supplied with the relay) needs to be installed in the PC. For more
information, refer to MiCOM E2 User Guide.
User Guide P72x/EN FT/C21

MiCOM P721/P723 Page 9/38

1.2 Menu structure

The relay’s menu is arranged in a tabular structure. Each setting in the menu is referred to
as a cell, and each cell in the menu may be accessed by reference to a row and column
address. The settings are arranged so that each column contains related settings, for
example all of the disturbance recorder settings are contained within the same column. As
shown in the figure, the top row of each column contains the heading that describes the
settings contained within that column. Movement between the columns of the menu can only
be made at the column heading level. A complete list of all of the menu settings is given in
the Menu Content tables (P72x/EH HI section).

Column header

OP
Config. Measur. Comm. Protections Autom. Ctrl Records
param

Column
data
settings

P0106ENb

MENU STRUCTURE

1.3 Password
1.3.1 Password protection
A password is required for relay settings, especially when changing the various thresholds,
time delays, communication parameters, allocation of inputs and outputs relays.
The password consists of four capital characters. When leaving factory, the password is set
to AAAA. The user can define his own combination of four characters.
Should the password be lost or forgotten, the modification of the stored parameters is
blocked. It is then necessary to contact the manufacturer or his representative and a stand-
by password specific to the relay may be obtained.
The programming mode is indicated with the letter "P" on the right hand side of the display
on each menu heading. The letter "P" remains present as long as the password is active
(5 minutes if there is no action on the keypad).
1.3.2 Password entry
The input of the password is requested as soon as a modification of a parameter is made for
any one of the six/eight menus and the submenus. The user enters each one of the 4
characters and then validates the entire password with .

After 5 seconds, the display returns to the point of the preceding menu.
If no key is pressed inside of 5 minutes, the password is deactivated. A new password
request is associated with any subsequent parameter modification.
P72x/EN FT/C21 User Guide

Page 10/38 MiCOM P721/P723

1.3.3 Changing the password

To change an active password, go to the OP. PARAMETERS menu and then to the
Password submenu. Enter the current password and validate it. Then press  and enter the
new password character by character and validate the new password using .

The message NEW PASSWORD OK is displayed to indicate that the new password has
been accepted.
1.3.4 Change of setting invalidation
The procedure to modify a setting is described in the following sections of this manual.
If there is a need to get back to the old setting push key  before validating the setting
change. The following message will then appear on the LCD for a few seconds and the old
setting will remain unchanged.

UPGRADE
CANCEL

1.4 Displays of Alarm & Warning Messages

Alarm messages are displayed directly on the front panel LCD. They have priority over the
default display presenting measured current values. As soon as the relay detects an alarm
condition (crossing of a threshold for example), the associated message is displayed on the
front panel LCD and the LED Alarm (LED 2) lights up.
We distinguish two types of alarm and warning messages:
- Alarm messages generated by the electrical power network.
- Warning messages caused by hardware or software faults from the relay.
1.4.1 Electrical Network Alarms
Any crossing of a threshold (instantaneous or time delay) generates an "electrical network
alarm". The involved threshold is indicated. Regarding the phase thresholds, the phase
designation (A, B or C) is also displayed.
If several alarms are triggered, they are all stored in their order of appearance and presented
on the LCD in reverse order of their detection (the most recent alarm first, the oldest alarm
last). Each alarm message is numbered and the total number of alarm messages is
displayed.
The user can read all the alarm messages pressing c.
The user acknowledges and clears the alarm messages from the LCD pressing .
The user can acknowledge each alarm message one by one or all by going to the end of the
list to acknowledge, and clear, all the alarm messages pressing .
The control of the ALARM LED (LED 2) is directly assigned to the status of the alarm
messages stored in the memory.
If one or several messages are NOT READ and NOT ACKNOWLEDGED, the ALARM LED
(LED 2) flashes.
If all the messages have been READ but NOT ACKNOWLEDGED, the ALARM LED (LED 2)
lights up continuously.
If all the messages have been ACKNOWLEDGED, and cleared, if the cause that generated
the alarm disappears, the ALARM LED (LED 2) is extinguished.
User Guide P72x/EN FT/C21

MiCOM P721/P723 Page 11/38

The different electrical system alarms are listed below:

Alarm Signification
[95] SUP + phase fault Phase bus-wire supervision alarm (phase A, B or C).
indication
[95] tSUP + phase fault Time delayed phase bus-wire supervision alarm (phase A, B
indication or C). This alarm acknowledges [95] SUP alarm.
[87] DIFF + phase fault Phase segregated high impedance current differential
indication protection alarm (phase A, B or C).
[87] tDIFF + phase fault Phase segregated high impedance current differential
indication protection alarm (phase A, B or C). This alarm
acknowledges [87] DIFF alarm.
[95N] SUP Earth bus-wire supervision alarm.
[95N] tSUP Time delayed earth bus-wire supervision alarm. This alarm
acknowledges [95N] SUP alarm.
[87N] DIFF Earth high impedance current differential protection alarm
[87N] tDIFF Time delayed earth high impedance current differential
protection alarm. This alarm acknowledges [87N] DIFF
alarm.
[87CZ] check zone Check zone input. This alarm appears after [95] tSUP.
Buswire shorting Buswire shorting information.
tAux 1 / tAux2 / tAux3 / t AUX1, t AUX2, t AUX 3 and t AUX 4 time-out. These alarms
tAux4 can be inhibited using CONFIGURATION/ALARMS menu
tEquation A to H t Equation A, B, C, D, E F,G and H
CB Failure (50BF) Circuit breaker failure indication (the CB does not trip on tBF
time. tBF can be set under the AUTOMAT. CTRL/CIRCUIT
BREAKER Fail menu.
Logical output relays At least one output relay is latched.
latched
Maintenance Mode The relay is in maintenance mode.

Relay Hardware or Software Warning Messages

Any software or hardware fault internal to MiCOM relay generates a "hardware/software
alarm" that is stored in memory as a "Hardware Alarm". If several hardware alarms are
detected they are all stored in their order of appearance. The warning messages are
presented on the LCD in reverse order of their detection (the most recent first and the oldest
last). Each warning message is numbered and the total stored is shown.
The user can read all warning messages pressing c, without entering the password.
It is not possible to acknowledge and clear warning messages caused by internal relay
hardware or software failure. This message can only be cleared once the cause of the
hardware or software failure has been removed.
The control of the WARNING LED (LED 3) is directly assigned to the status of the warning
messages stored in the memory.
If the internal hardware or software failure is major (i.e. the relay cannot perform protection
functions), the WARNING LED (LED 3) lights up continuously.

− major fault: Protection and automation functions of the equipment are blocked. In this
condition, the protection relay detects the corresponding fault and activates RL0 Watch
Dog relay (35-36 terminals contact is closed).

For instance: the “DEF. ANA” fault (fault in the analog circuit channel) is considered as a
major fault because the protection functions will not operate correctly.
P72x/EN FT/C21 User Guide

Page 12/38 MiCOM P721/P723

− minor fault: Protection and automation functions of the relay operate. A minor fault will not
activate RL0 Watch Dog relay (35-36 terminals contact is closed, 36-37 terminals is
open). This fault causes a LED alarm and is displayed on the LCD panel.
The Watch Dog relay controls the correct operation of the protection and automation
function. This relay fault “RL0 relay” is activated if the following functions or checks are
faulty:

− microprocessor operation,

− power supply check,

− reconstituted internal power supply check,

− heating of a circuit board component monitoring,

− analog channel monitoring (acquisition sampling),

− program execution monitoring,

− communication ports monitoring.

If the internal hardware or software failure is minor (like a communication failure that has no
influence on the protection and automation functions), the WARNING LED (LED 3) will flash.
Possible Hardware or Software alarm messages are:
Major fault:
The protection and automation functions are stopped.
The RL0 watchdog relay is de-energised (35-36 contact closed).

<< CALIBRATION ERROR.>>: Calibration zone failure

<< CT ERROR >>: Analog channel failure

<< DEFAULT SETTINGS (*) >>
<< SETTING ERROR (**) >>
(*) DEFAULT SETTINGS: Each time the relay is powered ON it will check its memory
contents to determine whether the settings are set to the factory defaults. If the relay detects
that the default settings are loaded an alarm is raised. The ALARM LED (YELLOW) will light
up and the Watch Dog contact will be activated.
Only one parameter in the relay's menu needs to be changed to suppress these messages
and to reset the watch dog. This alarm is only an indication to the user that the relay has its
default settings applied.
(**) SETTING ERROR: Each time the relay is powered ON it will check the coherence of the
setting data. If the relay detects a problem with the settings, a "HARDWARE" ALARM will
appear on the LCD display followed by "SETTING ERROR" message (when pushing on the
button).. The ALARM LED (YELLOW) will light up and the Watch Dog contact will be
activated. To reset this alarm it is necessary to power ON and OFF the relay. Following this,
the last unsuccessful setting change will then need to be re-applied. If the alarm persists, i.e.
the "SETTING ERROR" alarm is still displayed, please contact Schneider Electric Customer
Care Services for advice and assistance.
Minor fault:
The MiCOM relay is fully operational.
The RL0 watchdog relay is energised (35-36 contact open, 36-37 contact closed).

<< COMM.ERROR >>: Communication failure

<< CLOCK ERROR >>: Time tag failure

<< STATS RESET >>: Statistical data recorded (like CB supervision statistics (Number of CB
opening, etc) have been reset.
User Guide P72x/EN FT/C21

MiCOM P721/P723 Page 13/38

2. MENUS
The menu of MiCOM P721 and P723 relays is divided into main menus and submenus. The
available content depends on the model of the relay.
2.1 Default display
By default, the LCD displays the current value measured (selected phase or earth). As soon
as an alarm is detected by the relay, that information is considered as more important and
the alarm message is then displayed instead of the default value.
2.2 Menu contents description
The menu of MiCOM P72x relays is divided into eight main sections. To access these menus
from the default display press . To return to the default display from these menus or sub-
menus press .


DEFAULT
  OP PARAMETERS
DISPLAY


CONFIGURATION



MEASUREMENTS



COMMUNICATION



PROTECTION G1



PROTECTION G2



AUTOMAT. CTRL



RECORDS


FIGURE 2: ORGANIZATION OF MiCOM P72X MAIN MENU

NOTE: The content of the menu is presented in the document P72x/EN HI.
This table helps the user to navigate through the different menus and
submenus.
For MiCOM P72x range, while navigating between submenu points,
the user can press the key  to go back to the corresponding head
menu.
Using MiCOM S1 Studio, the menu is displayed with a tree structure. A click on the “+” sign
(or a double click on the menu title) opens the corresponding submenu.
The second column displays the corresponding value for each parameter.
P72x/EN FT/C21 User Guide

Page 14/38 MiCOM P721/P723

2.3 OP PARAMETERS Menu

On the P72x front panel, press  to access the menu OP PARAMETERS from the default
display.

OP PARAMETERS Heading of the OP PARAMETERS menu

Press  to access the menu content.

Password Password entry. This password is required when

**** modifying relay settings and parameters (see § 1.3).

Password To enter a password, enter it letter by letter using  

AAAA to go up or down in the alphabet.
After each letter, press  to enter the following letter. At
the end, press  to validate the password. If the
password is correct, the message « PASSWORD OK »
is displayed on the screen.
NOTE: The password is initially set in factory to AAAA.

WARNING: NO SETTING CHANGES DONE EITHER LOCALLY (THROUGH RS232)

OR REMOTELY (THROUGH RS485) WILL BE ALLOWED DURING THE 5
FIRST MINUTES FOLLOWING A CHANGE OF PASSWORD.

Language Indicates the default language used by the device.

ENGLISH Possible choices are English, French, German, Spanish,
Italian and Portuguese languages.
Description Indicates the type of relay.
Pxxx

Reference Displays the reference that lists the equipment

MiCOM associated with the relay.

Software version Displays the version of the software

XX

Frequency Nominal value of the network frequency. Select either 50

50 Hz or 60Hz.

Active Group Displays the active protection and automation group.

1 This value can be either 1 or 2.

Input 54321 Displays the status of the logic Inputs

Status 10110 Logic Inputs are numbered from 1 to 5 for P723, 1 to 2
for P721.
When the status of one input is:
- state 0: it means that the input is de-energised,
- state 1: it means that the input is energised.
Relay 87654321 Displays the status of the logic outputs.
Status 01011101 Logic Outputs are numbered from 1 to 8 for P723 and 1
to 4 for P721.
When The state of each output is:
- state 0: it means that the output relay is activated,
- state 1: it means that the output relay is not activated.
To activate an unlatching operation, the password is
requested.
NOTE: The Watch-dog output (RL0) is not displayed in
the output status menu.
Date Displays the date (12/08/09 = 12 August 2009).
12/08/09

Time Displays the time (13:57:44 = 1:57:44 pm).

13:57:44
User Guide P72x/EN FT/C21

MiCOM P721/P723 Page 15/38

Product code Displays the product code.

P723xxxxxxxxx

Serial number Displays the serial number

XXXXXXXX

2.4 CONFIGURATION menu

Under this menu, the different submenus are:

 CONFIGUR-   
ATION
       
 Connection  led 5  Led 6  Led 7
  

 Led 8  Group select  Alarms  Inputs

   

 Output   
 relays

Press  to access the CONFIGURATION menu from the default display, then  until the
desired submenu header is displayed.
2.4.1 Submenu CONFIGURATION

CONFIGURATION Heading of the CONFIGURATION menu.

Connection Heading of the Connection submenu. This submenu is

used to select and configure earth or phase protection,

Protection line select. P723 only.

EARTH This menu is used to select the configuration of the
protection (phase or earth supervision).
Protection choices: Earth or Phase.

Input selection The input selection menu is used to select Voltage unit
Current instead of Current.
Possible choices: Voltage or Current.

2.4.1.1 Submenu Configuration with Earth protection selected

E/Gnd Text Choose a label (displayed with the associated values) for
N E/Gnd.
Possible choices are N, E, or G.
Stabiliz Resist. N This stabilizing resistor N (E or G) value is displayed only
30 Ω if the analogue input mode is the Voltage mode.
It is used to set the resistor value of the P79x resistor
inserted in the outside input circuit of the protection.
Setting choice: 30Ω to 4000Ω, accuracy 0.1Ω.
The value is settable digit by digit, using  or  keys
to change the value, and  or  key to modify an other
digit.
E/Gnd CT Primary Choose the rated primary current of the earth CT.
1000 A Setting range: from 1 to 9999 – step 1.0000
P72x/EN FT/C21 User Guide

Page 16/38 MiCOM P721/P723

E/Gnd CT sec Choose the rated secondary current of the earth CT.
1A Setting value: 1 or 5.

2.4.1.2 Submenu Configuration with Phase selected (P723 only)

Phases Text Choose a label (displayed with the associated

L1, L2, L3 measurement value) for the 3 phases.
Possible choices are “L1, L2, L3”, “A, B, C” or “R, S, T”.
The values are modified after entering the password.
Stabiliz Resist. L1 This stabilizing resistor L1 (A or R) value is displayed
30 Ω only if the analogue input mode is the Voltage mode.
It is used to set the resistor value of the P79x resistor
inserted in the outside input circuit of the protection
(phase L1).
Setting choice: 30Ω to 4000Ω, accuracy 0.1Ω.
The value is settable digit by digit, using  or  keys
to change the value, and  or  key to modify an other
digit.
Stabiliz Resist. L2 As above for phase L2 (or B or S).
30 Ω

Stabiliz Resist. L3 As above for phase L2 (or C or T).

30 Ω

Line CT Primary Choose the rated primary current of the CT.

1000 A Setting range: from 1 to 9999 – step 1.0000

Line CT sec Choose the rated secondary current of the CT.

1A Setting value: 1 or 5.

2.4.2 Submenus LED 5 to 8

The LED 5 to LED 8 configuration submenu is used to assignate to a LED a protection
function (the LED lights up when the protection function is active).
The following table lists the protection functions that can be assigned to the LEDs (5 to 8) for
each model of relay.

Function P721 P723 Information

[87] Diff X Phase differential protection threshold
[87N] Diff X X Earth differential protection threshold
[87] tDiff X Time delayed phase differential protection
threshold
[87N] tDiff X X Time delayed earth differential protection
threshold
[87CZ] Check zone X Check Zone status
[95] Sup X Phase high impedance differential threshold
(buswire supervision)
[95N] Sup X Earth high impedance differential threshold
(buswire supervision)
[95] tSup X Time delayed phase high impedance differential
threshold (buswire supervision)
[95N] tSup X X Time delayed earth high impedance differential
threshold (buswire supervision)
User Guide P72x/EN FT/C21

MiCOM P721/P723 Page 17/38

Function P721 P723 Information

[95A] tSupA X Time delayed phase A (or L1, or R) high
impedance differential threshold (buswire
supervision)
[95B] tSupB X As above for phase B (or L2 or S)
[95C] tSupC X As above for phase C (or L3 or T)
Input 1 X X Copy of the status of the Logic Input n°1
(“automat ctrl/inputs” menu)
Input 2 X X Copy of the status of the Logic Input n°2
Input 3 X Copy of the status of the Logic Input n°3
Input 4 X Copy of the status of the Logic Input n°4
Input 5 X Copy of the status of the Logic Input n°5
tAux 1 X X Copy of Aux1 Logic Input delayed by Aux1 time
time (Aux1 logic input and aux1 time are set with
“automat ctrl/inputs” menu)
tAux 2 X X Copy of Aux2 Logic Input delayed by Aux2 time
tAux 3 X Copy of Aux3 Logic Input delayed by Aux3 time
tAux 4 X Copy of Aux4 Logic Input delayed by Aux4 time
tEqu.A X X Time delayed logical output of Equation A.
tEqu.B X X Time delayed logical output of Equation B.
tEqu.C X X Time delayed logical output of Equation C.
tEqu.D X X Time delayed logical output of Equation D.
tEqu.E X X Time delayed logical output of Equation E.
tEqu.F X X Time delayed logical output of Equation F.
tEqu.G X X Time delayed logical output of Equation G.
tEqu.H X X Time delayed logical output of Equation H.

NOTES: ⇒ Each parameter can be assigned to one or more LED's.

⇒ One or more parameters (OR logic) can provocate each LED to
light up.

MiCOM S1 Studio setting:

The LED 5 (6, 7 or 8) submenu contains up to 3 lines parameter settings. In the value
column, each line represents a setting value. State “1” means that the corresponding
parameter is associated to the LED.
The corresponding parameters are displayed in the setting panel: from 00 (last digit) up to
1E (first digit).
P72x/EN FT/C21 User Guide

Page 18/38 MiCOM P721/P723

P72x Front panel setting:

Press  to access the LED 5 CONFIGURATION submenu, then  twice (press  to access
to others LEDs CONFIGURATION submenus).
Select “Yes” to assignate a LED to a function.

CONFIGURATION

Led 5 Heading LED 5 submenu.

Led 5 Activate (select choice “Yes” or inhibit (“No”) LED 5

Function No operation when:
- an alarm is exceeded,
- a threshold time delay has elapsed.
Refer to previous tables for protection functions list.

2.4.3 Submenu GROUP SELECT

The submenu “GROUP SELECT” is used to select the active protection group

CONFIGURATION

Group Select Heading of the “GROUP SELECT” sub-menu.

Change Group Setting choice : MENU or INPUT

Input = INPUT MENU is used to change settings group via HMI and/or
RS485 port.
If MENU is selected, the following menu is displayed:
Setting Group Select active setting protection group 1 or 2.
1

2.4.4 Submenu ALARMS

CONFIGURATION

Alarms Heading of the Alarms submenu.

Setting choices: Yes or No.

Inst. Self-reset ? Setting choice Yes: the alarms that are instantaneous
No will be self reset when they come back to a normal value
(below the threshold).
Setting choice No: the alarms that are instantaneous will
be need to be acknowledged by the user to be reset.
Reset led on Yes: the LED associated with an old alarm will be
fault ? No automatically reset when a new fault occurs. This is
done to avoid a display of numerous alarms that are not
active any more.
No: the appearance of a new fault will not automatically
reset LEDs associated with an old fault.
Alarm tAux1 Yes: auxiliary timer 1 output will not raise an alarm.
inhib No Alarm LED stays OFF, no message will be displayed on
the HMI.
No: auxiliary timer 1 will raise an alarm.
Alarm tAux2 As above with timer 2.
inhib No
User Guide P72x/EN FT/C21

MiCOM P721/P723 Page 19/38

Alarm tAux3 As above with timer 3 (P723 only)

inhib No

Alarm tAux4 As above with timer 4.(P723 only)

inhib No

Alarm tAux5 As above with timer 5 (P723 only).

inhib No

2.4.5 Submenu INPUTS

A digital input can be configured to be activated either on low level or on high level. Low level
(or high level) depends of the application of the digital inputs.

The user has to set under the Menu CONFIGURATION the auxiliary voltage (AC or DC) for
the digital inputs. This setting is necessary because of the time filtering which is different in
DC and AC. The inversion of the logic input in this menu inverts its allocated function status
in the logic inputs allocation (AUTOMAT CTRL/INPUTS menu). For example: if EL 2 logic
input is 1, then tAux1 = 0 when logic input is 1 and tAux1 = 1 when logic input is 0.

CONFIGURATION

Inputs Heading of the CONFIGURATION INPUTS submenu.

Inputs 54321 P721 (2 inputs) and P723 (5 inputs).

10110 This menu is used to assign active high or low
functionality to each logic input.
0 = active low, 1 = active high
Voltage input Setting choice: AC or DC power supply for the digital
DC input. The power supply for any input is the same as the
power supply of the relay.

2.4.6 Submenu OUTPUT RELAYS

CONFIGURATION

Output Relays Heading of the CONFIGURATION RELAYS

MAINTENANCE submenu.

Fail Safe R. 87654321 P721 (4 relays), P723 (8 relays).

0000000 This menu allows the user to invert each of the output
relay contacts for the de-energised state.
1 = relay activated when driving signal is not active
0 = relay not activated when driving signal is not active
Maintenance Mode Choose if you want to activate the MAINTENANCE
No MODE of the relay. If Yes is selected, output relays are
disconnected from the protection and automation
functions.
Relays CMD 8765W4321 P721 (4 relays + watchdog) and P723 (8 relays +
000000000 watchdog).
If the MAINTENANCE MODE is activated (set to Yes),
this menu allows the user to activate each one of the
output relay (from RL1 to RL8, W = Watchdog)
1 = relay activated
0 = relay not activated
P72x/EN FT/C21 User Guide

Page 20/38 MiCOM P721/P723

2.5 MEASUREMENTS Menu

Under the MEASUREMENTS menu, the user can read the various measurement values.
To access the MEASUREMENTS menu from the default display, press  then  2 times.

MEASUREMENTS Heading of the MEASUREMENTS menu.

2.5.1 If Earth protection is selected

INdiff= Displays the average earth differential current value C (True

0.00A RMS value):

Frequency Displays the network frequency calculated from phase

9.99Hz currents.

Max & Average I Allows the user to clear the maximum (peak) and average
RST = [C] (rolling) memorised values of the current.
Press  to clear these values (password required).
Indiff Maximum Displays the maximum earth differential current value (True
0.00A RMS value).

2.5.2 If Phase protection is selected (P723 only)

Idiff= 0.00A Displays the differential current values for phases A, B and C
0.00A 0.00A (or L1, L2, L3, or R, S, T) (True RMS value) as follows:
Phase A
Phase B Phase C

Frequency Displays the network frequency calculated from earth

9.99Hz currents

Max & Average I Allows the user to clear the maximum (peak) and average
RST = [C] (rolling) memorised values of the current.
Press  to clear these values (password required).
Idiff M 0.00A Displays the peak differential current value for phases A, B
0.00A 0.00A and C.
This value is the True RMS maximum value.
User Guide P72x/EN FT/C21

MiCOM P721/P723 Page 21/38

2.6 COMMUNICATION Menu

The COMMUNICATION menu content depends on the communication protocol of the relay.
Three protocols are available: MODBUS, IEC 60870-5-103 and DNP3.0.
To access the MEASUREMENTS menu from the default display, press  then  until the
menu is reached.

WARNING: A MODBUS NETWORK IS LIMITED TO 31 RELAY + 1 RELAY MASTER

ADDRESSES ON THE SAME MODBUS SUB-LAN.

COMMUNICATION Heading of the COMMUNICATION menu.

Communication ? Activates IEC 60870-5-103 communication via the

Yes RS485 port on the rear terminals of the relay.

Rear Comm. This cell sets the unique address for the rear
Address 1 communication port such that only one relay is accessed
by master station software.
Select from 1 to 255.
Baud Rate This cell controls the communication speed between
9600 bd relay and master station.
It is important that both relay and master station are set
at the same speed setting.
Select from: 300, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200 or
38400 bd.
Parity Choose the parity in the IEC data frame.
None Select parity: “Even”, “Odd” or “None”.

Data Bits Choose the number of data bits in the IEC data frame.
8 Select stop bit: 8 or 7.

Stop Bits Choose the number of stop bits in the IEC data frame.
1 Select stop bit: 0 or 1.

Spont. Event IEC 60870-5-103 communication only

Enabl. All The events created by the relay have two formats (see
P72x/EN CT chapter):
- public range, using IEC protocol,
- private range, using private number format.
This command activates or deactivates private and
public format transmission of the events to the master
station
Possible choice: Enabl. All – Enabl. IEC. only – Enabl.
none
Command Blocking IEC 60870-5-103 communication only
No Allows or blocks remote commands.
Setting choice: Yes – No
Signal Blocking IEC 60870-5-103 communication only
No Activates or deactivates signal transmission from relay to
the master station.
Setting choice: Yes – No
P72x/EN FT/C21 User Guide

Page 22/38 MiCOM P721/P723

Measure Enabling IEC 60870-5-103 communication only

Asdu 3.4&9 Selects the measures transmission filtering mode.
ASDU 3.4 option allows communication of earth current
measures (IN) to the master station.
ASDU 9 option allows communication to the master
station of:
- phase current measures (IA, IB and IC),
- frequency measures.
Setting Choice: ASDU 3.4&9 – ASDU 3.4 – ASDU 9 or
none
Front Comm. This cell sets the unique address for the relay such that
Address 29 only one relay is accessed by master station software.
Select an address from 1 to 255 for Modbus front port
communication.
Date format Choose the format of the date, either PRIVATE for
Private private protocol or IEC protocol for public protocol for the
front port Modbus communication.

2.7 PROTECTION Menu

The protection menu is divided into two groups: PROTECTION G1 for the first setting group
and PROTECTION G2 for the second setting group.
To access the PROTECTION menu from the default display, press  then  until the menu
is reached.
The different submenus are:

Earth Protection Phase protection (P723 only)

 PROTECTION  PROTECTION 
G1 / G2 G1 / G2
      
 [87N] Earth  [95N] earth [87] phase diff  [95] phase
diff protection  bus-wire protection  bus-wire
supervision supervision

2.7.1 Earth protection configuration

2.7.1.1 Submenu [87N] Earth differential protection

PROTECTION G1

[87N] Earth diff protection Heading of the earth differential current protection
submenu (“[87N] Earth diff protection”).

[87N] Earth diff Setting choice: Yes or No

prot? No Yes: the [87N] Earth differential current protection is
enabled. The following menus are displayed.
No: the [87N] Earth differential current protection is not
enabled, and no menu is displayed.
[87N] Threshold This menu is displayed when current input selection is
I diff= 1 In configured.
It sets the value for the earth current differential
threshold, from 0.01In up to 1In (step 0.01In)
[87N] Threshold This menu is displayed when voltage input selection is
V diff= 200.0V configured.
it sets the value for the earth voltage differential
threshold, from 0.5V to 200V (step 0.1V)
User Guide P72x/EN FT/C21

MiCOM P721/P723 Page 23/38

PROTECTION G1

[87N] Flt Timer The fault timer tDiff sets the time delayed earth
t Diff 0s differential protection threshold. The setting range is
from 0s to 2s (step 10ms).
[87N] Rst Timer The Reset timer menu sets the reset time, from 0 to
tReset= 0s 600s (step 10ms)

[87N] Measure The measurement filter is used to select sample mode,

Filter Sample fast sample mode or Fourier mode for threshold
detection.
Setting choice: sample mode, fast sample mode or
Fourier mode.

2.7.1.2 Submenu [95N] Earth bus-wire supervision

PROTECTION G1

[95N] Earth bus-wire Heading of the earth high impedance differential current
supervision buswire supervision submenu (“[87N] Earth diff
protection”).
[95N] Earth bus-wire Setting choice: Yes or No
sup? No Yes: the [95N] Earth high impedance differential buswire
supervision is enabled. The following menus are
displayed.
No: the [95N] Earth high impedance differential
protection is not enabled, and no menu is displayed.
[95N] Threshold This menu is displayed when current input selection is
I Sup= 1 In configured.
It sets the value for the earth current high impedance
differential threshold, from 0.01In up to 1In (step 0.01In)
[95N] Threshold This menu is displayed when voltage input selection is
V Sup= 200.0V configured.
it sets the value for the earth voltage high impedance
differential threshold, from 0.5V to 200V (step 0.1V)
[95N] Flt Timer The fault timer tSup sets the time delay for the earth high
t Sup 0s impedance differential threshold. The setting range is
from 0.5s to 3s (step 10ms).
[95N] Rst Timer The Reset timer menu sets the reset time, from 0 to
tReset= 0s 600s (step 10ms)

[95N] Measure The measurement filter is used to select sample mode,

Filter Sample fast sample mode or Fourier mode for threshold
detection.
Setting choice: sample, fast sample or Fourier mode.
P72x/EN FT/C21 User Guide

Page 24/38 MiCOM P721/P723

2.7.2 Phase protection configuration

2.7.2.1 Submenu [87] Phase differential protection (P723 only)

PROTECTION G1

[87] Phase diff protection Heading of the phase differential current protection
submenu (“[87] Phase diff protection”).

[87] Phase diff Setting choice: Yes or No

prot? No Yes: the [87] Phase differential current protection is
enabled. The following menus are displayed.
No: the [87] Phase differential current protection is not
enabled, and no menu is displayed.
[87] Threshold This menu is displayed when current input selection is
I diff= 1 In configured.
It sets the value for the phase current differential
threshold, from 0.02In up to 2In (step 0.01In)
[87] Threshold This menu is displayed when voltage input selection is
V diff= 200.0V configured.
it sets the value for the phase voltage differential
threshold, from 1V to 400V (step 0.1V)
[87] Flt Timer The fault timer tDiff sets the time delayed phase
t Diff 0s differential protection threshold. The setting range is
from 0s to 2s (step 10ms).
[87] Check Zone? Setting choice: Yes or No
No Yes: the check zone trip permission (logic input) is
enabled,
No: the check zone is disabled.
[87] Rst Timer The Reset timer menu sets the reset time, from 0 to
tReset= 0s 600s (step 10ms)

[87] Measure The measurement filter is used to select sample mode,

Filter Sample fast sample mode or Fourier mode for threshold
detection.
Setting choice: sample, fast sample or Fourier mode.

2.7.2.2 Submenu [95] Phase bus-wire supervision (P723 only)

PROTECTION G1

[95] Phase bus-wire Heading of the phase high impedance differential current
supervision supervision submenu (“[87N] Phase diff protection”).

[95] Phase bus-wire Setting choice: Yes or No

sup? No Yes: the [95] Phase high impedance differential
protection is enabled. The following menus are
displayed.
No: the [95] Phase high impedance differential protection
is not enabled, and no menu is displayed.
[95] Threshold This menu is displayed when current input selection is
I Sup= 1 In configured.
It sets the value for the phase current high impedance
differential threshold, from 0.02In up to 2In (step 0.01In)
[95] Threshold This menu is displayed when voltage input selection is
V Sup= 400.0V configured.
it sets the value for the phase voltage high impedance
differential threshold, from 1V to 400V (step 0.1V)
User Guide P72x/EN FT/C21

MiCOM P721/P723 Page 25/38

PROTECTION G1

[95] Phase bus-wire Heading of the phase high impedance differential current
supervision supervision submenu (“[87N] Phase diff protection”).

[95] Flt Timer The fault timer tSup sets the time delay for the phase
t Sup 0s high impedance differential threshold. The setting range
is from 0s to 3s (step 10ms).
[95] Rst Timer The Reset timer menu sets the reset time, from 0 to
tReset= 0s 600s (step 10ms)

[95] Measure The measurement filter is used to select sample mode,

Filter Sample fast sample mode or Fourier mode for threshold
detection.
Setting choice: sample, fast sample or Fourier mode.

2.8 AUTOMAT. CTRL Menu

Under the AUTOMAT. CTRL Menu, the user can program the different automation functions
available in the MiCOM P721 and P723.
The different submenus are:

 AUTOMAT.   
CTRL
       
 Trip  Latch  Blocking  Output
Commands  Functions  logic 1/2  relays

 Latch output  Inputs  Circuit  Logic

 Relays   Breaker Fail  Equations

To access the AUTOMAT. CTRL Menu, press  then  until the menu is reached.

2.8.1 Submenu Trip Commands

This submenu makes it possible to assign some or all the selected following thresholds to
the trip output relay.

Function P721 P723 INFORMATION and COMMENTS

Trip [87] tDiff X Time delayed phase differential protection threshold
Trip [87N] tDiff X X Time delayed earth differential protection threshold
Trip tAux 1 X X Time delayed auxiliary input Aux 1.
Trip tAux 2 X X Time delayed auxiliary input Aux 2.
Trip tAux 3 X X Time delayed auxiliary input Aux 3.
Trip tAux 4 X Time delayed auxiliary input Aux 4.
Control Trip X Control Trip function to the trip output relay RL1.
Trip Equ A X X Logical output of Boolean Equation A.
Trip Equ B X X Logical output of Boolean Equation B.
Trip Equ C X X Logical output of Boolean Equation C.
Trip Equ D X X Logical output of Boolean Equation D.
Trip Equ E X X Logical output of Boolean Equation E.
Trip Equ F X X Logical output of Boolean Equation F.
P72x/EN FT/C21 User Guide

Page 26/38 MiCOM P721/P723

Function P721 P723 INFORMATION and COMMENTS

Trip Equ G X X Logical output of Boolean Equation G.
Trip Equ H X X Logical output of Boolean Equation H.

AUTOMAT. CTRL Heading of the AUTOMAT.CTRL

Trip Commands Heading of the Trip ORDER sub-menu.

Function Setting choice Yes: Assign the corresponding function to

Yes / No the trip output relay RL1. Then the trip output relay (RL1)
will be activated at the end of the corresponding time
delay.
Setting choice No: the trip output relay (RL1) will not be
activated.
Refer to previous table for protection functions list.

2.8.2 Submenu Latch of trip output relay by Function

With this submenu, the user can program the trip output relay associated with one or many
thresholds so that it stays latched after the cause for activating these functions has
disappeared.

Function P721 P723 INFORMATION and COMMENTS

Latch [87N] tDiff X X Time delayed earth differential protection threshold
Latch [87] tDiff X Time delayed phase differential protection threshold
Latch t Aux 1 X X Aux1 delayed by Aux1 time
Latch t Aux 2 X X Aux2 delayed by Aux2 time
Latch t Aux 3 X Aux3 delayed by Aux 3 time
Latch t Aux 4 X Aux4 delayed by Aux 4 time
Latch Control Trip X X Control Trip function to the trip output relay RL1.
Latch tEqu.A X X Time delayed logical output of Equation A.
Latch tEqu.B X X Time delayed logical output of Equation B.
Latch tEqu.C X X Time delayed logical output of Equation C.
Latch tEqu.D X X Time delayed logical output of Equation D.
Latch tEqu.E X X Time delayed logical output of Equation E.
Latch tEqu.F X X Time delayed logical output of Equation F.
Latch tEqu.G X X Time delayed logical output of Equation G.
Latch tEqu.H X X Time delayed logical output of Equation H.
User Guide P72x/EN FT/C21

MiCOM P721/P723 Page 27/38

AUTOMAT. CTRL Heading of the AUTOMAT. CTRL menu.

Latch Functions Heading of the submenu.

Function Setting choice Yes: Latch the trip output relay associated
Yes with the corresponding protection function. The relay will
be remain latched after the fault has disappeared.
Setting choice No: The trip output relay will be active
when the relevant command is active. The relay will not
be active if the relevant command is reset.
Refer to previous table for protection functions list and
comments.

2.8.3 Submenu Blocking Logic 1 / 2

Through the Blocking Logic submenu, the user can block each delayed threshold using a " Start
Block Logic 1 or 2" input (refer to Inputs menu). MiCOM P72x relays have the submenu
Blocking Logic 1 and Blocking Logic 2 available for setting.
It is possible to enable or disable the “blocking” of most protection functions even if a logic
input has been assigned to that function.

Function P721 P723 INFORMATION and COMMENTS

Block [87N] tDiff X X Time delayed earth differential protection threshold
Block [87] tDiff X Time delayed phase differential protection threshold
Block tAux 1 X X Aux1 Logic Input delayed by Aux1 time
Block tAux 2 X X Aux2 Logic Input delayed by Aux2 time
Block tAux 3 X Aux3 Logic Input delayed by Aux3 time
Block tAux 4 X Aux4 Logic Input delayed by Aux4 time

AUTOMAT. CTRL

Blocking Logic 1 / 2 Heading of the Blocking Logic 1 or 2 submenu.

Block Function Enables or disables blocking logic of the function on the

No level (logic state =1) of logic input “Start Block Logic 1 or 2”
Refer to previous table for protection functions list.

2.8.4 Outputs Relays submenu

This submenu makes it possible to assign various alarm and trip thresholds (instantaneous
and/or time delay) to a logic output. Excepted from this option are the Watchdog (RL0) and
the Tripping (RL1) outputs (refer to Trip Commands submenu).
The total number of programmable logic outputs for the three relay models is listed in the
table:

Model P721 P723

Output relays 3 7

RL2 relay is a change over relay. The others RL3 to RL8 are normally open relays.
P72x/EN FT/C21 User Guide

Page 28/38 MiCOM P721/P723

The following protection functions can be assigned to output relays using this submenu.

Function P721 P723 INFORMATION and COMMENTS

[87N] Diff X X Earth differential protection threshold
[87N] tDiff X X Time delayed earth differential protection threshold
[87] Diff X Phase differential protection threshold
[87] tDiff X Time delayed phase differential protection threshold
[87CZ] ChkZone X Check Zone status
[95N] Sup X X Earth high impedance differential threshold (buswire
supervision)
[95N] tSup X X Time delayed phase high impedance differential threshold
(buswire supervision)
[95] Sup X Phase high impedance differential threshold (buswire
supervision)
[95] tSup X Time delayed phase high impedance differential threshold
(buswire supervision)
Buswire Short X X Buswires is short-circuited (power protection)
[95A] tSup A X Time delayed phase A (or L1, or R) high impedance
differential threshold (buswire supervision)
[95B] tSup B X As above for phase B (or L2 or S)
[95C] tSup C X As above for phase C (or L3 or T)
CB Fail X X Circuit Breaker does not operate.
t Aux 1 X X Aux1 auxiliary input delayed by tAux1 time.
t Aux 2 X X Aux2 auxiliary input delayed by tAux2 time.
t Aux 3 X Aux3 auxiliary input delayed by tAux3 time.
t Aux 4 X Aux4 auxiliary input delayed by tAux4 time.
Active group X X Group 2 is active (setting)
Control trip X X Control Trip function to the trip output relay RL1.
Input1 X X Opto input 1 energized.
Input2 X X Opto input 2 energized.
Input3 X Opto input 3 energized.
Input4 X Opto input 4 energized.
Input5 X Opto input 5 energized.
tEqu. A X X Logic output of Boolean Equation A.
tEqu. B X X Logic output of Boolean Equation B.
tEqu. C X X Logic output of Boolean Equation C.
tEqu D X X Logic output of Boolean Equation D.
tEqu E X X Logic output of Boolean Equation E.
tEqu. F X X Logic output of Boolean Equation F.
tEqu. G X X Logic output of Boolean Equation G.
tEqu. H X X Logic output of Boolean Equation H.
User Guide P72x/EN FT/C21

MiCOM P721/P723 Page 29/38

AUTOMAT. CTRL

Output Relays Heading of the Output Relays submenu.

Function 8765432 Assigning the corresponding protection function to the

1100010 output relays; i.e. to output 3 (RL3)
Setting choice: 1 assigns the output relay; 0 no
assignement
Function 432 Submenu for P721.
010

2.8.5 Latch of the auxiliary output relays (RL2 to RL8)

With the following menu the user can set each output relay as latched or not latched.
A “0” assigned to an output relay means that the relay is not latched. The output relay will be
active when the relevant command will be active; the relay will not be active when the
relevant command will reset.
A “1” setting assigned to an output relay means that the relay is latched. The output relay will
be active when the relevant command will be active; the relay will remain active, if the
relevant command will reset.
The active latched output relays can be reset by a logic input assigned to this function.
Further, the active latched output relays can be reset from the front panel by pushing .
This action is available if the window status Output Relays in OP. PARAMETERS submenu
is displayed.
The alarm string “Latched Relays” appears on LCD and the yellow LED is lighted.

AUTOMAT. CTRL

Latch Output Heading of the Latch Output Relays submenu.

Relays

Latch 8765432 In this example, the output relays set to Latch function
Relays 0100100 are number 4 and 7 (RL4 & RL7).

Latch 432 Submenu for P721.

Relays 000

2.8.6 Inputs submenu

This submenu makes it possible to assign a single function or multiple automation functions
to each logic input. The following functions are available for mapping to a logic input:

Label P721 P723 Function

Unlatch X X Unlocks latched output relays
Aux 1 X X Assign external information to input Aux1
Aux 2 X X Assign external information to input Aux2
Aux 3 X Assign the input the external information Aux 3
Aux 4 X Assign the input the external information Aux 4
Block Logic 2 X X Blocking logic 2
Start Disturb X X Starting of the disturbance recording function
P72x/EN FT/C21 User Guide

Page 30/38 MiCOM P721/P723

Label P721 P723 Function

Start Block X X Blocking logic 1
Logic 1
Start Block X X Blocking logic 2
Logic 2
Change X X Change of setting group (default setting group
setting 1)
Reset Leds X X Reset of the "Trip" & "Alarm" leds
Maint. Mode X X Maintenance Mode ON/OFF change
Local Mode X X Local mode condition (if activated,any remote
command to the output relays is forbidden)
Synchro X X Assign a Time synchronisation input
[87CZ] Chk X Check Zone
Zone

 AUTOMAT.  
CTRL
     
 Inputs  …  P721: 2 inputs
  P723: 5 inputs
   
 Input 1  Input 2 ... Input 5

    

  Aux1 Time

... 
  Aux4 Time

2.8.6.1 Function assignement to a logic input

AUTOMAT. CTRL

Inputs Heading of the Inputs sub-menu.

Input 1 / 2 /3 /4 / 5 Assigning label [87N] Diff to logic input 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5

[87N] Diff See the previous table for input choices.

Aux1 Time Displays setting value of timer assigned to logic input

t Aux1 10s Aux1, from 0ms to 200s (steps of 10ms).

Aux2 Time As above for Aux2.

t Aux2 10s

Aux3 Time P723 only

t Aux3 10s As above for Aux3.

Aux4 Time P723 only

t Aux4 10s As above for Aux4.
User Guide P72x/EN FT/C21

MiCOM P721/P723 Page 31/38

2.8.7 CIRCUIT BREAKER FAILURE submenu

With the CB Fail submenu, circuit breaker failure can be detected and associated
parameters can be set.

AUTOMAT. CTRL

CB Fail Heading of the CB Fail submenu.

CB Fail ? Selection of the circuit breaker failure function.

Yes If Yes is selected, the following menu is displayed:
If No is selected, the CB Fail function is inactive.
I Diff < = Selection of the undercurrent differential protection
0.1 In threshold associated to the CB failure detection function,
from 0.01In to 1In (step 0.01In).
V Diff < = P723 with voltage input selection only.
5V Selection of the undercurrent differential protection
threshold associated to the CB failure detection function,
from 0.5V to 200V (step 100mV).
CB Fail Time Selection of the circuit breaker failure time delay from
tBF 40 ms 10ms to 10s (step 10ms).

2.8.8 Submenu Logic Equations

2.8.8.1 Parameters
With the Logic Equations submenu, it is possible to form complex Boolean functions using
NOT, AND and OR operators (indicated from highest to lowest priority). Up to 16 operands
can be used in any single equation. The following logic signals are available for mapping to
an equation:

Function P721 P723 Information

Null X X the condition is null (low level)
Not Null X X the condition is not null (high level
[87] Diff X Phase differential protection threshold
[87N] Diff X X Earth differential protection threshold
[87] tDiff X Time delayed phase differential protection
threshold
[87N] tDiff X X Time delayed earth differential protection threshold
[87CZ] Check X Check Zone status
zone
[95] Sup X Phase high impedance differential threshold
(buswire supervision)
[95N] Sup X Earth high impedance differential threshold
(buswire supervision)
[95] tSup X Time delayed phase high impedance differential
threshold (buswire supervision)
[95N] tSup X X Time delayed earth high impedance differential
threshold (buswire supervision)
[95A] tSupA X Time delayed phase A (or L1, or R) high
impedance differential threshold (buswire
supervision)
[95B] tSupB X As above for phase B (or L2 or S)
P72x/EN FT/C21 User Guide

Page 32/38 MiCOM P721/P723

Function P721 P723 Information

[95C] tSupC X As above for phase C (or L3 or T)
Buswire Short X Buswires short-circuited
tAux 1 X X Copy of the status of the Logic Input tAux 1
tAux 2 X X Copy of the status of the Logic Input tAux 2
tAux 3 X Copy of the status of the Logic Input tAux 3
tAux 4 X Copy of the status of the Logic Input tAux 4
tAux 5 X Copy of the status of the Logic Input tAux 5
Input 1 X X Instantaneous digital input 1
Input 2 X X Instantaneous digital input 2
Input 3 X Instantaneous digital input 3
Input 4 X Instantaneous digital input 4
Input 5 X Instantaneous digital input 5
Group 2 X X Group 2 is active (setting)
CB Fail X X Circuit Breaker does not operate

2.8.8.2 Interface
The Logic equation has the following structure:

− “Equation A.00” to “Equation A.15” views are accessible using  and  keys,

− Pressing  key will open “T Operate” menu.

 AUTOMAT.

CTRL

 Logic Equations 

 Equation A 

 Equation A.00  Equation A.01 Equation A.15

…
= Null  AND Null AND Null
   
 

T operate
 
0s
     
 T Reset

0s
User Guide P72x/EN FT/C21

MiCOM P721/P723 Page 33/38

In order to modify an “Equation A.xx” menu:

− Press  key to access to the menu (if necessary, enter password).

Equation A.00
Boolean  Logic press  or  key to access to Boolean
  operator or Logic signal
press  or  key to modify the
corresponding value.
− Press  to validate or  to cancel the setting.

AUTOMAT. CTRL

Logic Equations

Equation A Heading of Equation A submenu.

The following submenu is identical from A.01 to A.15.

Equation A.00 Boolean function (left lower part of the LED panel): selects
= Null the Boolean function associated to the logic signal.
Presence or not presence of the corresponding logic signal
can selected and combined to the previous equation with an
OR or AND condition.
Setting choices:
- for A.00: “=”, “= Not”
- for A.01 to A.15: “OR”, “OR NOT”, “AND” or “AND NOT”,
Note: AND operator has priority to OR operator (refer to the
following note)
Equation A.00 Logic signal (right lower part): Is used to select the logic
= Null signal corresponding to the Boolean equation. Refer to the
previous table to see the text corresponding to each signal.
Setting Choice: Null and logic signals.
T Operate The time of operation setting is used to set the minimum
0s time of truth of the selected conditions before validating the
truth of the logic operation.
Setting choice: from 0 to 600s, step 10ms
T Reset The reset time sets a minimum time before the logic
0s operation is not true when at least one condition is not true.
Setting choice: from 0 to 600s, step 10ms

Example of Equation A settings:

Equation A.00 “= not” “tAux 1” + Equation A.01 “and not” “tAux 2”
means not tAux 1 and not tAux 2.
NOTE: AND operator has priority on OR operator:

− “A or B and C” means “A or (B and C)”.

− To obtain “A and (B or C)”, select “A and B or A and C”.

P72x/EN FT/C21 User Guide

Page 34/38 MiCOM P721/P723

2.9 RECORDS Menu

Through the RECORDS menu, stored data, events, disturbances and monitoring information
can be displayed and read.
The different submenus are:

 RECORDS  
     
 Fault  Instantane-  Disturbance
Record  ous records  records

2.9.1 Fault Record submenu

The Fault Record submenu makes it possible to read up to twenty five stored fault records.
Information about a fault is recorded when a threshold is crossed.

RECORDS

Fault Record Heading of the trip commands (fault records) submenu.

fault Record Selection of the fault record number to be displayed

2 (select either 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5).

fault Time Displays the time when the fault was recorded. The
12:05:23:42 format of the time is hh:mm:ss.
In this example the fault was recorded at 12:05:23 pm
(and 420ms).
fault Date Displays the date when the fault was recorded. The
12/11/99 format of the Date is DD/MM/YY.
In this example, the fault was recorded on November
12th 1999.
Active Set Group Displays the active setting group (1 or 2).
1

Faulted Phase Displays the phase, where a fault occurred, for the
Earth chosen fault record.

Threshold Displays the origin of the fault that generated the trip
[87] tDiff order.

Fault Magnitude Displays the magnitude value of the fault: Voltage,

1200 A current, earth power. The value is based on the
amplitude at 50 or 60 Hz.
IA Diff R.M.S Displays the magnitude value of the phase A current at
1200 A the time of the fault.

IB Diff R.M.S As above for phase B.

500 A

IC Diff R.M.S As above for phase C.

480 A

In Diff R.M.S As above for earth current.

103 A
User Guide P72x/EN FT/C21

MiCOM P721/P723 Page 35/38

2.9.2 INSTANTANEOUS RECORDS submenu

Through the INSTANANEOUS RECORDS submenu, it is possible to read recorded values
associated with the crossing of a threshold (start information).

RECORDS

Instantaneous Heading of the Instantaneous records submenu.

Records

Number Select the number of Instantaneous records to be

5 displayed (maximum 5).

Hour Displays the time when the instantaneous record was

13:07:15:53 recorded. The format of the time is hh:mm:ss: ms.
In this example the fault was recorded at 1:07:15 pm and
530 ms.
Date Displays the date when the instantaneous record was
12/11/01 recorded. The format of the Date is DD/MM/YY.
In this example, the fault was recorded on November
12th 2001.
Origin Displays which threshold has been crossed.
Ie>

Length Displays the period of time during which the threshold

57 ms has been exceeded.

Trip Displays if a trip followed the crossing of the threshold or

No not.

2.9.3 DISTURBANCE RECORD submenu

The Disturb Record submenu makes it possible to set and read up disturbance records.Up to
15 seconds disturbance record(s) duration can be stored (5 x 3s, 3 x 5s, 2 x 7.5s, 4 x 3.75s
or 1 x 15s). The beginning of the record can be adjusted with a selected pre-time.

RECORD

Disturb Record Heading of the Disturb Record submenu.

Pre-Time Set the disturbance record pre-time, from 100ms to 3s

0.2 s (step 100ms). The pre-time adjusts the beginning of the
disturbance record: In this example, the record starts
200ms before the disturbance. Its length is fixed.
Post-Time Set the disturbance record post-time, from 100 ms to 3s
0.2 s (step 100ms). The total disturbance recording time is 3
seconds (pre-time + post-time).
Disturb Rec Trig Select which criteria will start the disturbance record
ON INST. function. Setting choices are ON INST. (starts recording
on instantaneous thresholds) or ON TRIP (starts
recording after a trip happened).
P72x/EN FT/C21 User Guide

Page 36/38 MiCOM P721/P723

3. WIRING
MiCOM P72x range of relays have the same terminal layout for common elements.
3.1 Auxiliary supply
The auxiliary power supply for the MiCOM P721 and P723 relays can be either direct current
with a voltage range of 24-60 VDC, 48-250 VDC,or alternative current with a voltage range
of 48-250 VAC/ 50-60 Hz or 24-250Vdc/24-240Vac. The voltage range (Ua) is specified on
the adhesive paper label under the top hinged cover on the front of the relay.
The auxiliary power supply must be connected only to terminals 33 and 34.
3.2 Current measurement inputs
MiCOM P721 and P723 have 3 phase and 1 earth current inputs available for 1 and 5 Amps
rated CTs. On each one of these relays, it is possible to combine 1 and 5 Amp current inputs
together (i-e a mix between 1A for earth fault and 5A for phase connections) (refer to the
wiring diagram).
NOTE: All phase inputs must have the same rating (1 or 5 Amps).
3.3 Logic inputs
The number of logic inputs depends on the relay model. The relays have programmable
opto-isolated logic inputs, which can be assigned to any available label or function.
Logic inputs for each relay model:

Model P721 P723

Logic outputs 2 5

On the same MiCOM P72x relay, the user can mix different voltage levels as logic inputs are
fully independent (e.g. Uaux = 48-250 Vdc, Input 1= 48 Vdc, Input 2-5= 110 Vdc).
If the user sets the supply of the logic input as AC they are active from 24 to 240Vac.
The automation functions that can be assigned to these logic inputs can be selected from the
AUTOMAT. CTRL Menu.
NOTE: Do not forget to select in the CONFIGURATION/Configuration Inputs
Menu weither the voltage input is "AC" or "DC". .
3.4 Output relays
The number of logic outputs depends on the relay model. The relays have configurable logic
outputs, which can be assigned to any available function.
The number of logic outputs available for each relay model is presented in the following
table:

Model P721 P723

Logic outputs 5 9

The first logic output (RL0) is dedicated to indicate a relay fault (Watchdog, WD) and is not
part of this table.
The normally closed (NC) contact of the Watchdog (RL0) can not be configured. The other
contacts can be configured to be activated on activation of the different functions available in
the relay. A basic output matrix is included in the relay.
Some logic outputs have changeover contacts (RL1 and RL2). The other relays (RL3, to RL
9) are normally open contacts.
The protection and control functions that can be assigned to these output relays can be
selected from the AUTOMAT. CTRL Menu.
User Guide P72x/EN FT/C21

MiCOM P721/P723 Page 37/38

3.5 Communication

3.5.1 RS485 rear communication port

All MiCOM relays have an RS485 rear communication port.
The terminals 29-30-31-32 are dedicated to the RS485 communication port. See wiring
diagrams in chapter P72y/EN CO of the Technical Guide.
3.5.2 RS232 front communication port
MiCOM P72x relays provide a RS 232 communication port. This port is dedicated to Setting
software MiCOM S1.
The cable between the relay and the PC is a standard RS 232 shielded-cable.
The relay requires a RS232 cable with a 9-pin male connector.
The RS232 cable has to be wired as indicated below:

RS232 PC PORT MiCOM P721/P723

9 pin male connector 9 pin female connector

1 1
6 6
2 2
7 7
3 3
8 8
4 4
9 9
5 5
P0073ENb

FIGURE 3: FRONT PANEL PORT COMMUNICATION RS232 CABLE WIRING

A USB/RS232 cable can also be used to communicate to the relay.

P72x/EN FT/C21 User Guide

Page 38/38 MiCOM P721/P723

BLANK PAGE
Menu Content Tables P72x/EN HI/C21

MiCOM P721/P723

MENU CONTENT TABLES

P72x/EN HI/C21 Menu Content Tables

MiCOM P721/P723

BLANK PAGE
Menu Content Tables P72x/EN HI/C21

MiCOM P721/P723 Page 1/8

CONTENTS

1. MiCOM P721 – V11.D SOFTWARE 3

2. MiCOM P723 – V11.D SOFTWARE 6

P72x/EN HI/C21 Menu Content Tables

Page 2/8 MiCOM P721/P723

BLANK PAGE
 1.

OP PARAMETERS CONFIGURATION MEASUREMENTS COMMUNICATION

MiCOM P721/P723

Password CONNECTION LED GROUP SELECT ALARMS INPUTS OUTPUT RELAYS INdiff= Communications?
Menu Content Tables

**** 0.00A Yes

Language Protection line select. LED 5, 6, 7 or 8 Change group input = Instal self-reset Inputs 54321 Fail 87654321 Frequency Rear Comm. Address
English EARTH MENU No 11111 Safe R. 00000000 99.99 Hz 1

Description Input selection LED Yes/No If “MENU” Reset led on fault Voltage input = Maintenance mode Max & Average I Baud Rate
P723 Current [87N] Diff Setting group No DC No RST=[C] 9600 Bd
if “protection [87N] tDiff 1
Reference line select.” [95N] Sup Inhibition on alarms Relays 8765W4321 Indiff Maximum Parity
MiCOM =Earth [95N] tSup Yes/No CMD 000000000 0.00A None
Buswire Short.
Software version E/Gnd Text Input 1 Alarm tAux1 inhib. Data Bits
11.C N Input 2 Alarm tAux2 inhib. 8
CB Fail
if “input
Frequency tAux1 Stop Bits
selection" =
50 Hz tAux2 1
Voltage
tEqu.A
MiCOM P721 – V11.D SOFTWARE

Active Group = Stabiliz. Resist. N tEqu.B Spont, Events (1)

1 30 Ω tEqu.C Enabl. All
tEqu.D
Input 54321 E/Gnd CT Primary tEqu.E Command Blocking (1)
Status 00101 1000 A tEqu.F No
tEqu.G
Relay 87654321 E/Gnd CT sec tEqu.H Signal Blocking (1)
Status 00000101 1 A No

Date Measure Enabling (1)

11/06/07 Asdu 3,4&9

Time Front Comm Address

14:15:16 29

Product code Date Format

P723xxxxxxxxx Private
No
Serial Number
XXXXXXX (1) IEC 60870-5-103
communication menu
P72x/EN HI/C21

Page 3/8
 Page 4/8
P72x/EN HI/C21

PROTECTION G1 / G2 AUTOMAT. CTRL

[87N] EARTH DIFF [95N] EARTH BUS-WIRE TRIP COMMANDS LATCH FUNCTIONS BLOCKING LOGIC 1/2 OUTPUT RELAYS LATCH OUTPUT
PROTECTION SUPERVISION RELAYS

[87N] Earth diff prot? [95N] Earth bus-wire sup? CB Operating Time Latch Yes/no Block 1 / 2 Yes/No Trip 87654321 Latch 432
No No 0.1 s [87N] tDiff 1010101 Relays 000
tAux1 [87N] tDiff [87N] Diff
[87N] Threshold I Diff= [95N] Threshold I Sup= Trip Yes/No tAux2 tAux1 [87N] tDiff
1 In 1 In [87N] tDiff Control Trip tAux2 [95N] Sup
tAux1 tEqu. A [95N] tSup
[87N] Threshold V Diff= 95N] Threshold V Sup= tAux2 tEqu. B CB Fail
200.0 V 200.0 V Control Trip tEqu. C tAux1
tEqu. A tEqu. D tAux2
[87N] Flt Timer t Diff [95N] Flt Timer t Sup= tEqu. B tEqu. E Active Group
3.0 s 3.0 s tEqu. C tEqu. F Control Trip
tEqu. D tEqu. G Input1
[87N] Measure Filter [95N] Measure Filter tEqu. E tEqu. H Input2
Sample Sample tEqu. F tEqu. A
tEqu. G tEqu. B
[87N] Rst Timer tReset= [95N] Rst Timer tReset= tEqu. H tEqu. C
0s 0s tEqu. D
tEqu. E
tEqu. F
No No tEqu. G
tEqu. H
Menu Content Tables

MiCOM P721/P723
 MiCOM P721/P723

RECORDS
Menu Content Tables

INPUTS CIRCUIT BREAKER FAIL LOGIC EQUATIONS FAULT RECORD INSTANTANEOUS DISTURBANCE
RECORDS RECORDS

Inputs 1/2 Aux Times CB Fail Equation Fault Record Number Pre-Time
No A/B/C/D/E/F/G/H 25 5 1.3 s

Unlatch Aux 1 Time tAux1 I diff < = Equation A.00 Fault Time Hour Post-Time
Aux1 0s 0.1 In (Boolean) (Logic) 00:00:00:00 00:00:00:00 2.0 s
Aux2
Start Disturb Aux 2 Time tAux2 CB Fail Time tBF As above from Fault Date Date Disturb Rec Trig
Start Block Logic 1 0s 0.1 s A.01 to A.15 00/00/00 00/00/00 On Inst
Start Block Logic 2
Change setting Equation A.15 Active Set Group Origin
Reset Leds = (operand) 2 [87] tDiff
Maint. Mode
Local mode T Operate Faulted Phase Length
Synchro 0s Earth 000 ms

T Reset Threshold Trip

0s [87] tDiff Yes

Fault Magnitude
000 A

Ie Diff R.M.S
000 A
P72x/EN HI/C21

Page 5/8
 2.
Page 6/8

OP PARAMETERS CONFIGURATION MEASUREMENTS COMMUNICATION

if “configuration/
Password CONNECTION LED GROUP SELECT ALARMS INPUTS OUTPUT RELAYS protection line Communications?
**** select.” =phase Yes
P72x/EN HI/C21

Language Protection line select. LED 5, 6, 7 or 8 Change group input = Instal self-reset Inputs 54321 Fail 87654321 Idiff= 0.00A Rear Comm. Address
English EARTH MENU No 11111 Safe R. 00000000 0.00A 0.00A 1

Description Input selection LED Yes/No If “MENU” Reset led on fault Voltage input = Maintenance mode Frequency Baud Rate
P723 Current [87/87N] Diff (1) Setting group No DC No 99.99 Hz 9600 Bd
if “protection [87/87N] tDiff (1) 1
Reference line select.” [87CZ] Check Zone Inhibition on alarms Relays 8765W4321 Max & Average I Parity
MiCOM =Earth [95/95N] Sup (1) Yes/No CMD 000000000 RST=[C] None
[95/95N] tSup (1)
Software version E/Gnd Text Buswire Short. Alarm tAux1 inhib. IdiffM= 0.00A Data Bits
11.C N [95A] tSup A Alarm tAux2 inhib. 0.00A 0.00A 8
[95B] tSup B Alarm tAux3 inhib.
if “input if “configuration /
Frequency [95C] tSup C Alarm tAux4 inhib. Stop Bits
selection" = protection line
50 Hz Input 1 1
Voltage select.” =Earth
Input 2
Active Group = Stabiliz. Resist. N Input 3 INdiff= Spont, Events (1)
1 30 Ω Input 4 0.00A Enabl. All
Input 5
Input 54321 E/Gnd CT Primary CB Fail Frequency Command Blocking (1)
Status 00101 1000 A tAux1 99.99 Hz No
MiCOM P723 – V11.D SOFTWARE

tAux2
Relay 87654321 E/Gnd CT sec tAux3 Max & Average I Signal Blocking (1)
Status 00000101 1 A tAux4 RST=[C] No
tEqu.A
Date if “protection tEqu.B Indiff Maximum Measure Enabling (1)
11/06/07 line select.” tEqu.C 0.00A Asdu 3,4&9
=phase tEqu.D
Time Phases Text tEqu.E Front Comm Address
14:15:16 L1, L2, L3 tEqu.F 29
tEqu.G
if “input
Product code tEqu.H Date Format
selection" =
P723xxxxxxxxx Private
Voltage
(1) depending of protection
Serial Number Stabilizing Resistor L1 line configuration
XXXXXXX 30 Ω (1) IEC 60870-5-103
communication menu
Stabilizing Resistor L2
30 Ω

Stabilizing Resistor L3
30 Ω

Line CT Primary
1000 A

Line CT sec
1 A
Menu Content Tables

MiCOM P721/P723
PROTECTION G1 / G2 AUTOMAT. CTRL

If Configuration/Protection line selection = [87N] Earth TRIP COMMANDS LATCH FUNCTIONS BLOCKING LOGIC 1/2 OUTPUT RELAYS LATCH OUTPUT
RELAYS

[87N] EARTH DIFF [95N] EARTH BUS-WIRE CB Operating Time Latch Yes/no Block 1 / 2 Yes/No Latch 8765432
PROTECTION SUPERVISION 0.1 s [87 or 87N] tDiff [87] tDiff Relays 0000000
tAux1 [87N] tDiff
If Configuration/ If Configuration/
[87N] Earth diff prot? [95N] Earth bus-wire sup? Trip Yes/No tAux2 tAux1
Protection line Protection line
No No [87 or 87N] tDiff tAux3 tAux2
selection = selection =
MiCOM P721/P723

tAux1 tAux4 tAux3

if Yes (1) if Yes (1) [87N] Earth [87] Phase
tAux2 Control Trip tAux4
Menu Content Tables

[87N] Threshold I Diff= [95N] Threshold I Sup= tAux3 tEqu. A Trip 87654321 Trip 87654321
1 In 1 In tAux4 tEqu. B 1010101 1010101
Control Trip tEqu. C [87N] Diff [87] Diff
if Yes (2) if Yes (2)
tEqu. A tEqu. D [87N] tDiff [87] tDiff
[87N] Threshold V Diff= 95N] Threshold V Sup= tEqu. B tEqu. E [95N] Sup [87CZ] ChkZone
200.0 V 200.0 V tEqu. C tEqu. F [95N] tSup [95] Sup
tEqu. D tEqu. G Buswire-Short [95] tSup
[87N] Flt Timer t Diff [95N] Flt Timer t Sup= tEqu. E tEqu. H CB Fail [95A] tSup A
3.0 s 3.0 s tEqu. F tAux1 [95A] tSup B
tEqu. G tAux2 [95A] tSup C
[87N] Measure Filter [95N] Measure Filter tEqu. H tAux3 CB Fail
Sample Sample tAux4 tAux1
Active Group tAux2
No [87N] Rst Timer tReset= [95N] Rst Timer tReset= Control Trip tAux3
0s 0s No Input1 tAux4
Input2 Active Group
Input3 Control Trip
If Configuration/Protection line selection = [87] Phase Input4 Input1
Input5 Input2
[87] PHASE DIFF [95] PHASE BUS-WIRE tEqu. A Input3
PROTECTION SUPERVISION tEqu. B Input4
tEqu. C Input5
[87] Phase diff prot? [95] Phase bus-wire sup? tEqu. D tEqu. A
No No tEqu. E tEqu. B
tEqu. F tEqu. C
if Yes (1) if Yes (1)
tEqu. G tEqu. D
[87] Threshold I Diff= [95] Threshold I Sup= tEqu. H tEqu. E
1 In 1 In tEqu. F
tEqu. G
if Yes (2) if Yes (2) tEqu. H
[87N] Threshold V Diff= 95N] Threshold V Sup=
400.0 V 400.0 V

[87] Fault Timer tDiff [95] Fault Timer tSup=

3.0 s 3.0 s

[87] Check Zone? [95] Measurement Filter

Yes / No Sample

No [87N] Measurement Filter [95] Reset Timer tReset=

Sample 0s

[87] Reset Timer tReset=

0s

If "Configuration / Input selection" =

(1): current
(2): voltage
P72x/EN HI/C21

Page 7/8
 Page 8/8
P72x/EN HI/C21

RECORDS

INPUTS CIRCUIT BREAKER FAIL LOGIC EQUATIONS FAULT RECORD INSTANTANEOUS DISTURBANCE
RECORDS RECORDS

Inputs 1/2/3/4/5 CB Fail Equation Fault Record Number Pre-Time

No A/B/C/D/E/F/G/H 25 5 1.3 s

Unlatch If Yes (1) Equation A.00 Fault Time Hour Post-Time

Aux1 I diff < = (Boolean) (Logic) 00:00:00:00 00:00:00:00 2.0 s
Aux2 0.1 In
Aux3 As above from Fault Date Date Disturb Rec Trig
Aux4 If Yes (2) A.01 to A.15 00/00/00 00/00/00 On Inst
Start Disturb V diff < =
Start Block Logic 1 5.0 V Equation A.15 Active Set Group Origin
Start Block Logic 2 = (operand) 2 [87] tDiff
Change setting CB Fail Time tBF
Reset Leds 0.1 s T Operate Faulted Phase Length
Maint. Mode 0s Earth 000 ms
Local mode
Synchro T Reset Threshold Trip
[87CZ] Chk Zone 0s [87] tDiff Yes

Aux 1 Time tAux1 If "Configuration / Input selection" = Fault Magnitude

0s (1): current 000 A
(2): voltage
Aux 2 Time tAux2 IA Diff R.M.S
0s 000 A

Aux 3 Time tAux3 IB Diff R.M.S

0s 000 A

Aux 4 Time tAux4 IC Diff R.M.S

0s 000 A

Ie Diff R.M.S
000 A
Menu Content Tables

MiCOM P721/P723
Technical Data P72x/EN TD/A11

MiCOM P721/P723

TECHNICAL DATA
Technical Data P72x/EN TD/A11

MiCOM P721/P723 Page 1/18

CONTENT

1. RATINGS 3
1.1 Power Supply 3
1.2 Frequency 3
1.3 Current Inputs 3
1.4 Phase and earth current transformers consumption 3
1.4.1 P72x phase CT consumption 3
1.4.2 P72x earth CT consumption 4
1.5 Logic Inputs 4
1.5.1 Supply 4
1.6 Output Relay Characteristic 5

2. INSULATION 5

3. EMC TESTS 6

4. ENVIRONMENT 7

5. EU DIRECTIVE 8
5.1 EMC compliance 8
5.2 Product safety 8

6. DEVIATION OF PROTECTION ELEMENTS 9

7. DEVIATION OF AUTOMATION FUNCTIONS TIMERS 9

8. DEVIATION OF MEASUREMENTS 9

9. PROTECTION SETTING RANGES 10

9.1 [87N] Earth differential protection 10
9.1.1 Protection Setting Ranges 10
9.2 [95N] Earth bus-wire supervision 10
9.2.1 Protection Setting Ranges 10
9.3 [87] Phase differential protection (P723 only) 10
9.3.1 Protection Setting Ranges 10
9.4 [95] Phase bus-wire supervision (P723 only) 11
9.4.1 Protection Setting Ranges 11
P72x/EN TD/A11 Technical Data

Page 2/18 MiCOM P721/P723

10. AUTOMATION CONTROL FUNCTIONS 12

10.1 Trip commands 12
10.2 Latch functions 12
10.3 Blocking logic 12
10.4 Output relays 12
10.5 Latch of the auxiliary output relays 12
10.6 Inputs 12
10.6.1 Inputs assignation 12
10.6.2 Auxiliary timers 12
10.7 Circuit Breaker Failure 13
10.7.1 CB Fail Setting Ranges 13
10.8 Logic Equations 13
10.8.1 Timer Setting Ranges 13
10.8.2 Available logical gates 14
10.8.3 Available signals 14

11. RECORDING FUNCTIONS 16

11.1 Fault Record 16
11.2 Instantaneous recorder 16
11.3 Disturbance Records 16
11.3.1 Triggers; Data; Setting Ranges 16

12. COMMUNICATION 17
Technical Data P72x/EN TD/A11

MiCOM P721/P723 Page 3/18

1. RATINGS
1.1 Power Supply

Nominal auxiliary voltage Vx 24-60Vdc;

48 -250Vdc/ 48-250 Vac
24-250Vdc/ 24-240Vac
Operating range DC: ± 20% of Vx
AC: – 20%, +10% of Vx
Residual ripple Up to 12%
Stored energy time ≥50 ms for interruption of Vx
Burden Stand by: <3W DC or <8VA AC
Max: <6W DC or <14VA AC

1.2 Frequency

Frequency protection functions nominal frequency ±5Hz

Nominal frequency 50/60Hz

1.3 Current Inputs

Phase current inputs 1 and 5A by connection

Earth current inputs 1 and 5A by connection
Operating range Selected at order (Cortec)
Burden Phase Current < 0.025 VA (1A)
< 0.3 VA (5A)
Burden Earth Current < 0.08 VA (1A)
< 0.42 VA (5A)
Thermal withstand 1s @ 100 x rated current
2s @ 40 x rated current
continuous @ 4 x rated current

1.4 Phase and earth current transformers consumption

1.4.1 P72x phase CT consumption

phase transformer 5A
RMS voltage (V)

phase transformer 1A

Current (A)
P72x/EN TD/A11 Technical Data

Page 4/18 MiCOM P721/P723

1.4.2 P72x earth CT consumption

earth transformer 5A
RMS voltage (V)

earth transformer 1A

Current (A)

1.5 Logic Inputs

Logic input type Independent optically insulated

Logic input burden < 10 mAmps per input
Logic input recognition time (DC < 5ms in a 50Hz system
inputs)
< 4ms in a 60Hz system
Logic input recognition time (AC <7ms in a 50Hz system
inputs)
< 6ms in a 60Hz system
Logic input recognition time (ENA <15ms in a 50Hz system
inputs)
< 12ms in a 60Hz system

1.5.1 Supply

Relay auxiliary power supply Logic Inputs

Ordering Nominal Operating Nominal Minimal Maximum Holding Maximum
Code voltage range voltage range Voltage range polarisation polarisation current continuous
Vx voltage current after 2 ms withstand
A 24 - 60 Vdc 19,2 – 76 Vdc
24 – 250 Vdc 19,2 Vdc 300 Vdc
24 – 240 Vac 19,2 Vac 35 mA 2.3 mA 264 Vac

T 48 – 250 Vdc
48 – 240 Vac 38.4 – 300 Vdc 24 – 250 Vdc 19,2 Vdc 300 Vdc
38.4 – 264 Vac 24 – 240 Vac 19,2 Vac 35 mA 2.3 mA 264 Vac
Special EA (**)
24 – 250 Vdc 19,2 – 300 Vdc 24 – 250 Vdc 19,2 Vdc 300 Vdc
Z 35 mA 2.3 mA
24 – 250 Vac 19.2 – 264 Vac 24 – 240 Vac 19,2 Vac 264 Vac

(**) Logic input recognition time for EA approval. Dedicated filtering on 24 samples (15 ms at
50 Hz)
Technical Data P72x/EN TD/A11

MiCOM P721/P723 Page 5/18

1.6 Output Relay Characteristic

Contact rating
Contact relay Dry contact Ag Ni
Make current Max. 30A and carry for 3s
Carry capacity 5A continuous
Rated Voltage 250Vac
Breaking characteristic
Breaking capacity AC 1500 VA resistive
1500 VA inductive (P.F. = 0.5)
220 Vac, 5A (cos ϕ = 0.6)
Breaking capacity DC 135 Vdc, 0.3A (L/R = 30 ms)
250 Vdc, 50W resistive or
25W inductive (L/R=40ms)
Operation time <7ms
Durability
Loaded contact 10000 operation minimum
Unloaded contact 100000 operation minimum

2. INSULATION
Dielectric withstand IEC 60255-5 : 2000 2 kV common mode
1 kV differential mode
ANSI/IEEE C37.90-1989 1.5 kV rms AC for 1 minute,
(reaffirmed 1994) across normally open contacts.
Impulse voltage IEC 60255-5 : 2000 5 kV common mode
1 kV differential mode

Insulation resistance IEC 60255-5 : 2000 > 1000 MΩ

P72x/EN TD/A11 Technical Data

Page 6/18 MiCOM P721/P723

3. EMC TESTS
High Frequency Disturbance
IEC 60255-22-1:1988 2.5kV common mode, Class III
1kV differential mode, Class III
Electrostatic Discharge
EN 61000-4-2: 1995 and IEC 60255-22-2: 1996 8kV contact discharge, Class 4
15kV air discharge, Class 4
Fast Transient
IEC 60255-22-4:2002, Class A 2kV 5kHz, terminal block comms.
4kV 2.5kHz, all circuits excluding comms.
EN 61000-4-4:1995, Level 4 4kV 5kHz, power supply
2kV 5kHz, all circuits excluding power supply.
Surge
EN 61000-4-5:1995 and IEC 60255-22-5:2002 4kV common mode, Level 4
2kV differential mode, Level 4

Conducted Emissions
EN 55022: 1998 0.15 - 0.5MHz, 79dBµV (quasi peak) 66dBµV (average)
0.5 - 30MHz, 73dBµV (quasi peak) 60dBµV (average).
Radiated Emissions
EN 55022: 1998 30 - 230MHz, 40dBµV/m at 10m measurement distance
230 - 1GHz, 47dBµV/m at 10m measurement distance.
Conducted Immunity
EN 61000-4-6:1996 Level 3, 10V rms @ 1kHz 80% am, 150kHz to 80MHz
Radiated Immunity
EN 61000-4-3:2002 Level 3, 10V/m 80MHz to 1GHz @ 1kHz 80% am
ANSI/IEEE C37.90.2:2004 35V/m 80MHz to 1GHz @ 1kHz 80% am
35V/m 80MHz to 1GHz @ 100% pulse modulated front
face only.
Radiated immunity from digital telephones
EN 61000-4-3:2002 Level 4, 30V/m 800MHz to 960MHz and 1.4GHz to 2GHz
@ 1kHz 80% am
ANSI Surge Withstand Capability
IEEE/ANSI C37.90.1: 2002 4kV fast transient and 2.5kV oscillatory applied common
mode and differential mode
Magnetic Field Immunity
IEC 61000-4-8: 1994 Level 5, 100A/m applied continuously, 1000A/m for 3s.
IEC 61000-4-9: 1993 Level 5, 1000A/m.
IEC 61000-4-10: 1993 Level 5, 100A/m at 100kHz and 1MHz.
Technical Data P72x/EN TD/A11

MiCOM P721/P723 Page 7/18

4. ENVIRONMENT
Temperature IEC 60068-2-1 : 1993 Storage –25 °C to +70 °C
IEC 60068-2-2: 1993 Operation: –25 °C to + 55 °C
–25°C to 70° (*)
(*) The upper limit is permissible for a single 6
hour duration within any 24 hour period.

Humidity dam heat IEC 60068-2-78:2001 56 days at 93% RH and 40 °C

Enclosure protection IEC 60-529: 2001 Dust IP50 (whole case), Front IP 52,
Back IP 10
Sinusoidal Vibrations IEC 60255-21-1:1998 Response and endurance, class 2
Shocks IEC 60255-21-2:1998 Response and withstand, class 2
Shock withstand & Bump IEC 60255-21-2:1998 Response and withstand, class 1
Seismic IEC 60255-21-3:1993 Class 2
Corrosive Environments :

Per IEC 60068-2-60: 1995, Part 2, Test Ke, Method (class) 3

Industrial corrosive environment/poor environmental control, mixed gas flow test.
21 days at 75% relative humidity and +30°C
Exposure to elevated concentrations of H²S, NO², Cl² and SO².
P72x/EN TD/A11 Technical Data

Page 8/18 MiCOM P721/P723

5. EU DIRECTIVE
5.1 EMC compliance

89/336/EEC
93/31/EEC

Compliance with European Commission EMC Directive.

Generic standards were used to establish conformity:
EN50081-2: 1994
EN60952-2: 1995
5.2 Product safety

2006/95/EC
(replacing 73/23/EEC from 01/2007)

Compliance with European Commission Low Voltage Directive. Compliance is demonstrated

by reference to generic safety standards:

− EN61010-1: 1993/A2: 1995

− EN60950: 1992/A11: 1997

Technical Data P72x/EN TD/A11

MiCOM P721/P723 Page 9/18

6. DEVIATION OF PROTECTION ELEMENTS

Element Range Deviation Fault timer Reset timer
Earth differential 0.01In to 1In ± 2% 0s - 2s 0 to 600s
protection (0.5 to 200V)
I diff (V diff)
Phase differential 0.02 to 2In ± 2% 0s – 2s 0 to 600s
protection (1 to 400V)
I diff (V diff)
Earth bus-wire 0.01 to 1 In ± 2% 0.5s – 3s 0 to 600s
supervision (0.5 to 200V)
Phase bus-wire 0.01 to 1In ± 2% 0.5s – 3s 0 to 600s
supervision (1 to 400V)
I Sup (V Sup)

7. DEVIATION OF AUTOMATION FUNCTIONS TIMERS

CB fail & CB monitoring timers ±2% 0-10s
Auxiliary timers tAUX1, tAUX2, tAUX3, tAUX4 ±2% 0-200s

8. DEVIATION OF MEASUREMENTS
Measurement Range Deviation
Phase current 0.02In to 10In Typical ±0.5% at In
Earth current 0.004In to 2In Typical ±0.5% at In
P72x/EN TD/A11 Technical Data

Page 10/18 MiCOM P721/P723

9. PROTECTION SETTING RANGES

9.1 [87N] Earth differential protection
9.1.1 Protection Setting Ranges

[87N] Earth differential Setting Range

protection Min Max Step
[87N] Earth differential Yes / No
protection
[87N] Threshold I diff 0.01In 1In 0.01In
[87N] Threshold V diff 0.5V 200V 0.1V
[87N] Filter timer t Diff 0s 2s 10ms
[87N] Reset timer tReset 0 600s 10ms
Measurement Filter Sample mode / Fast sample mode /
Fourier mode

9.2 [95N] Earth bus-wire supervision

9.2.1 Protection Setting Ranges

[95N] Earth bus-wire Setting Range

supervision Min Max Step
[95N] Earth bus-wire supervision Yes / No
[95N] Threshold I Sup 0.01In 1In 0.01In
[95N] Threshold V Sup 0.5V 200V 0.1V
[95N] Filter timer t Sup 0.5s 3s 10ms
[95N] Reset timer tReset 0 600s 10ms
Measurement Filter Sample mode / Fast sample mode /
Fourier mode

9.3 [87] Phase differential protection (P723 only)

9.3.1 Protection Setting Ranges

[87] Phase differential Setting Range

protection Min Max Step
[87] Phase differential protection Yes / No
[87] Threshold I diff 0.02In 2In 0.01In
[87] Threshold V diff 1V 400V 0.1V
[87] Filter timer t Diff 0s 2s 10ms
[87] Check zone? Yes / No
[87] Reset timer tReset 0 600s 10ms
Measurement Filter Sample mode / Fast sample mode /
Fourier mode
Technical Data P72x/EN TD/A11

MiCOM P721/P723 Page 11/18

9.4 [95] Phase bus-wire supervision (P723 only)

9.4.1 Protection Setting Ranges

[95] Phase bus-wire Setting Range

supervision Min Max Step
[95] Phase bus-wire supervision Yes / No
[95] Threshold I Sup 0.02In 2In 0.01In
[95] Threshold V Sup 1V 400V 0.1V
[95] Filter timer t Sup 0.5s 3s 10ms
[95] Reset timer tReset 0 600s 10ms
Measurement Filter Sample mode / Fast sample mode /
Fourier mode
P72x/EN TD/A11 Technical Data

Page 12/18 MiCOM P721/P723

10. AUTOMATION CONTROL FUNCTIONS

10.1 Trip commands
Assignation of the following thresholds to trip output relay:

− all models: [87N] tDiff, t Aux 1, t Aux 2, Control Trip, tEqu.A, tEqu.B, tEqu.C, tEqu.D,
tEqu.E, tEqu.F, tEqu.G, tEqu.H,

− P723 additional functions: [87] tDiff, t Aux 3 and t Aux 4

10.2 Latch functions
Trip output relay programmable with one or many thresholds:

− all models: [87N] tDiff, t Aux 1, t Aux 2, Control Trip, tEqu.A, tEqu.B, tEqu.C, tEqu.D,
tEqu.E, tEqu.F, tEqu.G, tEqu.H.

− P723 additional functions: [87] tDiff, t Aux 3, t Aux 4.

10.3 Blocking logic
Possibility to block the following delayed thresholds:

− all models: [87N] tDiff, t Aux 1, t Aux 2,

− P723 additional functions: [87] tDiff, t Aux 3 and t Aux 4.

10.4 Output relays
Alarm and trip threshold assignation to a logic output: 3 relays (P721) and 7 relays (P723).
Assignable functions:

− all models: [87N] Diff, [87N] tDiff, [95N] Sup, [95N] tSup, Buswire Short, CB Fail, t Aux
1, t Aux 2, Active group, Control trip, Input1 , Input2, tEqu. A , tEqu. B, tEqu. C, tEqu
D, tEqu E, tEqu. F , tEqu. G, tEqu. H.

− P723 additional functions: [87] Diff, [87] tDiff, [87CZ] ChkZone, [95] Sup, [95] tSup,
[95A] tSup A, [95B] tSup B, [95C] tSup C, t Aux 3, t Aux 4, Input3, Input4, Input5
10.5 Latch of the auxiliary output relays
Possibility to latch output relays:

− P721: Output 2 to 4,

− P723: Output 2 to 8.
10.6 Inputs
10.6.1 Inputs assignation
Single function or multiple automation functions assignable to 4 logic inputs:

− all models: Unlatch, Aux 1, Aux 2, Blocking Logic 1, Blocking Logic 2, Start Disturb,
Change setting, Reset Leds, Maint. Mode, Local Mode, Synchro

− P723 additional functions: Aux 3, Aux 4, [87CZ] Chk Zone

10.6.2 Auxiliary timers

Setting range
Auxiliary timers
Min Max Step
Aux1 time tAux1 0 200s 10ms
Aux2 time tAux2 0 200s 10ms
Aux3 time tAux3 0 200s 10ms
Aux4 time tAux4 0 200s 10ms
Technical Data P72x/EN TD/A11

MiCOM P721/P723 Page 13/18

10.7 Circuit Breaker Failure

10.7.1 CB Fail Setting Ranges

Setting range
CB Fail
Min Max Step
CB Fail ? Yes or No
I Diff < 0.01 In 1In 0.01 In
V Diff < 0.5V 200V 100mV
CB Fail Time tBF 0 10s 0.01s

10.8 Logic Equations

The MiCOM P721 and P723 relays integrate complete logic equations to allow customization
of the product based on customer application.
Up to 8 independent Boolean equations can be used (from A to H). Every result of equation
can be time delayed and assigned to any output relays, trip, trip latching and/or HMI LEDs.
Up to 16 operands can be used (from 00 to 15). Within operands, there are two parts:

− (1/2) : logical gates (NOT, OR, AND, NOT AND, NOT OR)

− (2/2) : signals ([87N] Diff, [95N] tSup, tAux, input…etc)

10.8.1 Timer Setting Ranges

Logic equat Setting range

T delay Min Max Step
EQU. A Toperat 0s 600 s 0.01 s
EQU. A Treset 0s 600 s 0.01 s
EQU. B Toperat 0s 600 s 0.01 s
EQU. B Treset 0s 600 s 0.01 s
EQU. C Toperat 0s 600 s 0.01 s
EQU. C Treset 0s 600 s 0.01 s
EQU. D Toperat 0s 600 s 0.01 s
EQU. D Treset 0s 600 s 0.01 s
EQU. E Toperat 0s 600 s 0.01 s
EQU. E Treset 0s 600 s 0.01 s
EQU. F Toperat 0s 600 s 0.01 s
EQU. F Treset 0s 600 s 0.01 s
EQU. G Toperat 0s 600 s 0.01 s
EQU. G Treset 0s 600 s 0.01 s
EQU. H Toperat 0s 600 s 0.01 s
EQU. H Treset 0s 600 s 0.01 s
P72x/EN TD/A11 Technical Data

Page 14/18 MiCOM P721/P723

10.8.2 Available logical gates

Logical gates Availability (1/2)

NOT A00
B00
C00
D00
E00
F00
G00
H00
OR (by default) A01 to A15
B01 to B15
AND
C01 to C15
AND NOT D01 to D15
E01 to E15
OR NOT
F01 to F15
G01 to G15
H01 to H15

10.8.3 Available signals

With the Logic Equations submenu, 16 operands can be used in any single equation. The
following logic signals are available for mapping to an equation:

TEXT Signals (2/2)

P721 and P723:
Null Condition is Null
Not Null Condition is not Null
[87N] Diff Earth differential protection threshold
[87N] tDiff Time delayed earth differential protection threshold
[95N] tSup Time delayed earth high impedance differential threshold
(buswire supervision)
tAux 1 Copy of the status of the Logic Input tAux 1
tAux 2 Copy of the status of the Logic Input tAux 2
Input 1 Instantaneous digital input 1
Input 2 Instantaneous digital input 2
Group 2 Group 2 is active (setting)
CB Fail Circuit Breaker does not operate
P723 only:
[87] Diff Phase differential protection threshold
[87] tDiff Time delayed phase differential protection threshold
[87CZ] Check zone Check Zone status
[95] Sup Phase high impedance differential threshold (buswire
supervision)
[95N] Sup Earth high impedance differential threshold (buswire
supervision)
[95] tSup Time delayed phase high impedance differential threshold
(buswire supervision)
Technical Data P72x/EN TD/A11

MiCOM P721/P723 Page 15/18

TEXT Signals (2/2)

[95A] tSupA Time delayed phase A (or L1, or R) high impedance
differential threshold (buswire supervision)
[95B] tSupB As above for phase B (or L2 or S)
[95C] tSupC As above for phase C (or L3 or T)
Buswire Short Buswires short-circuited
tAux 3 Copy of the status of the Logic Input tAux 3
tAux 4 Copy of the status of the Logic Input tAux 4
Input 3 Instantaneous digital input 3
Input 4 Instantaneous digital input 4
Input 5 Instantaneous digital input 5
P72x/EN TD/A11 Technical Data

Page 16/18 MiCOM P721/P723

11. RECORDING FUNCTIONS

11.1 Fault Record

Capacity 25 faults
Time-tag 1 millisecond
Triggers Any selected protection alarm and
threshold
Data Fault date,
Active setting Group,
Faulted phase,
Threshold,
Fault magnitude,
[87] tDIFF fault (tripping)
[87N] tDIFF fault (tripping)
tAux 1 fault (tripping)
tAux 2 fault (tripping)
tAux 3 fault (tripping)
tAux 4 fault (tripping)
tEquation A, B, C, D, E, F, G and H
fault (tripping)
Control trip

11.2 Instantaneous recorder

Capacity 5 starting informations (instantaneous

Time-tag 1 millisecond
Triggers Any selected protection alarm and
threshold
Data date, hour
origin (any protection alarm)
length (duration of the instantaneous
trip yes or no

11.3 Disturbance Records

11.3.1 Triggers; Data; Setting Ranges

Triggers Any selected protection alarm and threshold, logic input, remote
command
Data AC input channels
digital input and output states
frequency value
Default value Setting range
P72x Min Max Step
Pre-Time 1.0s 0.1s 3s 0.1s
Post-Time 2.0s 0.1s 3s 0.1s
Disturb rec Trig ON INST ON TRIP or ON INST.
Trigger Any selected protection alarm and threshold
Logic input
Remote command
Technical Data P72x/EN TD/A11

MiCOM P721/P723 Page 17/18

12. COMMUNICATION
Type Relay
Physical Link Connectors Data Rate Protocol
Port position
RS485 Rear port Screened Screws or 300 to 38400 baud ModBus RTU, Courier,
twister pair snap-on (programmable) IEC60870-5-103,
DNP3.0
RS232 Front port Screened Sub–D 9 pin 300 to 38400 baud ModBus RTU
twister pair female (programmable)
connector
P72x/EN TD/A11 Technical Data

Page 18/18 MiCOM P721/P723

BLANK PAGE
Getting Started P72x/EN GS/C21

MiCOM P721/P723

GETTING STARTED
Getting Started P72x/EN GS/C21

MiCOM P721/P723 Page 1/24

CONTENT

1. ENERGISING THE RELAY 3

1.1 System Connections 3
1.2 Auxiliary Power Supply Connections 3

2. USER INTERFACE AND MENU STRUCTURE 4

2.1 User interfaces and menu structure 4
2.1.1 “Default settings” alarm 4
2.1.2 Password protection 4
2.1.3 Setting the language 5
2.1.4 Setting Date and time 5
2.1.5 Menu navigation 5
2.2 Menu structure 6

3. LOCAL CONNECTION TO A PC 7
3.1 Configuration 7
3.1.1 REMOTE connection 7
3.2 Products plugged in the same panel 8
3.3 Communication between distant products 8
3.4 MiCOM S1 and MiCOM S1 Studio relay communications basics 9
3.5 MiCOM S1 Studio 9
3.5.1 Data Model Management 9
3.5.2 “Quick Connection” to the relay using MiCOM S1 Studio 12
3.5.3 Create a system 15
3.5.4 Create a new substation 16
3.5.5 Create a new voltage level 17
3.5.6 Create a new bay 17
3.5.7 Create a new device 18
3.5.8 Open Settings File 19
3.6 Presentation and analysis od disturbance 21

4. WITHDRAWING MODULE FROM CASE 22

5. COMPANY CONTACT INFORMATION 24

P72x/EN GS/C21 Getting Started

Page 2/24 MiCOM P721/P723

BLANK PAGE
Getting Started P72x/EN GS/C21

MiCOM P721/P723 Page 3/24

1. ENERGISING THE RELAY

To energise the relay correctly, follow the following instructions carefully.
1.1 System Connections
1. Check the wiring scheme of your installation.
2. Check that the contacts of output relay RL1 are included in your trip circuit.
1.2 Auxiliary Power Supply Connections
Connect a DC or AC (according to nominal supply rating Ua) voltage power supply.
POSITIVE Vaux TO TERMINAL 33
NEGATIVE Vaux TO TERMINAL 34
DO NOT FORGET TO CONNECT THE EARTH REFERENCE TO
TERMINAL 29!
Turn on the auxiliary power supply and set to approximately rated voltage as shown on the
front panel of the relay.
The display should show:

IA Displays the A phase current (true RMS value) taking into

1.00 A account the phase CT ratio (CONFIGURATION/CT RATIO
submenu).

LEDs should be in the following configuration:

− Green LED L3 "Healthy" (Vaux) is iluminated

− All the other LEDs should be off.

P72x/EN GS/C21 Getting Started

Page 4/24 MiCOM P721/P723

2. USER INTERFACE AND MENU STRUCTURE

Before carrying out any work on the equipment, the user should be familiar with
the contents of the safety section/safety guide SFTY/4LM/D11 or later issue, the
technical data section and the ratings on the equipment rating label.
Refer to “GETTING STARTED” (GS) section for the description of the following procedures
(interfaces and menu).
Before the initial operation of the relay, some of the parameter settings must be checked or
modified (otherwise, “Setting alarm” is displayed).
Lift the upper and lower hinged covers and remove the transparent cover over the front
panel. When the keypad is exposed, it provides full access to the menu options of the relay.
The relevant information is displayed on the LCD.

2.1 User interfaces and menu structure

The settings and functions of the MiCOM relay can be accessed both from the front panel
keypad and LCD, and via the front and rear communication ports. Information on each of
these methods is given in this section to describe how to start using the relay.
The front panel of the relay includes a keypad, a 16-character alphanumeric liquid crystal
display (LCD) and 8 LEDs.
2.1.1 “Default settings” alarm
When the relay is powered ON, it checks its memory contents. If the default settings are
loaded, an alarm is raised and The ALARM yellow LED lights up.
To suppress this message and to reset the watch dog, change one parameter in the relay's
menu:

− Press the  button,

− Modify, for instance, the password or the language (“OP parameters” menu.
2.1.2 Password protection
Password protection is applicable to most of the relay parameter settings, especially to the
selection of the various thresholds, time delays, communication parameters, allocation of
logic inputs and logic outputs.
The password consists of four capital characters. When leaving the factory, the password is
set to AAAA. The user can define any combination of four characters.
Should the password be lost or forgotten, the modification of stored parameters is blocked. It
is then necessary to contact the manufacturer or his agent and by specifying the serial
number of the relay, a stand-by password specific to the relay concerned may be obtained.
NOTE: The programming mode is indicated with the letter "P" on the right
hand side of the display on each menu heading. The letter "P"
remains present as long as the password is active (5 minutes if there
is no action on the keypad).

− Go to the “OP. Parameters” menu by pressing  and then to the “password” menu by
pressing ,

− Enter the current password (default password = “AAAA”) and validate with  (this
operation is not necessary if the password has been entered some minutes ago),

− Enter the new password character by character, using  and  arrows to change a
letter (maintain the key pressed to scroll through the letter in the alphabet). Use  and 
arrows to select another character: a flashing cursor will indicate which character field of
the password may be entered.,
Getting Started P72x/EN GS/C21

MiCOM P721/P723 Page 5/24

− Validate using  or cancel using . If the password is correct, the following message is
displayed on the LCD: PASSWORD OK

As soon as the password has been entered, no setting change will be accepted via the
remote or local communication port (RS485 or RS232).
Alternatively, the password can be entered by using the Password window in the
OP.PARAMETERS menu. This password entry procedure is the same as above.
NOTE: In case of loss of password a back up password can be provided
contacting Schneider Electric sale office or factory.
2.1.3 Setting the language

− Go to the “OP. Parameters” menu by pressing  and then to the “Language” menu by
pressing , ,

− If necessary, enter the current password and validate with ,

− Select the language using  or  arrows, and validate with ,

− Validate using  or cancel using .

2.1.4 Setting Date and time

− Go to the “OP. Parameters” menu by pressing  and then to the “Date” menu by
pressing ,

− If necessary, enter the current password and validate with ,

− Set the date using  or  arrow, and validate with  (10/11/08 means November 10th
2008),
NOTE: When you modify the date, the first digit for the day or the month can
be selected according to the second digit. For instance, if 13/09/08 is
displayed, you cannot select 33 for the day, or 29 for the month.

− Validate using  or cancel using .

− Select the “Time ” menu by pressing 2 key,

− Set the date using  or  arrow, and validate with  (14:21:42 means 2:21:42 pm)

2.1.5 Menu navigation

A simple menu structure (refer to P72x/EN HI section) allows setting and reading of
parameters and functionality.
The keypad provides full access to the menu options, with informations displayed on the
LCD.

− Press , ,  and  keys for menu navigation:

• Press  or  keys to navigate from a menu heading to another menu heading (refer to
the figure below),

• Press  key to access to a sub menu, then navigate using  or  keys.

− Maintain these keys pressed to scroll through the menu,

− If necessary, modify a parameter by pressing  key.

• Modify the corresponding parameter using arrows,

• Validate using , or cancel using .

P72x/EN GS/C21 Getting Started

Page 6/24 MiCOM P721/P723

2.2 Menu structure

The menu structure is shown below.

DEFAULT DISPLAY
I Diff = 1245 A

OP PARAMETERS CONFIGURATION MEASUREMENTS COMMUNICATION

RECORDS AUTOMAT. CTRL PROTECTION G1/G2

Refer to P72y/EN HI section for the detail of the menu.

Getting Started P72x/EN GS/C21

MiCOM P721/P723 Page 7/24

3. LOCAL CONNECTION TO A PC
3.1 Configuration

io
S1 Stud
MiCOM

P0107ENc

For a local connection between a PC and the relay, a serial cable with metallic shield should
be used.
The wiring of the RS232 cable must be as shown in the following drawing.

RS232 PC PORT MiCOM P721/P723

9 pin male connector 9 pin female connector

1 1
6 6
2 2
7 7
3 3
8 8
4 4
9 9
5 5
P0073ENb

A USB/RS232 cable can also be used to communicate to the relay

3.1.1 REMOTE connection
The figure shows the recommended way to connect a RS485 cable to the relay to build a
local network.
P72x/EN GS/C21 Getting Started

Page 8/24 MiCOM P721/P723

3.2 Products plugged in the same panel

Case earth connection

29
30
32 31

shield

RS485 cable

1. Connect a cable (green/yellow wire) on the case earth

connection of each product (with screw).
2. The communication cable shield must be connected
to the pin number 29 of each product.
3. The pin number 29 of each terminal block must be
connected to the case earth connection of each product
(with screw).

P0253ENa

3.3 Communication between distant products

EARTH

1. Connect a cable (green/yellow wire) on the case earth

connection of each product (with screw)
2. The communication cable shield must be connected to the pin
number 29 of each product .
3. The pin number 29 has to be connected to the case earth Earth
connection (with screw) to only ONE panel (do not leave the
cable shield "floating") P0254ENa
Getting Started P72x/EN GS/C21

MiCOM P721/P723 Page 9/24

3.4 MiCOM S1 and MiCOM S1 Studio relay communications basics

MiCOM S1 Studio is the universal MiCOM IED Support Softwares and provide users a
direct and convenient access to all stored data in any MiCOM IED using the EIA(RS)232
front communication port.
MiCOM S1 Studio provides full access to:

− MiCOM Px20, Px30, Px40 relays

− MiCOM Mx20 measurements units

The following sections give the main procedures to connect and to use MiCOM S1 Studio.
Before starting, verify that the EIA(RS)232 serial cable is properly connected to the
EIA(RS)232 port on the front panel of the relay. Please follow the instructions in section 3.1
to ensure a proper connection is made between the PC and the relay before attempting to
communicate with the relay.
This section is intended as a quick start guide to using MiCOM S1 Studio, and assumes you
have a copy of MiCOM S1 Studio installed on your PC. Please refer to the MiCOM S1 Studio
User Manual for more detailed information.
3.5 MiCOM S1 Studio
3.5.1 Data Model Management
The settings and parameters of the protection relay can be extracted from the relay or
loaded usin Fata Model manager. The Data Model Manager can load any model from Local
file, CD ROM or Internet server (if connected).
The Data Model Manager is used to add or to remove data models, to export and to import
data model files.
It is necessary to close MiCOM S1 Studio when the Data Model Manager is opened.

To Open Data Model manager, click on the icon: . Select "MiCOM S1 Studio" then
"Data Model Manager" in the "Programs" menu.
P72x/EN GS/C21 Getting Started

Page 10/24 MiCOM P721/P723

The following panel is displayed:

Select the “Add” option to add the new data model then click on the “next” button.
The next panel is used to select the model source (CD ROM, local folder or Areva T&D FTP
server). Select the model source and click on the “next” button.

1 2

NOTE: the following procedure is given with FTP server selected.

Getting Started P72x/EN GS/C21

MiCOM P721/P723 Page 11/24

The Data Model Manager loads data models details then displays automatically the
language selection option panel. Select the menu language and click the “next” button.

The data models panel is displayed. Select the data model for your product (for instance, to
download P72x data models, Open the “Px10/Px20/Px20C/M/Modulex” sub-menu (click on
“+” then select data model according to your product). When data models are selected, the
Data Model Manager panel displays the selected models size to download.

2
3
P72x/EN GS/C21 Getting Started

Page 12/24 MiCOM P721/P723

Click on “Install button”. The model files are downloaded and updated in the system.

When installation has beeen completed, close the Data Model Manager. This Data Model is
used with MiCOM S1 Studio when a system is opened or created. To open this default
setting file, refer to § 3.5.8.

3.5.2 “Quick Connection” to the relay using MiCOM S1 Studio

To start MiCOM S1 Studio, click on the icon:

In the "Programs" menu, select "MiCOM S1 Studio".
The MiCOM S1 Studio launcher screen is displayed:

Toolbar

Studio Explorer & Start page

Properties views

Search results view

Getting Started P72x/EN GS/C21

MiCOM P721/P723 Page 13/24

Click on the Quick Connect button at the top left of the application.

Create a new system or open an existing one:

P72x/EN GS/C21 Getting Started

Page 14/24 MiCOM P721/P723

Select “Px20 Series” from the presented options

Select a port from the presented options

Upon a successful connection a dialog will be displayed showing device type, model number
and plant reference. Options for language, device name and comment are also available
The device is displayed in the Studio Explorer panel.
Getting Started P72x/EN GS/C21

MiCOM P721/P723 Page 15/24

3.5.3 Create a system

In MiCOM S1 Studio, a System provides a root node in the Studio Explorer from which all
subsequent nodes are created.
Add substations, bays, voltage levels and devices to the system.
If a system is no longer needed, delete it using the delete command.
The use of Quick Connect will automatically create a default system, if one does not already
exist. Systems are not opened automatically, unless Reopen last System at start-up is
checked in Preferences.
To create a new system:

− By default, the window displays the message “create new or open existing system”: click
on “new to create a new system.

− If a system is loaded in the “Studio Explorer” window, right-click on the panel background
and select New System or select the corresponding icon on Studio Explorer's toolbar.

The following window is displayed: Enter the name of the system, and the path to save the
system file.
P72x/EN GS/C21 Getting Started

Page 16/24 MiCOM P721/P723

The new System is displayed in the Studio Explorer panel:

NOTE: In the Studio Explorer panel, if an item is selected, its properties are
displayed in the “Properties” panel

3.5.4 Create a new substation

Select the system: the menu bar is updated with “new device”, “new substation”, “close”,
“delete”, “paste”, “properties” and “options” icons.

Create a new substation

Create a new device

Click on “new substation” icon (or select the menu using right-click). The following window is
displayed:
Getting Started P72x/EN GS/C21

MiCOM P721/P723 Page 17/24

The new substation is displayed and the menu bar is updated when a substation is selected:

Import SCL
Create a new voltage level

Click on “Import SCL” button to import a Substation Configuration File.

To create a substation configuration, click on “new voltage level” button.
3.5.5 Create a new voltage level
Select the substation and click on “new station level” button (or select the menu using right-
click).
In the “Create a new voltage level”, enter the voltage level of the station.
The “new voltage level” is displayed and the “new bay” icon is displayed.

Create new bay

3.5.6 Create a new bay

Select the substation and click on “new bay” button (or select the menu using right-click).
In the “Create new bay…” window, enter the bay indication,
Th new bay is displayed.
P72x/EN GS/C21 Getting Started

Page 18/24 MiCOM P721/P723

3.5.7 Create a new device

Click on “new device” button (or select the menu using right-click).
Select the device type and, if necessary, the communications protocole mode that will be
used to send the file to the device.

1
2

Select the device type, click “next” button.

Select the model and click “next” button.
Getting Started P72x/EN GS/C21

MiCOM P721/P723 Page 19/24

The new device is created and displayed. If necessary, select the MiCOM P72x model using
the “OP PARAMETERS/Description” menu.

3.5.8 Open Settings File

To open an existing file:

− If the file is saved or if the relay is not connected: open the Settings folder and open the
Settings file,

− If the relay is connected, extract the settings from the relay: click on the “Extract Settings”
command or right click on the Settings folder

Extract Settings
P72x/EN GS/C21 Getting Started

Page 20/24 MiCOM P721/P723

To open default settings:

− Click on “Open Default Settings File” Option in the File menu.

− Select the device type then the communication protocol.

− Select the device type and click on the “Next” button:

− Select the Model and click on the “Finish” button. The default settings are displayed.
Getting Started P72x/EN GS/C21

MiCOM P721/P723 Page 21/24

3.6 Presentation and analysis od disturbance

The reading and analisys of disturbance is performed using Wavewin.
To open Wavewin using “Tools” menu (MiCOM S1 Studio).

The Wavewin File Manager is displayed (refer to the Wavewin User’s guide to operate
Wavewin).
P72x/EN GS/C21 Getting Started

Page 22/24 MiCOM P721/P723

4. WITHDRAWING MODULE FROM CASE

Remove the top and bottom hinged covers:

Depose the four retaining screws in the top and the bottom side of the relay. These screws
retain the relay to the case.
Getting Started P72x/EN GS/C21

MiCOM P721/P723 Page 23/24

Insert a 3mm screwdriver into the hole situated under the upper hinged cover above the
LCD:

Turn the lock pin 90° to the left:

Insert the screwdriver into the second hole under the lower hinged cover, and the lower lock
pin is turned 90° to the right.
By this turning action, push slightly forward the
module and extract it by pulling on both sides of the
front panel.
P72x/EN GS/C21 Getting Started

Page 24/24 MiCOM P721/P723

5. COMPANY CONTACT INFORMATION

If you need information pertaining to the operation of this MiCOM product that you have
purchased, please contact your local Schneider Electric agent or the Customer Care Center
(www.schneider-electric.com/ccc). Do not forget to give the serial number and reference of
the MiCOM product.
The MiCOM product reference and serial numbers are documented under the upper hinged
cover on the front of the relay. For more precise information, refer to the section "Relay
Identification" in this chapter.
PLEASE GIVE THE FOLLOWING DATA WHEN MAKING A CALL TO SCHNEIDER
ELECTRIC:

− CORTEC code of the MiCOM relay

− Serial number of the MiCOM relay

− Order reference

− Operator reference
Application Guide P12x/EN AP/C21

MiCOM P721/P723

APPLICATION GUIDE
Application Guide P72x/EN AP/C21

MiCOM P721/P723 Page 1/52

CONTENTS

1. INTRODUCTION 3
1.1 P72x High Impedance Differential Relay 3
1.2 Busbar Protection 3
1.3 Reactor Protection 3
1.4 Transformer Protection 4
1.5 Generator/Motor Protection 4

2. BUSBAR CONFIGURATIONS 5
2.1 Single busbar 5
2.2 Double busbar with transfer 5
2.3 Triple busbar 6
2.4 Mesh Busbar Scheme 7
2.5 One and a Half Breaker Scheme 8
2.6 High Impedance Differential Protection 9
2.6.1 Use of non-linear resistors 13
2.7 Current distribution - internal and external faults 15

3. APPLYING THE MiCOM P72X 17

3.1 Single phase applications: restricted earth fault and balanced earth fault
protection 17
3.2 Three phase applications 20
3.3 Buswire supervision 23
3.4 Circuit breaker failure 28

4. SETTING EXAMPLES 29
4.1 Restricted earth fault application 29
4.1.1 Example 1 29
4.1.2 Example 2 33
4.2 Busbar applications 37
4.2.1 Stability voltage calculation 39
4.2.2 Current transformers 40
4.2.3 Discriminating zone - Primary operating current 40
4.2.4 Check zone - Primary operating current calculation 41
4.2.5 Stabilizing resistor calculation 41
4.2.6 Non-linear resistor 42
4.2.7 Busbar supervision 42
4.2.8 Relay Settings 43
4.3 Motor / generator applications 44
P72x/EN AP/C21 Application Guide

Page 2/52 MiCOM P721/P723

5. SETTING GROUP SELECTION (P721 & P723 ONLY) 45

5.1 Change of setting group done by a digital input 45
5.2 Switch between active groups 45
5.3 Priority 46

6. MAINTENANCE MODE 47

7. LOGIC EQUATIONS (P721 & P723) 47

8. REAL TIME CLOCK SYNCHRONIZATION VIA OPTO-INPUTS 47

9. EVENT RECORDS 48

10. FAULT RECORDS 48

11. INSTANTANEOUS RECORDER 48

12. DISTURBANCE RECORDER 48

13. CT REQUIREMENTS 49
13.1 Restricted earth fault/Balanced earth fault (REF/BEF) applications 50
13.2 Busbar application 51
Application Guide P72x/EN AP/C21

MiCOM P721/P723 Page 3/52

1. INTRODUCTION
1.1 P72x High Impedance Differential Relay
The P72x relay, used with a stabilizing resistor, is designed for applications where sensitive
settings and stability on heavy through faults are required. It is recommended for balanced
and restricted earth fault schemes, bus-zone and certain forms of differential protection for
generators, auto-transformers, reactors and motors.
The sampling rate of the P72x is 32 samples per cycle. A Measurement Filter setting is
available in the P72x, so that the relay may operate in three different modes. The first one is
the Fourier mode, the relay is tuned to the supply frequency, and the harmonics and DC
component produced by current transformer saturation are filtered. The second option is
Sample mode. This mode is based on the peak to peak measurement of the differential
Idiffpeak − peak
current. A fault is detected when > setting . Finally, the relay may be set to
2× 2
Fast sample mode, and a fault is detected when Idiffins tan tan eous > 2 × 2 × setting . In Fast
sample mode a trip is issued if four consecutive differential current samples are above
2 × 2 × setting in one half cycle.

1.2 Busbar Protection

Busbar protection must be completely reliable since the protection may only be called to
operate once or twice in the life of the installation. Failure to operate under fault conditions is
unacceptable because the damage that results from an uncleared fault may be extensive, for
example, the loss of the station by fire. In addition, the protection must be high speed in
operation to minimize damage and maintain system stability. It must also be absolutely
stable under all through fault conditions because failure to stabilize would cause
unnecessary widespread interruption of supply.
If the busbar is subdivided into sections, each of which is separately protected, a fault in one
section does not involve the tripping of the complete busbar. Therefore, the protection must
discriminate between sections of the busbars so that the minimum number of circuit breakers
is tripped to isolate the fault.
The following are commonly used busbar protections:

• Frame to earth (leakage) protection

• Differential protection

• Directional comparison (blocking schemes) protection

The P72x relays operate on the high impedance principle. Therefore, the application of high
impedance busbar protection in different busbar arrangements is considered in the following
sections.
The high impedance differential scheme is simple and fast, but it requires good CT inputs
with well matched ratios and high CT kneepoints. At 5In the typical operating times when
the P72x is used in REF/BEF applications is 40 ms for Fourier, 34 ms for Fast and 52 ms for
Sample. At 5In the typical operating times when the P72x is used in busbar applications is
18 ms for Fourier, 18 ms for Fast and 38 ms for Sample.

1.3 Reactor Protection

To calculate the stability voltage when protecting a reactor with a high impedance scheme, it
should be noted that the external fault current contribution from the reactor is much smaller
than the internal fault current. Therefore, the reactor inrush current should be used in
stability calculations instead of the external fault current.
P72x/EN AP/C21 Application Guide

Page 4/52 MiCOM P721/P723

1.4 Transformer Protection

The P72x can be applied as a high impedance REF to protect the transformer windings. In a
star-connected winding, particularly when the neutral is grounded through an impedance, the
degree of protection is improved when a high impedance REF is applied.
The [87N] Threshold I Diff should be set such that the primary operating current is 10-60% of
the winding rated current when solidly earthed and 10-25% of the minimum earth fault
current for a fault at the transformer terminals when resistance earthed.

1.5 Generator/Motor Protection

The same calculation principles that apply for the three phase protection of busbars can be
applied to motors and generators, although special consideration of the fault current will be
required for stability calculations. For these applications, the machine contribution to an
external fault should be used in the stability voltage calculation and this can be significantly
lower than the maximum internal fault current that should be used in the non-linear resistor
calculation. For motors the starting current or locked rotor current value is usually used in
the stability calculation and this will lead to relatively small CT requirements. Often the most
sensitive relay settings are used and buswire supervision is rarely applied.
Application Guide P72x/EN AP/C21

MiCOM P721/P723 Page 5/52

2. BUSBAR CONFIGURATIONS
There are several busbar arrangements depending on the economics and flexibility of
system operation. In addition to plain single and double busbar schemes, the following are
some other popular arrangements. The following figures show the zone of protection of
several busbar arrangements.

2.1 Single busbar

The single bus, single breaker bus arrangement is the most simple, economical and basic. It
is widely used in distribution and low transmission voltages. As shown in FIGURE 1, this
arrangement provides no operating flexibility. All the breakers must trip for any busbar fault.

FIGURE 1: SINGLE BUSBAR ARRANGEMENT

2.2 Double busbar with transfer

With this double busbar variation, each feeder has isolators to enable switching to main or
reverse/transfer bars, and an additional isolator to enable the feeder breaker to be bypassed.
The reverse bar may then function also as a transfer bar and the bus coupler breaker takes
over the function of the feeder breaker to free it for maintenance.
To apply discriminative busbar protection, suitable auxiliary switches are required on each
isolator to select the CTs for the correct zone, and the trip circuits to the appropriate relays.
P72x/EN AP/C21 Application Guide

Page 6/52 MiCOM P721/P723

FIGURE 2: DOUBLE BUSBAR WITH TRANSFER

2.3 Triple busbar

This is a double busbar scheme with a third, transfer busbar.
Under normal conditions all bus section and bus coupler breakers are closed. During
maintenance of a feeder breaker, the transfer bus is energized from the selected main or
reserve bus by the transfer breaker and the feeder bypass isolator closed on the transfer
bar. In this situation all bus section and bus coupler breakers remain closed. For busbar
protection, isolator auxiliary switches are required.

FIGURE 3: TRIPLE BUSBAR

Application Guide P72x/EN AP/C21

MiCOM P721/P723 Page 7/52

2.4 Mesh Busbar Scheme

The mesh busbar scheme is frequently used for EHV busbar configurations. A transformer
and a feeder are linked at each corner of the mesh and four circuit breakers used to
complete the mesh interconnection.

FIGURE 4: MESH BUSBAR SCHEME

The protection shown consists of a fully discriminative scheme with a relay at each corner. A
fault at any corner trips the two breakers associated with that corner and also initiates any
intertripping necessary to open circuit breakers at remote ends.

FIGURE 5: MESH BUSBAR - DIFFERENTIAL PROTECTION ZONE

P72x/EN AP/C21 Application Guide

Page 8/52 MiCOM P721/P723

2.5 One and a Half Breaker Scheme

Under normal conditions all breakers are closed. During maintenance of a feeder breaker,
only that breaker would be kept open.
During maintenance of a busbar, all the breakers connected to that busbar would remain
open to isolate that busbar.

FIGURE 6: ONE AND A HALF BREAKER SCHEME

A single busbar scheme is applied to each busbar. The protection scheme does not require
isolator auxiliaries for CT zone selection or in the tripping circuits. The breaker and a half
scheme is popular because it is very simple and flexible in operation.

FIGURE 7: ONE AND A HALF BREAKER SCHEME – DIFFERENTIAL PROTECTION

ZONE
Application Guide P72x/EN AP/C21

MiCOM P721/P723 Page 9/52

2.6 High Impedance Differential Protection

The application of the MiCOM P72x to the protection of machines, power transformers and
busbar installations is based on the high impedance differential principle. The P72x offers
stability for any type of fault occurring outside the protected zone and satisfactory operation
for faults within the zone.
Although the P72x only has current inputs to be used in a high impedance scheme, the Input
Selection setting under CONFIGURATION/CONNECTION may be Voltage or Current.
When set to Current, the Threshold I Diff parameter should be set. When the Input
Selection is Voltage, the Threshold V Diff parameter should be set in addition to the
Stabilizing Resistor. This is because the relay calculates the Threshold I Diff parameter
as Threshold V Diff/Stabilizing Resistor.
In a high impedance differential scheme, the currents entering and leaving the protected
zone are compared continuously. The CTs are also loaded with a high impedance to force
the error differential current (due to CT saturation and CT errors) through the CTs instead of
the current input in the P72x. Stability should be maintained during external faults with only
one CT heavily saturated (this is the worst condition). In a high impedance relay the voltage
setting is greater than the calculated maximum voltage that can appear across the high
impedance path under the assigned maximum through fault current condition multiplied by a
K factor. This K factor is indicated in the CT requirement tests results. The objective is to
provide fast operation at a low fault setting on internal faults yet retain stability up to the
highest possible value of short circuit current on through faults.
FIGURE 8 shows the high impedance differential principle. Current transformers on each
side of the protected zone are connected in parallel which will produce a resultant current to
operate a relay for internal faults only. Theoretically such a system is unaffected by through
faults, but in practice the associated current transformer may not behave ideally when the
current exceeds a certain value. Errors in transformation due to saturation of the current
transformer cores may be sufficient to cause maloperation if special precautions are not
taken. Therefore, to ensure stability for external faults the current through the relay is limited
by the insertion of an external resistor in series with the relay. This resistor is known as a
stabilizing resistor. The main application consideration with a high impedance scheme is
stability for heavy through faults. The stability is determined by the CTs and relay settings
which in turn affect the sensitivity of the scheme.
The stability limit of a busbar protection scheme is based on the maximum through fault
current. In general this takes the value of the associated switchgear rating irrespective of the
existing or anticipated fault levels. The differential relay and stabilizing resistor are
connected across the paralleled CTs.
Consider the simple two CT differential circuit shown in FIGURE 8. During an external fault
the through fault current should circulate between the current transformer secondaries. The
only current that can flow through the relay circuit is that due to any difference in the current
transformer outputs for the same primary current. On the other hand, if the right hand side
CT fully saturates, ZM2 appears as a short circuit. It is considered that CT1 is not saturated
and it is delivering its full current output. As a result, the current from CT1 is divided
between the high impedance path (relay plus stabilizing resistor) and the saturated CT2.
The current flowing through the high impedance path is as follows:

(R CT + 2R L )
IS = I
(R r + R ST + R CT + 2R L )

Where:
IS = current flowing in the relay
I = current output from CT1
RCT = Resistance of the current transformer secondary winding.
RL = Resistance of a single wire from the relay to the CT.
Rr = Relay resistance, which is neglected in the P72x
RST = Stabilizing resistor
P72x/EN AP/C21 Application Guide

Page 10/52 MiCOM P721/P723

The relay is prevented from unwanted operation because most of the current will flow in the
RCT + 2RL loop since RST >> RCT + 2RL.

A voltage will develop across the relay. This voltage is equal to IF×(2RL + RCT). If this voltage
is greater than the setting voltage, Threshold Vdiff, the relay will operate. This is
undesirable. Therefore, this becomes the setting criterion; the relay should be set to a
voltage greater than IF×(2RL + RCT).

Healthy CT Saturated CT
Protected
circuit

A-G
Zm1 Zm2
I = Is + IF RCT2
RCT1
I IF

RL1 IS RL3

Vs RST

RL2 R
RL4

P4488ENa

FIGURE 8: HIGH IMPEDANCE DIFFERENTIAL PRINCIPLE

The voltage applied across the high impedance path is:

V = IF × (R CT + 2R L )

Where:
IF = Maximum secondary external fault current (it is assumed that IS<<IF)
A stabilizing resistor RST is used in series with the relay circuit to improve the stability of the
relay under external fault conditions. This resistor limits the spill current during the condition
described in FIGURE 8.
VS is the stability voltage. It depends on the relay current setting IS and the high impedance
path resistance:

VS = IS × (R ST + R r )

Where:
IS = relay current setting (corresponds to Threshold I Diff in the P72x)
VS = stability voltage setting (corresponds to Threshold V Diff in the P72x)
RST = Stabilizing resistor
Rr = Relay resistance, which is neglected in the P72x
The general stability conditions are obtained when:

VS > K × IF × (R CT + 2R L )

Where:
K = Stability factor which is affected by the characteristic of the differential relay. In the
P72x the K factor depends on which Measurement filter is selected (Fourier, Sample or Fast
sample modes). In addition, K is also affected by the application; for example, high
impedance busbar protection, high impedance REF, etc. K is also influenced by the ratio
Application Guide P72x/EN AP/C21

MiCOM P721/P723 Page 11/52

Vk/Vs, where Vk is the Knee point voltage of the CT. The K factor is clearly indicated in the
CT requirements section at the end of this chapter.
To obtain a high speed operation for internal faults, the Knee point voltage Vk of the CT must
be significantly higher than the stability voltage Vs. A ratio of 4 or 5 would be appropriate.
The operating times and K factors for VK/VS ≤ 16 are indicated in the CT requirements
section at the end of this chapter.
NOTE: The maximum internal fault level for the single phase CT input in the
P721 and P723 must not exceed 20In.
The current transformers used in a high impedance scheme should be of equal ratio, of
similar magnetizing characteristics and of low reactance construction. In cases where low
reactance current transformers are not available and high reactance ones must be used, it is
essential to use the reactance of the current transformer in the calculations for the voltage
setting. Thus, the current transformer impedance is expressed as a complex number in the
form RCT + jXCT. It is also necessary to ensure that the exciting impedance of the current
transformer is large in comparison with its secondary ohmic impedance at the relay setting
voltage.
Once the setting is determined, the scheme sensitivity can be calculated by considering the
relay operating current reflected to the primary plus the excitation current of the CTs
connected in parallel, whether carrying primary current or not.

FIGURE 9: HIGH IMPEDANCE DIFFERENTIAL SCHEME SENSITIVITY

The primary operating current for the scheme can be calculated as follows:

IP = N × (IS + nI e )

Where:
IP = Primary operating current
N = CT ratio
IS = relay operating current at setting
Ie = excitation current at setting voltage (obtained from the CT magnetizing curve). The
setting voltage is calculated as V = Is × (RST + Rr). RST is the stabilizing resistor and Rr is the
relay burden which is neglected in the P72x.
N = number of CTs connected in parallel
If the relay setting voltage is high, the CT magnetizing current at the setting voltage summed
for all the CTs can be significant.
In REF/BEF applications, typical setting values are chosen to provide a primary operating
current, IP, at 10 to 25% of the minimum earth fault level for a resistance earthed system.
Also in REF/BEF applications, for a solidly earthed system, the typical setting provides a
primary operating current of between 10 and 60 % of the winding rated current. In busbar
applications it is desirable that the primary operating current does not exceed 30% of the
minimum fault level. In busbar applications, it is also common to set the relay so that the
primary operating current is 110 to 130% of the maximum feeder circuit loading.
P72x/EN AP/C21 Application Guide

Page 12/52 MiCOM P721/P723

As a result, IS is calculated as follows:

I
IS = P − nIe
N
The stabilizing resistor is calculated as follows:

V
R ST = S − R r
IS

Rr, the relay resistance, can be neglected in the P72x.

The standard resistors that are supplied for use in the high impedance application are wire-
wound, continuously adjustable and have a continuous rating of 145 W based on Schneider
Electric conjunctive testing. These resistors should not be adjusted below 60% of their
nominal ohmic value, otherwise there is a risk that the power dissipation during faults
will be insufficient.
The P79x is an integrated stabilizing resistor and varistor unit enclosed in a 20TE case that
may be used in high impedance differential schemes. Three options of stabilizing
resistances are provided. Each option provides four resistance values that are determined
by connection. Schneider Electric has developed a spreadsheet tool to assist in determining
which resistance is suitable for a given application. This tool is available on request. When
using the P79x, it is important to limit the power dissipated in the resistance once the
differential (87) or the buswire supervision (95) operates. To limit the power
dissipation, the contacts configured as Buswire-Short should be wired in parallel to
the high impedance path (only the stabilizing resistor in the case of the P72x), as
shown in FIGURE 10. Please refer to the P79x documentation for further information.

P4490ENa

FIGURE 10: BUSWIRE-SHORT CONTACTS TO LIMIT POWER DISSIPATION WHEN

USED WITH P79X
Application Guide P72x/EN AP/C21

MiCOM P721/P723 Page 13/52

2.6.1 Use of non-linear resistors

When the maximum through fault current is limited by the protected circuit impedance, such
as in the case of generator differential and power transformer restricted earth fault
protection, it is generally unnecessary to use non-linear voltage limiting resistors. However,
when the maximum through fault current is high, such as in busbar protection, it is more
common to use a non-linear resistor across the high impedance path (relay and stabilizing
resistor). Non-linear resistors are used to limit the peak voltage developed by the current
transformers under internal fault conditions, to a value below the insulation level of the
current transformers, relay and interconnecting leads, which are typically able to withstand
approximately 3000 V peak.
The following formulae should be used to estimate the peak transient voltage that could be
produced for an internal fault. This voltage is a function of the current transformer kneepoint
voltage and the prospective voltage that would be produced for an internal fault if current
transformer saturation did not occur.

The internal fault level, I’F, can be significantly higher than the external fault level, IF, on
generators where current can be fed from the supply system and the generator. Similarly
the internal fault level on motors and shunt reactors will be considerably higher than the
values used in the stability calculations (motor start/locked rotor and inrush currents
respectively).

VP = 2 × 2Vk (VF − Vk )

VF = IF' (R CT + 2R L + R ST + R r )

Where:
VP = peak voltage developed by the CT under internal fault conditions
Vk = current transformer knee-point voltage
VF = maximum voltage that would be produced if CT saturation did not occur
I’F = maximum internal secondary fault current
RCT = current transformer secondary winding resistance
RL = maximum lead burden from CT to relay
RST = relay stabilizing resistor
Rr = relay ohmic impedance at setting
When the value of VP is greater than 3000 V peak, non-linear resistors should be applied.
They are effectively connected across the relay circuit, or phase to neutral of the ac
buswires, and shunt the secondary current output of the current transformer from the relay
circuit to prevent very high secondary voltages.
Traditionally, Schneider Electric recommends the use of non-linear resistors manufactured
by Metrosil. They are externally mounted and take the form of annular discs, of 152 mm
diameter and approximately 10 mm thickness. Their operating characteristics follow the
expression:

V = CI0.25
Where:
V = instantaneous voltage applied to the non-linear resistor (Metrosil)
C = constant of the non-linear resistor (Metrosil)
I = instantaneous current through the non-linear resistor (Metrosil)
P72x/EN AP/C21 Application Guide

Page 14/52 MiCOM P721/P723

With a sinusoidal voltage applied across the Metrosil, the rms current is as follows:

4
⎛V 2 ⎞⎟
IRMS = 0.52⎜ RMS
⎜ C ⎟
⎝ ⎠
Where:
VRMS = rms value of the sinusoidal voltage applied across the Metrosil
This is due to the fact that the current waveform through the Metrosil is not sinusoidal but
appreciably distorted.
For satisfactory application of a non-linear resistor (Metrosil), the current through the
nonlinear resistor at the relay voltage setting should be as low as possible but no
greater than approximately 30 mA rms for 1 A CTs and approximately 100 mA rms for
5 A CTs.
2.6.1.1 Metrosil units for relays with 1 A CT
The Metrosil units with 1 A CTs have been designed to comply with the following restrictions:

• At the relay voltage setting, the Metrosil current should be less than 30 mA rms.

• At the maximum secondary internal fault current, the Metrosil unit should limit the
voltage to 1500 V rms if possible.
The Metrosil units normally recommended to be used with 1 A CTs are shown in the
following table:

Relay Voltage Nominal Characteristics Recommended Metrosil Type

setting C β Single pole Relay Triple pole relay
Up to 125 V rms 450 0.25 600A/S1/S256 600A/S3/1/S802
125 to 300 V rms 900 0.25 600A/S1/S1088 600A/S3/1/S1195

NOTE: Single pole Relay Metrosil Units are normally supplied without
mounting brackets unless otherwise specified by the customer.
2.6.1.2 Metrosil units for relays with 5 A CT
These Metrosil units have been designed to comply with the following requirements:

• At the relay voltage setting, the Metrosil current should be less than 100 mA rms. The
actual maximum currents passed by the units are shown in the following table, below
their type description.

• At the maximum secondary internal fault current the Metrosil unit should limit the
voltage to 1500 V rms for 0.25 seconds. At the higher relay settings, it is not possible
to limit the fault voltage to 1500 V rms, hence higher voltages have to be tolerated
(indicated by *, **, ***).
Application Guide P72x/EN AP/C21

MiCOM P721/P723 Page 15/52

The Metrosil units normally recommended for use with 5 A CTs and single pole relays are
shown in the following table:

Secondary Recommended Metrosil Type

Internal fault
current Relay Voltage Setting

Amps rms Up to 200 V rms 250 V rms 275 V rms 300 V rms
600A/S1/S1213 600A/S1/S1214 600A/S1/S1214 600A/S1/S1223
50 A C= 540/640 C= 670/800 C= 670/800 C= 740/870*
35 mA rms 40 mA rms 50 mA rms 50 mA rms
600A/S2/P/S1217 600A/S2/P/S1215 600A/S2/P/S1215 600A/S2/P/S1196
100 A C= 470/540 C= 570/670 C= 570/670 C= 620/740*
35 mA rms 75 mA rms 100 mA rms 100 mA rms
600A/S3/P/S1219 600A/S3/P/S1220 600A/S3/P/S1221 600A/S3/P/S1222
150 A C= 430/500 C= 520/620 C= 570/670** C= 620/740***
100 mA rms 100 mA rms 100 mA rms 100 mA rms

NOTE: * 2400 V peak

** 2200 V peak
*** 2600 V peak
In some cases, single disc assemblies may be acceptable, contact Schneider Electric
detailed information.
The Metrosil units used with 5 A CTs can also be used with triple pole relays and consist of
three single pole units mounted on the same central stud but electrically insulated from each
other. To order these units please specify “Triple pole Metrosil type”, followed by the single
pole type reference.
The P79x accessory also has non-linear resistors. Two options are available, the half power
non-linear resistor and the full power non-linear resistor. Schneider Electric has developed a
spreadsheet tool to assist in determining which option is suitable for a given application.
This tool is available on request.
When using the P79x, it is important to limit the power dissipated in the non-linear
resistor once the differential (87) or the buswire supervision (95) operates. To limit
the power dissipation, the contacts configured as Buswire-Short should be wired in
parallel to the stabilizing resistor. Since the P72x represents a low burden, when the
Buswire-Short contacts are closed, the non-linear resistors are shorted as shown in
FIGURE 10. For further information, please refer to the P79x documentation.
2.7 Current distribution - internal and external faults
Consider the current distributions during an external fault in the single busbar diagram
shown in FIGURE 11. Three feeders are connected to the busbar. The current flowing
through feeder 3 is the summation of the contributions from feeders 1 and 2. To consider
the worst case it is assumed that CT3 is completely saturated while CT1 and CT2 are not.
Since CT3 is completely saturated, the magnetizing impedance Zm3 is zero and CT3 can
produce no output. During an external fault the I1 and I2 flows through RCT and RL. Where
RCT is the current transformer resistive burden, RL is the lead resistive burden and Zm1, Zm2
and Zm3 are the current transformer magnetizing branch. Most of I1 + I2 will flow through
CT3 and a negligible current may flow through the differential path.
P72x/EN AP/C21 Application Guide

Page 16/52 MiCOM P721/P723

FIGURE 11: EXTERNAL FAULT – SINGLE BUSBAR

Consider the current distributions during an internal fault in the single busbar diagram shown
in FIGURE 12. During an internal fault, the high impedance path (stabilizing resistor + relay
burden) forces most of the secondary current through the CT magnetizing branch. The
voltage developed across the magnetizing branch is very high and it is highly distorted. The
peak voltage may be many times the nominal saturation voltage. This voltage is across the
high impedance path; therefore enough current flows through the relay to make it trip. If the
Measurement Filter is set to Fourier, the P72x would be tuned at the system frequency.
Therefore, dc components and harmonics are filtered.
The resistance, R, is much smaller than the stabilizing resistor, RST; therefore, it can be
neglected. Since the P72x burden is also smaller than RST, it can be neglected.
The high impedance differential scheme requires that RCT + RL is kept low. To keep RL as
low as possible, it is recommended that the junction point (physical connection of the current
transformers secondaries) is as close as possible to the locations of the CTs. The current
transformers secondaries should also be equidistant. The CTs should have the same ratio
and should operate on the full winding.

FIGURE 12: INTERNAL FAULT – SINGLE BUSBAR

The connected CTs should be grounded at only one point as shown in FIGURE 11 and
FIGURE 12 to avoid improper relay operation and damage to the CT interconnections. If
grounds are made at two or more locations, currents may flow in the differential circuit
because of differences of potential between the grounding points, due to the flow of large
ground currents during ground faults.
The correct practice is to interconnect the neutrals of all differentially connected CTs.
The neutral interconnection is grounded at one point only. The grounding is for the
protection of personnel, therefore the best place to make the ground is at the
differential relay panel.
Application Guide P72x/EN AP/C21

MiCOM P721/P723 Page 17/52

3. APPLYING THE MICOM P72X

To allocate the chosen protection elements (e.g. Trip [87] tDiff or Trip [87N] tDiff) to the trip
relay RL1, select AUTMAT.CTRL > Trip Commands. Any elements allocated in the trip
commands menu will cause RL1 to pulse for 100 ms. To latch the trip output following a
protection operation, select AUTOMAT.CTRL > Latch Functions then select the
appropriate protection element (e.g. Trip [87] tDiff or Trip [87N] tDiff).
The setting range of the P72x is as follows:
High impedance phase differential Input board rating = 0.01 – 8In
Threshold I Diff 0.02 – 2 In

High impedance neutral differential Input board rating = 0.004 – 2In

Threshold IDiff 0.01 – 1 In

3.1 Single phase applications: restricted earth fault and balanced earth fault protection
The Measurement Filter under [87N] EARTH DIFF. PROTECTION can be set to Fourier,
Sample and Fast Sample mode. In general, it is recommended to set the Measurement filter
to Fourier as the K factors are low and the operating times are adequate. Typically less than
40ms in REF/BEF applications at 5In and less than 18ms in busbar applications at 5In (three
phase fault).
The restricted earth fault relay is a high impedance differential scheme which balances zero
sequence current flowing in the transformer neutral against zero sequence current flowing in
the transformer phase windings. Any unbalance for an in-zone fault results in an increasing
voltage on the CT secondary and thus will activate the REF protection.
The high impedance differential technique ensures that the impedance of the circuit is
sufficiently so that the differential voltage which may occur under external fault conditions is
lower than the voltage required to drive setting current through the relay. This ensures
stability against external fault conditions so the relay will operate only for faults occurring
inside the protected zone.
This scheme is very sensitive and can then protect against low levels of fault current in
resistance grounded systems where the earthing impedance and the fault voltage limit the
fault current. In this application, the Threshold IDiff setting should be chosen to provide a
primary operating current less than 30% of the minimum earth fault level.
This scheme is very sensitive so can protect against low levels of fault current in resistance
grounded systems where the earthing impedance and the fault voltage limit the fault current.
In this application, the Threshold IDiff setting should be chosen to provide a primary
operating current less than 10-25% of the minimum earth fault level.
This scheme can also be used in a solidly grounded system. It provides a more sensitive
protection, even though the overall differential scheme provides a protection for faults over
most of the windings. In this application, the Threshold IDiff setting should be chosen to
provide a primary operating current between 10 and 60 % of the rated current.
FIGURE 13 shows the general diagram when the P72x is used in restricted earth
fault/balanced earth fault (REF/BEF) applications:
P72x/EN AP/C21 Application Guide

Page 18/52 MiCOM P721/P723

FIGURE 13: REF/BEF APPLICATIONS – P72X GENERAL DIAGRAM

FIGURE 14 to FIGURE 17 show how the P721 is implemented in REF and BEF applications using 1 A
connections.

FIGURE 14: RESTRICTED EARTH FAULT PROTECTION OF A 3 PHASE, 3 WIRE

SYSTEM APPLICABLE TO STAR CONNECTED GENERATORS OR POWER
TRANSFORMER WINDINGS WITH NEUTRAL EARTHED AT THE
GENERATOR/TRANSFORMER STARPOINT.
Application Guide P72x/EN AP/C21

MiCOM P721/P723 Page 19/52

P1522ENd

FIGURE 15: BALANCED EARTH FAULT PROTECTION FOR THE DELTA WINDING OF
A POWER TRANSFORMER WITH THE SUPPLY SYSTEM EARTHED (1 A
CONNECTIONS SHOWN)

FIGURE 16: RESTRICTED EARTH FAULT PROTECTION OF A 3 PHASE, 4 WIRE

SYSTEM APPLICABLE TO STAR CONNECTED GENERATORS
OR POWER TRANSFORMER WINDINGS WITH NEUTRAL
EARTHED AT THE SWITCHBOARD.
P72x/EN AP/C21 Application Guide

Page 20/52 MiCOM P721/P723

P1524ENc

FIGURE 17: RESTRICTED EARTH FAULT PROTECTION OF A 3 PHASE, 4 WIRE

SYSTEM APPLICABLE TO STAR CONNECTED GENERATORS OR POWER
TRANSFORMER WINDINGS WITH NEUTRAL EARTHED AT THE
GENERATOR/TRANSFORMER STARPOINT.

3.2 Three phase applications

For busbar protection, it is considered good practice by some utilities to set the minimum
primary operating current in excess of the rated load such that if one of the current
transformers becomes open circuit, the high impedance relay does not maloperate. Other
utilities prefer to set the relay as sensitive as possible and use a second check relay
connected to a separate set of current transformers to provide security against maloperation.
It is desirable that the primary operating current does not exceed 30% of the prospective
minimum fault current. The primary operating current should also be 110 to 130% the
maximum feeder circuit loading.
For generator and motor protection, the relay is generally set as sensitive as possible to
maximize fault coverage. In these applications it is important to recognize that the external
fault level contribution from the generator or motor may be significantly lower than the
internal fault level. The external fault level should be used for the calculation of stability
voltage and resistor requirements whereas the internal fault level (that includes system
contribution) should be used for non-linear resistor calculations.
FIGURE 18 shows the general diagram when the P72x is used in three phase applications:
Application Guide P72x/EN AP/C21

MiCOM P721/P723 Page 21/52

FIGURE 18: THREE PHASE APPLICATIONS – P72X GENERAL DIAGRAM

Each discriminating zone relay and the check zone relay should have a contact configured to
raise an alarm whenever the time delayed supervision element is asserted.
FIGURE 19 to FIGURE 21 show how the P723 is implemented in three phase high
impedance differential protection applications using a 1 A connection.

P1 P2 P1 P2
A A
S1 S2 S1 S2
Protected
B B
plant

C C

49 R A 51 R B 53 R C
Protective
relays 50 v 52 v 54 v
R ST R ST R ST

P1519ENb

FIGURE 19: PHASE AND EARTH FAULT DIFFERENTIAL PROTECTION FOR

GENERATORS, MOTORS OR REACTORS
P72x/EN AP/C21 Application Guide

Page 22/52 MiCOM P721/P723

P1 P2 P2 P1
A
S2 S1 P2 P1
S1 S2 A
B
S2 S1
B
C

49 RA 51 RB 53 RC
Protective
relays 50 v 52 v 54 v
RST RST RST

P1525ENb

FIGURE 20: PHASE AND EARTH FAULT DIFFERENTIAL PROTECTION FOR AN AUTO-
TRANSFORMER WITH CTS AT THE NEUTRAL STAR POINT

P1 S1

P2 S2

A
B
C

P2 S2 P2 S2

P1 S1 P1 S1

A
B
C
49 R 51 RB 53 R
A C
Contacts from Protective v v v
buswire relays 50 52 54
supervision R ST R ST R ST
function in 55
the P72x RN Buswire
56 supervision
P1526ENd

FIGURE 21: A SIMPLE, SINGLE ZONE PHASE AND EARTH FAULT BUSBAR
PROTECTION SCHEME WITH BUSWIRE SUPERVISION
Application Guide P72x/EN AP/C21

MiCOM P721/P723 Page 23/52

3.3 Buswire supervision

For a high impedance differential scheme to function correctly, the CT and secondary AC
buswires must be in good condition. Any short circuit failure in these areas bypasses the
differential elements, leaving the equipment (transformer, busbar etc.) unprotected.
However, open circuit failures of the CTs or buswires cause a spill current to flow through the
differential element and operation occurs if this current is greater than the setting.
Two methods are used to prevent nuisance tripping due to open circuit conditions:

• Duplicate differential elements (discriminating and check zones) fed from separate
CTs. Tripping is only permitted when both differential elements operate. The
advantage of this scheme is that the differential settings can remain very sensitive
(below full load current values) but this requires a total duplication of the scheme. The
P72x used to protect the discriminating zone should have an input set as [87CZ] Chk
Zone. The P72x used as the Check Zone should have an output contact configured
as [87N] Diff or [87] Diff. This output contact should be wired to the input [87CZ] Chk
Zone in the P72x used to protect the discriminating zone. Only output contacts
configured as [87N] tDiff or [87] tDiff should be configured for tripping purposes
because the [87N] tDiff and [87] tDiff take into consideration the Check Zone. [87N]
Diff and [87] Diff do not consider the Check Zone, as shown in FIGURE 18.

• Buswire supervision elements are provided to monitor for a continuous low level of
spill current. After a time delay, this function would usually short circuit the AC
buswires to ensure stability and give an alarm. The disadvantage of this scheme is
that the differential elements must be set higher than the buswire supervision
elements (and usually above maximum load conditions) to avoid nuisance tripping.
This may create sensitivity issues. The supervision element should be time delayed to
prevent spurious operation during through fault conditions.
The above two methods are usually used in conjunction with each other, although to reduce
costs either scheme could be used independently. Phase segregated outputs are available
from the buswire supervision so that the protection can be “stabilized” on a per phase basis
by short circuiting the buswires as required. The [87N] tDiff and [87] tDiff are internally
blocked by the buswire supervision elements [95N] Sup and [95] Sup.
Even though the differential protection is prevented from operating, it is important to
short circuit the AC wires to prevent thermal damage to the scheme. This is
especially important when using the P79x to help with energy dissipation.
When using the P721 in busbar applications (three P721 would be required), configure the
buswire shorting contact as follows:

• Set one of the logic equations (in this example, equation A is being used) as:
EQUATION A
EQUATION A.00 operator ==
EQUATION A.00 operand = Buswire shorting
T Operate = 0.00 s
T Reset = 0.00 s

• Latch equation A
LATCH FUNCTIONS
Latch tEqu. A =1

• Assign tEqu.A to a normally closed contact:

OUTPUT RELAYS
tEqu.A = 0000000000000001
Logic output relay 2 =1
P72x/EN AP/C21 Application Guide

Page 24/52 MiCOM P721/P723

As shown in FIGURE 22, the buswire shorting is asserted when either the protection
trips or the buswire supervision element is asserted.

FIGURE 22: P72X – SINGLE PHASE APPLICATIONS - BUSWIRE SHORTING LOGIC

As shown in FIGURE 23, the high impedance path must be shorted under three possible
situations: when the protection trips, when the protection is out of service and when the
buswire supervision element is asserted. This is required to avoid unnecessary overheating
of the stabilizing resistor and varistor.
As shown in FIGURE 23, RL2 is used to short the high impedance differential path. RL2 is
asserted whenever the differential element trips or the buswire supervision element is
asserted.
In the P721, the watchdog normally open contact may be used to energize an auxiliary relay
as shown in FIGURE 23. A normally closed contact from the auxiliary relay is used to short
the high impedance path when the P721 is out of service. An additional contact from the
auxiliary relay is required to give an alarm to the SCADA system when the P721 is out of
service.

(+)

P721 N.O.
watchdog contact

Stabilising Aux-1
RL2 Aux
resistor

Varistor
(-)

P721

P4500ENa

FIGURE 23: P721 – HIGH IMPEDANCE PATH SHORTED

Application Guide P72x/EN AP/C21

MiCOM P721/P723 Page 25/52

NOTES: 1. The protection watchdog contact is normally open. It is closed

when the P721 is healthy. Therefore Aux-1 is closed when the
P721 is not healthy.
2. RL2 is a normally open contact. It closes when there is an ac
buswire failure or the differential element is asserted.
3. If the P79x is used, refer to the P79x manual for a detailed
description of this application.

When using the P723 in busbar applications, configure the buswire shorting contacts as
follows:

• Set three logic equations as follows:

EQUATION A
EQUATION A.00 operator ==
EQUATION A.00 operand = [95A] tSup
T Operate = 0.00 s
T Reset = 0.00 s
EQUATION B
EQUATION B.00 operator ==
EQUATION B.00 operand = [95B] tSup
T Operate = 0.00 s
T Reset = 0.00 s
EQUATION C
EQUATION C.00 operator ==
EQUATION C.00 operand = [95C] tSup
T Operate = 0.00 s
T Reset = 0.00 s

• Latch equation A
LATCH FUNCTIONS
Latch tEqu. A =1

• Latch equation B
LATCH FUNCTIONS
Latch tEqu. B =1

• Latch equation C
LATCH FUNCTIONS
Latch tEqu. C =1

• Assign tEqu.A, tEqu.B and tEqu.C to normally open contacts:

OUTPUT RELAYS
tEqu.A = 0000000000000001
Logic output relay 4 =1
tEqu.B = 0000000000000010
P72x/EN AP/C21 Application Guide

Page 26/52 MiCOM P721/P723

Logic output relay 5 =1

tEqu.C = 0000000000000100
Logic output relay 6 =1
As shown in FIGURE 24, the buswire shorting is asserted when either the protection
trips or the buswire supervision element is asserted.

[87] tDIFF

[95A] tSUP OR Buswire Shorting

[95B] tSUP OR [95] tSUP

[95C] tSUP
P4501ENa

FIGURE 24: P723 – THREE PHASE APPLICATIONS - BUSWIRE SHORTING LOGIC

As shown in FIGURE 25, the high impedance path must be shorted under three possible
situations: when the protection trips, when the protection is out of service and when the
buswire supervision element is asserted. This is required to avoid unnecessary overheating
of the stabilizing resistor and varistor.
The high impedance path must be shorted when the protection trips. This can be done using
normally open contacts from the 86 relay as shown in FIGURE 25.
In the P723, the watchdog normally open contact may be used to energize an auxiliary relay
as shown in FIGURE 25. The normally closed contacts from the auxiliary relay are used to
short the high impedance path when the P723 is out of service. An additional contact from
the auxiliary relay is required to give an alarm to the SCADA system when the P723 is out of
service.
Application Guide P72x/EN AP/C21

MiCOM P721/P723 Page 27/52

The high impedance path should also be shorted when the buswire supervision asserts.
This can be done using normally open contacts configured as explained previously. This is
also shown in FIGURE 25.

(+) Vdc (+) Vdc

P723 N.O. P723 RL1

watchdog Differential trip
contact

Aux 86

(-) Vdc (-) Vdc

Stabilising RL4 Aux - 1 86-1 Stabilising RL5 Aux - 2 86-2 Stabilising RL6 Aux - 3 86-3
resistor resistor resistor

Varistor Varistor Varistor

P723 P723 P723

Phase A Phase B Phase C

P4502ENa

FIGURE 25: P723 – HIGH IMPEDANCE PATH SHORTED

NOTES: 1 The protection watchdog contact is normally open. It is closed

when the P723 is healthy. Therefore, Aux-1, Aux-2 and Aux-3 are
closed when the P723 is not healthy.
2 RL4, RL5 and RL6 are normally open contacts. They will close
when there is an ac buswire failure in phases A, B and C
respectively.
3 RL1 is a normally open contact. It closes when the relay trips,
energizing the 86.
4 If the P79x is used, refer to the P79x manual for a detailed
description of this application.
P72x/EN AP/C21 Application Guide

Page 28/52 MiCOM P721/P723

3.4 Circuit breaker failure

The P72x has one circuit breaker failure function. The current considered by the CBF
function is the differential current, therefore the current flowing through a particular circuit
breaker is not considered. If the CBF function in the P72x is asserted and the breaker is still
closed, the 86BF associated to that particular breaker should be energized. Meanwhile the
86BF associated to the other breakers should not be energized. This is done by wiring one
52a contact in the 86BF circuit of each breaker in the high impedance scheme. Consider the
single busbar scheme shown in FIGURE 26.

1 2

BK1 BK2

+ + + +
BUS

50BF-P72x 50BF-P72x 50BF-P72x 50BF-P72x

VTs
BK1- 52a BK2- 52a BK3- 52a BK4- 52a
BK3 BK4

86BF1 86BF2 86BF3 86BF4

- - - -
3 4

a) Single busbar b) 86BF-x circuits

P4496ENa

FIGURE 26: CIRCUIT BREAKER FAILURE APPLICATION

Application Guide P72x/EN AP/C21

MiCOM P721/P723 Page 29/52

4. SETTING EXAMPLES

4.1 Restricted earth fault application

4.1.1 Example 1
FIGURE 27 shows the application of a high impedance REF to protect the LV winding of a
power transformer.
In this example assume that the Input selection in the P721 is set to Voltage. Therefore, the
Stabilizing Resistor N needs to be set. The P721 calculates the relay operating current
using the set Voltage and Stabilizing Resistor N. Note that this current must be within the
setting range of [87N] Threshold I Diff. If the calculated relay operating current is not within
the range (0.01In-1In), then the warning led in the relay is asserted and the message
“Inconsistent V/R ratio” is displayed.

11kV
415V 1500/5A
A
R CT
B

RL RL
RL

Data R CT Restricted
Transformer: 1MVA Earth Fault
11kV/415V Protection
Dyn11, X=5%
Burdens: R CT = 0.3W RL
RL = 0.04W
P1527ENc

FIGURE 27: RESTRICTED EARTH FAULT PROTECTION ON A TRANSFORMER

4.1.1.1 Stability voltage calculation

The transformer full load current, IFLC, is:

1× 10 6
I FLC =
415 × 3
= 1391.2A
To calculate the stability voltage the maximum through fault level should be considered. The
maximum through fault level, ignoring the source impedance, IF, is:

I
I F = FLC
X TX
1391.2A
= = 27824A
0.05
Required relay stability voltage, VS, and assuming one CT saturated is:

VS = KI F (R CT + 2R L )

Assume that the Measurement Filter is set to Fourier. Then the graphic shown in FIGURE
28 should be used to determine the K factor and the operating time.
P72x/EN AP/C21 Application Guide

Page 30/52 MiCOM P721/P723

0.20 0.07
0.30 K average op. time
0.06

average op. time (s)

0.40
0.05
0.50
0.60 0.04
K

0.70 0.03
0.80 unstable
stable 0.02
0.90
1.00 0.01
1.10 0
0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16
Vk/Vs

FIGURE 28: VARIATION OF K AND THE AVERAGE OPERATING TIME AS A FUNCTION

OF VK/VS – REF APPLICATIONS - FOURIER MODE

Consider that an average operating time of 40 ms is appropriate, then the corresponding K

factor is 0.76 approximately and Vk/Vs is 4.

VS = KI F (R CT + 2R L )

= 0.76 × 27824x
5
(0.3 + 0.08 )
1500
= 26.78V
The knee point voltage of the CTs should be at least 4 times Vs so that an average operating
time of 40 ms is achieved.
4.1.1.2 Primary operating current calculation
The primary operating current should be between 10 and 60 % of the winding rated current.
Assuming that the relay effective setting or primary operating current for a solidly earthed
power transformer is approximately 30% of the full load current, we can calculate that a
setting of less than 1.391 A is required on the relay.

I FLC
relay effective setting = 0.3 ×
CTratio
1391.2A
= 0.3 × = 1.391A
300
4.1.1.3 Stabilising resistor calculation
Assuming that a setting of 0.5 A is selected, the stabilizing resistor RST required is:

VS 26.78
RST = = = 54.Ω
[87N] Threshold I Diff 0 .5
If the Input selection is set to Current, the [87N] Threshold I Diff should be set to 0.1In.
Since the Input selection is set to Voltage, the Stabilizing Resistor N setting should be set as
54 Ω and the [87N] Threshold V Diff as 26.8 V.
The P79x accessory may be used to provide the required stabilizing resistance. Option A
may be ordered and a stabilizing resistance of 55 Ω may be used. The [87N] Threshold I
Diff is kept as 0.5 A. The P79x thermal withstand should still be considered. Please refer to
the P79x manual and the P79x energy limit tool to determine the P79x suitability.
To achieve an average operating time of 40 ms, Vk/Vs should be 4 as shown in FIGURE 28.
Application Guide P72x/EN AP/C21

MiCOM P721/P723 Page 31/52

Kneepoint Voltage, VK = 4VS

= 4 × 26.78
= 108V
If the actual Vk is greater than 4 times Vs, the K factor increases. In this case Vs should be
recalculated considering the new K factor and using equation VS = KI F (R CT + 2R L ) . Note
that K can reach a maximum value of 1 approximately.
4.1.1.4 Current transformers
As previously stated the effective relay setting or primary operating current is
IP = N × (IS + nI e ) . By re-arranging this equation, the excitation current for each of the
current transformers at the relay stability voltage can be calculated:

IP
− IS
CT Magnetising current at stability voltage, I e ≤ N
n
1.391 − 0.5
≤
4
≤ 0.22A
In summary, the current transformers used for this application must have a kneepoint voltage
of 108 V or higher (note that maximum Vk/Vs that should be considered is 16 and the
maximum K factor is 1), with a secondary winding resistance of 0.3 Ω or lower and a
magnetizing current at 26.78 V of less than 0.22 A.
4.1.1.5 Non-linear resistors
If the peak voltage developed across the relay circuit under maximum internal fault
conditions exceeds 3000 V peak, a suitable non-linear resistor should be connected across
the relay and stabilizing resistor to protect the insulation of the CTs, relay and
interconnecting leads. To calculate the maximum fault voltage assuming no CT saturation,
use the following equation:

VF = I F' (R CT + 2R L + R ST + R r )

= 27824x
5
(0.3 + 0.08 + 54)
1500
= 92.75 × 54.38
= 5044V
Assuming that the CT is C100, the CT knee point voltage is100 V and the peak voltage can
be estimated as:

VP = 2 2VK (VF − VK )
= 2 2x100(5044 - 100 )
= 1989V
This value is below the peak voltage of 3000 V and therefore a non-linear resistor is not
required.
NOTE: The kneepoint voltage value used in the above formula should be the
actual voltage obtained from the CT magnetising characteristic and
not a calculated value.
P72x/EN AP/C21 Application Guide

Page 32/52 MiCOM P721/P723

4.1.1.6 Relay settings

The P72x differential element settings are as follows:

The trip command should be configured as Trip [87N] tDiff, so that relay output 1 is asserted
when the differential element operates:
Application Guide P72x/EN AP/C21

MiCOM P721/P723 Page 33/52

4.1.2 Example 2
FIGURE 29 shows the application of a high impedance REF to protect the LV winding of a
resistance earthed transformer.
In this example assume that the Input selection in the P721 is set to Current.

33 kV
11 kV 600/1

Data Transformer: 10 MVA

33 kV/11 kV
Dyn11, X = 10%

Burdens: RCT = 0.5 ohms

2RL = 0.7 ohms

6.3 ohms P1527ENd

FIGURE 29: RESTRICTED EARTH FAULT PROTECTION ON A TRANSFORMER

4.1.2.1 Stability voltage calculation

The transformer full load current, IFLC, is:

10 × 10 6
I FLC =
11× 10 3 × 3
= 525A
To calculate the stability voltage the maximum through fault level should be considered.
Ignoring the source impedance the maximum through fault level, IF, is:

I FLC
IF =
X TX
525A
= = 5249A
0.1
Required relay stability voltage, VS, and assuming one CT saturated is:

VS = KI F (R CT + 2R L )

Assume that the Measurement Filter is set to Fourier. Then the graphic shown in FIGURE
30 should be used to determine the K factor and the operating time.
P72x/EN AP/C21 Application Guide

Page 34/52 MiCOM P721/P723

0.20 0.07
0.30 K average op. time
0.06

average op. time (s)

0.40
0.05
0.50
0.60 0.04
K

0.70 0.03
0.80 unstable
stable 0.02
0.90
1.00 0.01
1.10 0
0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16
Vk/Vs

FIGURE 30: VARIATION OF K AND THE AVERAGE OPERATING TIME AS A FUNCTION

OF VK/VS – REF APPLICATIONS - FOURIER MODE

Consider that an average operating time of 40 ms is appropriate, then the corresponding K

factor is 0.76 approximately and Vk/Vs is 4.

VS = KI F (R CT + 2R L )

x (0.5 + 0.7 )
5249
= 0.76 ×
600
= 8V
4.1.2.2 Current transformers
Assuming that the CT is 5 VA 5P20, the knee point voltage can be calculated as:

VA
Vk = × ALF
In
5
= × 20
1
= 100 V
4.1.2.3 Stability voltage re-calculation
The knee point voltage of the CTs should be at least 4 times Vs so that an average operating
time of 40 ms is achieved:

VK 100
= = 12.5
VS 8

Since the knee point voltage is 12.5 times Vs, the differential element requires a K factor
equal to 1 approximately to remain stable during external faults as indicated in FIGURE 30.
Vs and Vk/Vs should be recalculated as follows:

VS = KI F (R CT + 2R L )

= 1×
5249
(0.5 + 0.7)
600
= 10.5V
VK 100
= = 9.5
VS 10.5

As shown in FIGURE 30, the differential element remains stable since Vk/Vs = 9.5 and K =
1. The average operating time is 28 ms as indicated in FIGURE 30.
Application Guide P72x/EN AP/C21

MiCOM P721/P723 Page 35/52

4.1.2.4 Primary operating current calculation

Assuming that the relay effective setting or primary operating current for a resistance earthed
power transformer should not exceed 10-25% of the minimum earth fault current, we can
calculate the relay effective setting as follows:

transformer impedance = Zpu × Zbase

2
kVbase × 1000
= Zpu ×
kVA base

= 0.1 ×
(11)2 × 1000
10000
= 1.21Ω
It is assumed that the transformer zero, positive and negative sequence impedances are
equal to 1.21 Ω and that the source is strong (source impedance is negligible).

11× 10 3 3
earth fault current = 0.25 × = 160 A
(3 × 1.21 + 6.3)
4.1.2.5 Relay setting calculation

The primary operating current is IP = N × (IS + nI e ) . According to the current transformer

magnetizing characteristic, at 10.5 V the excitation current is 0.01 A. By re-arranging the
equation, the relay setting can be calculated:

Primary Effective Operating current, IP = N × (IS + nIe )

IP 160
IS = − nI e = − 4 × 0.01 = 0.23 A
N 600
If the Input selection is set to Current, then the [87N] Threshold I Diff should be set to 0.28In.
4.1.2.6 Stabilising resistor calculation
The stabilizing resistor is calculated as follows:

VS 10.5
R ST = = = 45.6.Ω
IS 0.23

For this application a 47 Ω resistor, Schneider Electric part No. ZB9016 720, can be supplied
on request which can be adjusted to any value between 28.2 Ω and 47 Ω.
The P79x accessory may be used to provide the required stabilizing resistance. Option A
may be ordered and a stabilizing resistance of 55 Ω may be used. The [87N] Threshold I
Diff and primary operating current are recalculated as follows:

VS 10.5
IS = = = 0.2A
R ST 55

Primary Effective Operating current, IP = N × (IS + nI e ) = 600 × (0.2 + 4 × 0.01) = 144 A

The P79x thermal withstand should still be considered. Please refer to the P79x manual and
the P79x energy limit tool to determine the P79x suitability.
P72x/EN AP/C21 Application Guide

Page 36/52 MiCOM P721/P723

4.1.2.7 Non-linear resistor

If the peak voltage developed across the relay circuit under maximum internal fault
conditions exceeds 3000 V peak, a suitable non-linear resistor should be connected across
the relay and stabilizing resistor, to protect the insulation of the CTs, relay and
interconnecting leads. Using the following equation we can calculate the maximum fault
voltage assuming no CT saturation during the maximum internal fault:

VF = I F' (R CT + 2R L + R ST + R r )

=
5249
(0.5 + 0.7 + 38 )
600
= 343V
As indicated previously, the CT knee point voltage is100 V, then the peak voltage can be
estimated as:

VP = 2 2VK (VF − VK )
= 2 2x100(343 - 100 )
= 441V
This value is below the peak voltage of 3000 V and therefore a non-linear resistor is not
required.
NOTE: The kneepoint voltage value used in the above formula should be the
actual voltage obtained from the CT magnetising characteristic and
not a calculated value.
4.1.2.8 Relay Settings
If the stabilizing resistor (Schneider Electric part No. ZB9016 720) is used, the P72x
differential element settings are as follows:

If the 55 Ω resistor available in the P79x is used, then [87N] Threshold I Diff = 0.20 In.
Application Guide P72x/EN AP/C21

MiCOM P721/P723 Page 37/52

The trip command should be configured as Trip [87N] tDiff, so that relay output 1 is asserted
when the differential element operates:

4.2 Busbar applications

FIGURE 31 shows an application of the P72x for high impedance protection of a typical
132 kV double bus generating station, consisting of two 100 MVA generators and step-up
transformers, two bus-couplers and four overhead transmission lines. Each busbar is
sectionalized and therefore gives a requirement for four discriminating zones and one overall
check zone. Therefore, for this application five P72x relays are required. One P72x is
configured as the discriminating zone for each bus bar section and one P72x is configured
as the overall check zone.
Any circuit in FIGURE 31 may be transferred from one bar to the other by isolator switches.
Auxiliary contacts from the isolator must transfer the current transformers between the
zones. The relay trip output must also be switched to the appropriate zone. These auxiliary
switches should close before the main isolator closes and should open after the main isolator
opens to ensure stability during switching operation.

100MVA 15kV

100MVA 132/15kV

132kV

Main
reserve

P1520ENa

FIGURE 31: THREE PHASE AND EARTH FAULT PROTECTION OF A DOUBLE

BUSBAR GENERATING STATION
FIGURE 32 shows the switching configuration for any of the feeders or transformers given in
FIGURE 31: Only normally open auxiliary contacts a and b are needed in the CT secondary
circuit for switching purposes.
P72x/EN AP/C21 Application Guide

Page 38/52 MiCOM P721/P723

FIGURE 32: CURRENT TRANSFORMER SWITCHING CONFIGURATION

Likewise, the trip and blocking contacts from busbar 1 and busbar 2 high impedance
differential schemes should be switched according to the status of the isolators. In this case
normally closed and open auxiliary contacts are needed. Use normally open contacts in the
trip circuit, so the trip contact from the appropriate busbar scheme is allowed to trip the
breaker. In the closing circuit use normally closed contacts in parallel with the blocking
contact from the 86 relay. For example, if isolator a is open and b closed, the breaker should
trip due to the operation of 86-b2. The closed coil is blocked only when 86-b2 operates,
because the normally closed contact b is open. If 86-b1 operates, the closing circuit path is
kept uninterrupted because the normally closed contact a is closed.

FIGURE 33: TRIP AND CLOSE CIRCUITS

Application Guide P72x/EN AP/C21

MiCOM P721/P723 Page 39/52

For the purpose of this example it is assumed that all switchgear is rated for 3500 MVA and
solidly earthed. All circuits have the same CT ratio of 500/1A with a secondary winding
resistance of 0.7 Ω and the largest loop lead resistance is 2 Ω. Consider that the Input
selection in the P723 is set to Current.
4.2.1 Stability voltage calculation
The stability level of the busbar protection is governed by the maximum through fault level
which is assumed to be the switchgear rating. Even if the short circuit level in the system is
known, it is recommended to use the switchgear rating to calculate the setting. Using the
switchgear rating allows for any future expansion of the busbar:

Switchgear rating
Maximum through fault current, I F =
Voltage x 3
3500MVA
=
132kV × 3
= 15308A
Required relay stability voltage, VS, and assuming one CT saturated is:

VS = KI F (R CT + 2R L )

If the Measurement Filter is set to Fourier, use FIGURE 34 to determine the K factor and the
operating time.

0.00 0.045
K average op. time 0.04
0.20

average op. time (s)

0.035
0.40 0.03
0.025
0.60
K

0.02
0.80 0.015
0.01
1.00
0.005
1.20 0
0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16
Vk/Vs
FIGURE 34: VARIATION OF K AND THE AVERAGE OPERATING TIME AS A FUNCTION
OF VK/VS – BUSBAR APPLICATIONS - FOURIER MODE
Consider that an average operating time of 30 ms is appropriate, then the corresponding K
factor is 0.89 approximately and Vk/Vs is 4.
VS = KI F (R CT + 2R L )

× (0.7 + 2)
15308
= 0.89 ×
500
= 74 V
P72x/EN AP/C21 Application Guide

Page 40/52 MiCOM P721/P723

4.2.2 Current transformers

Assuming that the CT is a 30 VA 5P20, the knee point voltage can be calculated as:
VA
Vk = × ALF
In
30
= × 20
1
= 600 V
The CTs knee point voltage should be at least 4 times Vs so that an average operating time
of 30 ms is achieved:
VK 600
= = 8.1 , since Vk/Vs = 8.1, a K factor equal to 0.89 should not used because the
VS 74
protection will not be stable. From FIGURE 34, If Vk/Vs = 8.1, then K is equal to 0.98. As a
result, Vs and Vk/Vs should be recalculated as follows:
VS = KI F (R CT + 2R L )

× (0.7 + 2 )
15308
= 0.98 ×
500
= 81V
VK 600
= = 7.4 , from FIGURE 34 when Vk/Vs is equal to 7.4, the K factor is 0.96
VS 81
approximately. Since the K factor used to recalculate Vs is higher than 0.96, the protection
will be stable. Therefore, a K factor equal to 0.98 is appropriate.
4.2.3 Discriminating zone - Primary operating current
The primary operating current should be made less than 30% of the minimum fault current
and more than the full load current of the largest incomer. Therefore if one of the incomer
CTs becomes open circuit, the differential protection will not maloperate. It is assumed that
30% of the minimum fault current is more than the full load current of the largest circuit.
As stated before, the primary operating current should be above the full load current of the
largest incomer. It is important to consider that the primary operating current should not be
increased too much, because this will sacrifice some speed, and in any case, stability is
maintained by the check feature.

100MVA
Full Load current, I FLC =
132kV 3
= 437.4A
Now if we assume that the magnetizing current taken by each CT at 81 V is 0.072 A and the
relay current setting is 0.8 A, we can calculate the discriminating zone primary effective
operating current as:

Primary Effective Operating current, I P = CT Ratio (I r + nI e )

=
500
(0.8 + (5x0.072))
1
= 580A
= 132% of I FLC

Since the primary effective setting is greater than the full load current, we can say the relay
setting of 0.8 A is suitable for the discriminating zone.
Application Guide P72x/EN AP/C21

MiCOM P721/P723 Page 41/52

4.2.4 Check zone - Primary operating current calculation

For phase fault schemes, the check zone is set similarly to the discriminating zone. A set of
different current transformers from those used in the discriminating zone are required. No
CT switching is required, and no current transformers from the bus coupler or bus section
breakers are needed.
Using the same reasoning and assumptions as already used for the discriminating zone, we
can calculate for the check zone:

Primary Effective Operating current, I P = CT Ratio (I r + nI e )

=
500
(0.8 + (6x0.072))
1
= 616A
= 141% of I FLC

Since the primary effective setting is greater than the full load current, we can say that that
relay setting of 0.8 A is suitable for the check zone.

4.2.5 Stabilizing resistor calculation

The required value of stabilizing resistor, RST, is:

VS
R ST =
[87] Threshold I Diff
81
=
0.8
= 102Ω
For this application a 102 Ω resistor, Schneider Electric Part No. ZB9016 738, can be
supplied on request which can be adjusted to any value between 90 Ω and 150 Ω. Thus a
setting of 102 Ω is available.

It may be possible to use the P79x accessory with a stabilizing resistance of 82.5 Ω. Since
82.5 Ω is less than 102 Ω, the relay setting current must be modified. (The stability voltage
is fixed by the requirements of the scheme). In this case the [87] Threshold Idiff is calculated
as follows:

VS
[87] Threshold I Diff =
R ST
81
=
82.5
= 1A
If a 1 A setting still results in a primary operating current that does not exceed 30% of the
minimum fault current and that is not lower than the full load current of the largest incomer,
then the P79x accessory is adequate.
P72x/EN AP/C21 Application Guide

Page 42/52 MiCOM P721/P723

4.2.6 Non-linear resistor

If the peak voltage developed across the relay circuit under maximum internal fault
conditions exceeds 3000 V peak then a suitable non-linear resistor should be connected
across the relay and stabilizing resistor to protect the insulation of the CTs, relay and
interconnecting leads. The maximum fault voltage assuming no CT saturation is calculated
as follows:

VF = I F' (R CT + 2R L + R ST + R R )

= 15308x
1
(0.7 + 2 + 102 )
500
= 3206V
Based upon this and assuming that the CT kneepoint voltage is 300 V, we can estimate the
peak voltage as:

VP = 2 2VK (VF − VK )
= 2 2x600(3206 - 600 )
= 3537V
This value is above the peak voltage of 3000 V and therefore a non-linear resistor is
required. The non-linear resistor should be chosen based on the CT secondary rating,
maximum internal fault level and stability voltage. For this case the most appropriate
Metrosil type is 600A/S3/I/S802. This Metrosil consists of three discs connected
independently for this three phase application.
It may be possible to use the P79x accessory. Two non-linear resistors options are available
and they are defined according to the transient energy withstand. Consider the P79x
technical documentation and the P79x energy limit tool to determine the suitability of the
P79x.
NOTE: The kneepoint voltage value used in the above formula should be the
actual voltage obtained from the CT magnetising characteristic and
not a calculated value.

4.2.7 Busbar supervision

The supervision element should be set to operate when the primary current is 25 A or 10%
of the lowest circuit rating, whichever is greater. Assuming that 25 A is greater than 10% of
the smallest circuit current we can calculate the supervision setting as:

25A
Buswire supervisio n setting =
CT Ratio
= 0.05A
Therefore the [95] Threshold I Sup element should be set to 0.05 A with a time delay setting,
[95] Fault timer t Sup, of 3 s.
The [95] Measurement Filter should also be set to Fourier, since the [87] Measurement Filter
was set to Fourier. As the output contacts are latched, set the [95] Reset Timer tReset to 0.
Application Guide P72x/EN AP/C21

MiCOM P721/P723 Page 43/52

4.2.8 Relay Settings

The differential element (either check zone or discriminating zone) should be set as follows:

The buswire supervision element should be set as follows:

The trip command should be configured as Trip [87] tDiff, so that relay output 1 is asserted
when the differential element operates:
P72x/EN AP/C21 Application Guide

Page 44/52 MiCOM P721/P723

4.3 Motor / generator applications

The same calculation principles that apply for the three phase protection of busbars can be
applied to motors and generators, although special consideration of the fault current will be
required. For these applications, the machine contribution to an external fault should be
used in the stability voltage calculation and this can be significantly lower than the maximum
internal fault current that should be used in the non-linear resistor calculation. For motors
the starting current or locked rotor current value is usually used in the stability calculation
and this will lead to relatively small CT requirements. Often the most sensitive relay settings
are used and buswire supervision is rarely applied.
Application Guide P72x/EN AP/C21

MiCOM P721/P723 Page 45/52

5. SETTING GROUP SELECTION (P721 & P723 ONLY)

MiCOM P721 and P723 relays have two setting groups associated to the protection
functions named PROTECTION G1 and PROTECTION G2. Only one group is active.
Switching between the groups can be done using:

− The relay front panel interface (CONFIGURATION > GROUP SELECT >
SETTING GROUP 1 or 2),

− A dedicated logic input (AUTOMAT. CTRL > INPUT X > CHANGE SETTING)
where X is the chosen logic input,

− The communications port (refer to the Mapping Database for detailed information).

To avoid any false trip, the change of setting group is only carried out when no protection
function is running.
If a setting group change is received during any protection or automation function, it is stored
and executed after the last timer has elapsed.
The user can check which one of the active group is active looking under the OP
PARAMETERS menu.
The user can also assign the active group to an output relay. Using a normally open contact,
this means that:

− an open contact indicates that the active group is Group 1

− a closed contact indicates that the active group is Group 2

5.1 Change of setting group done by a digital input
The setting group can be changed by the activation of a digital input (on level).
Warning: if the digital input that has been assigned to the change of setting group operates
on level (low or high), it is not possible to change the setting group by remote communication
or the front panel.
5.2 Switch between active groups
When powering on the relay, the group selected (Group 1 or Group 2) corresponds to the
state of the logic input. This means:
A - With a Logic input configuration = 0
Group 1 = logic Input is not active
Group 2 = logic Input is active
If the programmed logic input is supplied with +V, the active group will be G1.
If the programmed logic input is not supplied with +V, the active group will be G2.
B - With a Logic input configuration = 1
Group 1 = logic Input is not active
Group 2 = logic Input is active
If the set logic input is energized with +V, the active group will be G2.
If the set logic input is not energized with +V, the active group will be G1.
P72x/EN AP/C21 Application Guide

Page 46/52 MiCOM P721/P723

5.3 Priority
When changing parameters through the front panel, the priority is given to the user that
takes local control of the relay when entering a password. Change of the setting group using
a remote command is not allowed while the password is active (5 minutes).

ORIGIN OF THE ORDER PRIORITY LEVEL

FRONT PANEL MAXIMUM
LOGIC INPUT MEDIUM
REMOTE COMMUNICATIONS MINIMUM
Application Guide P72x/EN AP/C21

MiCOM P721/P723 Page 47/52

6. MAINTENANCE MODE
This menu allows the user to verify the operation of the protection functions without actually
sending any external command (Tripping or signaling).
The maintenance mode can be selected using a logic input, control command (rear or front
port), or by front panel interface. The end of maintenance mode is done by logic input, by
control command or on the front panel interface time out (5 minutes) and by turning off the
power supply.

Maintenance Mode
YES

When this menu is activated (set to YES), the Alarm LED flashes and the alarm message
MAINTENANCE MODE appears on the display. In this case, all the output contacts are
blocked and no command can be issued to these contacts, even if a protection threshold
associated to one of these output contacts has been crossed.
(If a protection threshold is crossed, all associated LEDs will be ON, even the TRIP LED, if
the threshold is associated to RL1).

RELAYS 8765W4321
CMD 000000000

This window allows the user to verify the external wiring to the relay output contacts. To do
this, the user must assign a 1 to any of the output contacts, which will close the contact, and
the continuity of the wiring can be verified.

7. LOGIC EQUATIONS (P721 & P723)

The logic equations can be used to construct complex Boolean logic using the following
operators: AND NOT, OR NOT, AND, OR.
An example logic implementation using Equation A is shown below:

8. REAL TIME CLOCK SYNCHRONIZATION VIA OPTO-INPUTS

In modern protective schemes it is often desirable to synchronize the relay’s real time clock
so that events from different relays can be placed in chronological order. This can be done
using the communication interface connected to the substation control system or through an
opto-input. Any of the available opto-inputs on the P72x relay can be selected for
synchronization. Pulsing this input results in the real time clock snapping to the nearest
minute. The recommended pulse duration is 20 ms, to be repeated no more than once per
minute.
The following table shows an example of the time synchronization function and assumes a
time format of hh:mm:ss.

Time of “Sync. Pulse” Corrected Time

19:47:00.000 to 19:47:29.999 19:47:00.000
19:47:30.000 to 19:47:59.999 19:48:00.000
P72x/EN AP/C21 Application Guide

Page 48/52 MiCOM P721/P723

9. EVENT RECORDS
The relay records and time tags up to 250 events and stores them in a non-volatile (flash)
memory. This allows the system operator to analyze the sequence of events that occurred in
the relay after a particular power system condition, or switching sequence. When the
available space is used up, the new fault automatically overwrites the oldest fault.
The relay’s real time clock time tags each event with a resolution of 1 ms.
The user can view event records through the front panel interface, through the EIA (RS) 232
port, or remotely, through the rear EIA (RS) 485 port.

10. FAULT RECORDS

Each time any of the programmed thresholds are crossed, a fault record is created and
stored in memory. The fault record tags up to 25 faults and stores them in non-volatile (flash)
memory. This allows the system operator to identify and analyze network failures. When the
available memory space is used up, the new fault automatically overwrites the oldest fault.
To view actual fault records, select RECORD > Fault Record, which can display up to 25
stored records. These are records such as fault flags and fault measurements. The time
stamp in the fault record is more accurate than the corresponding time stamp in the event
record. This is because events are logged some time after the actual fault record happens.
The user can view event records through the front panel interface, through the EIA (RS) 232
port, or remotely, through the rear EIA (RS) 485 port.

11. INSTANTANEOUS RECORDER

Each time any of programmed thresholds are crossed, an instantaneous record is created
and displayed under RECORDS > Instantaneous.
The last five instantaneous records are displayed showing the number of faults, hour, date,
origin (crossing of 87N, 95N, 87 and 95 thresholds), duration, and if the crossing of the
threshold led to a trip or not.

12. DISTURBANCE RECORDER

The disturbance recorder has its own dedicated memory space. Up to 5 disturbance records
of 3 seconds duration each can be stored. When the available memory space is used up,
the new record automatically overwrites the oldest record.
Samples are taken 32 times per cycle.
Each disturbance record consists of analog and digital channels. The relevant CT ratios for
the analog channels are also extracted to enable scaling to primary quantities. The following
table shows the RECORD > Disturb Record menu.

SETTING RANGE
MENU TEXT STEP SIZE
MIN MAX

Disturb Record
Pre-Time 100 ms 3000 ms 100 ms
Post-Time 100 ms 3000 ms 100 ms
Disturb Rec Trig On Instantaneous On Trip
The total available disturbance recording time is 6.0 s (pre-trigger time plus post-trigger
time).
For example, using the default settings, if the pre-trigger time time is set to 100 ms and the
post–trigger time to 2.5 s, the total disturbance recording time is 2.6 s.
Application Guide P72x/EN AP/C21

MiCOM P721/P723 Page 49/52

13. CT REQUIREMENTS
The P72x CT requirements are indicated with respect to the Measurement Filter setting and
the application. The following CT requirements are for busbar and REF/BEF applications
considering the three measurement filter modes.
If the Measurement Filter is set to Fourier mode, the relay is tuned to operate with the
fundamental component of the differential current.
If the Measurement Filter is set to Sample mode, the relay operates when
Idiffpeak − peak
> setting .
2× 2
If the Measurement Filter is set to Fast sample mode, the relay operates when
Idiffins tan tan eous > 2 × 2 × setting .

The general stability voltage requirement is described by VS ≥ K × IF (2R L + R CT ) , which

expresses the required stability voltage setting (VS) in terms of an external fault (IF), burden
(2RL + RCT) and a stability factor (K).
The assumption that one CT is completely saturated for an external fault does not describe
what actually happens when asymmetric CT saturation occurs. The CT that saturates only
saturates during parts of each current wave form cycle. This means that the spill current
waveform seen by the differential element is highly non-sinusoidal. The sensitivity of the
relay element to non-sinusoidal spill waveforms for through faults is a function of the
Measurement Filter setting (Fourier, Sample and Fast sample mode), its operating speed,
the differential voltage or current settings (Threshold V Diff or Threshold I Diff) and the
wave shapes.
The Measurement Filter and the operating speed are factors that are inherent to the relay
design. Spill current wave shapes are related to the ratio of the CT kneepoint voltage (Vk) to
relay circuit impedance. The stability voltage setting, VS = Is R ST , is determined by the
current setting and the stabilizing resistor. The stability of the high impedance differential
relay during through faults is determined by the ratio VK/VS. Where VK is the CT knee point
voltage and VS is the stability voltage setting.
The relationship between the ratio VK/VS and the required stability factor K has been found to
be a general form for various relay designs that have undergone conjunctive testing by
Schneider Electric. It is the absolute values of VK/VS and K that vary in the relationship for
different relay designs. The relationship that has been found for the P72x, taking into
account the application and the Measurement Filter setting, are shown in the following
sections.
Once stability has been considered, the next performance factor to take into account is the
operating time for internal faults. The CT kneepoint voltage, as a multiple of the protection
stability voltage setting (VK/VS), governs the operating time of a differential relay element for
heavy internal faults with transiently offset fault current waveforms. Using the operating time
curves derived for the P72x, it is possible to identify the ratio VK/VS that is required to
achieve a desired average operating speed for internal faults.
The approach with older electromechanical high impedance relays was to use a universally
safe K factor of 1.0, but the older relays operated quickly with a lower Vk/Vs ratio
(Vk/Vs = 2.0). With more modern relays it is desirable to identify the optimum K factor for
stability, so that the required Vk/Vs ratio for stability and operating speed will not make CT
kneepoint voltage requirements worse than traditional requirements.
P72x/EN AP/C21 Application Guide

Page 50/52 MiCOM P721/P723

13.1 Restricted earth fault/Balanced earth fault (REF/BEF) applications

The operating characteristics shown in FIGURE 35, FIGURE 36 and FIGURE 37 are valid
when
5 ≤ X/R ≤ 120, 0.5 ≤I f ≤ 20, [87N] Threshold I Diff = 0.1In and [87] Fault timer tDiff = 0 s.
FIGURE 35 shows the CT requirements when the P72x is used in a REF/BEF application
and the Measurement Mode is set to Fourier. When VK/VS is 4, the average operating time
is 40 ms and K is approximately 0.8. The user should consider these characteristics when
selecting Vk/Vs, K factor and average operating time as has been explained in the previous
setting examples.
NOTE: For the P721 and the P723 (current inputs 55-56 and 47-48), the maximum internal
fault level threshold (for the 0.004 to 2In range) must not exceed 20In.
FIGURE 35 shows the CT requirements when the P72x is used in a REF/BEF application
and the Measurement Mode is set to Fourier. The maximum K factor is approximately 0.98.
The operating time when VK/VS = 4 is 41 ms and K is approximately 0.76.

0.20 0.07
0.30 K average op. time
0.06

average op. time (s)

0.40
0.05
0.50
0.60 0.04
K

0.70 0.03
0.80 unstable
stable 0.02
0.90
1.00 0.01
1.10 0
0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16
Vk/Vs

FIGURE 35: CT REQUIREMENTS- REF/BEF- FOURIER MODE

FIGURE 36 shows the CT requirements when the P72x is used in a REF/BEF application
and the Measurement Mode is set to Fast Sample. The maximum K factor is approximately
0.91. The operating time when VK/VS = 4 is 41 ms and K is approximately 0.76.

0.20 0.06
K average op. time
0.30
average op. time (s)

0.05
0.40
0.50 0.04
0.60 0.03
K

0.70 unstable
0.02
0.80
stable 0.01
0.90
1.00 0
0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16
Vk/Vs

FIGURE 36: CT REQUIREMENTS- REF/BEF- FAST SAMPLE MODE

Application Guide P72x/EN AP/C21

MiCOM P721/P723 Page 51/52

FIGURE 37 shows the CT requirements when the P72x is used in a REF/BEF application
and the Measurement Mode is set to Sample. The maximum K factor is approximately 0.91.
The operating time when VK/VS = 4 is 55 ms and K is approximately 0.76.

0.20 0.07
K average op. time
0.30 0.06

average op. time (s)

0.40 0.05
0.50
0.04
0.60
K

unstable 0.03
0.70
0.80 0.02
stable
0.90 0.01
1.00 0
0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16
Vk/Vs

FIGURE 37: CT REQUIREMENTS- REF/BEF- SAMPLE MODE

13.2 Busbar application

The operating characteristics shown in FIGURE 38, FIGURE 39 and FIGURE 40 are valid
when 5≤X/R≤ 120, 0.5≤If≤ 50 and [87N] Threshold I Diff = 0.1In.
FIGURE 38 shows the CT requirements when the P72x is used in a busbar application and
the Measurement Mode is set to Fourier. The maximum K factor is approximately 0.98.
When VK/VS is 4, the average operating time is 30 ms and K is approximately 0.89. The
user should consider these characteristics when selecting Vk/Vs, the K factor and the
average operating time as explained in the previous setting examples.

0.00 0.045
K average op. time 0.04
0.20
average op. time (s)

0.035
0.40 0.03
0.025
0.60
K

unstable 0.02
0.80 0.015
0.01
1.00 stable
0.005
1.20 0
0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16
Vk/Vs
FIGURE 38: CT REQUIREMENTS- BUSBAR - FOURIER MODE
P72x/EN AP/C21 Application Guide

Page 52/52 MiCOM P721/P723

FIGURE 39 shows the CT requirements when the P72x is used in a busbar application and
the Measurement Mode is set to Fast Sample. The maximum K factor is approximately 0.82.
When VK/VS is equal to 4, the average operating time is 34 ms and K is approximately 0.80.

0.40 0.06
K average op. time
0.50 0.05

average op. time (s)

0.60 0.04

0.70 0.03
K

unstable
0.80 0.02
stable
0.90 0.01

1.00 0
0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16
Vk/Vs
FIGURE 39: CT REQUIREMENTS- BUSBAR – FAST SAMPLE MODE
FIGURE 40 shows the CT requirements when the P72x is used in a busbar application and
the Measurement Mode is set to Sample. The maximum K factor is approximately 0.82.
When VK/VS is equal to 4, the average operating time is 53 ms and K is approximately 0.80.

0.00 0.06
0.10 K average op. time
0.05
0.20
average op. time (s)

0.30 0.04
0.40
0.03
K

0.50
unstable
0.60 0.02
0.70
0.01
0.80
stable
0.90 0
0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16
Vk/Vs
FIGURE 40: CT REQUIREMENTS- BUSBAR - SAMPLE MODE
Communication database P72x/EN CT/A11

MiCOM P721/P723

COMMUNICATION
DATABASE
P72x /EN CT/A11 Communication database

MiCOM P721/P723

BLANK PAGE
Communication database P72x/EN CT/A11

MiCOM P721/P723

MODBUS DATABASE
MiCOM P721/P723
VERSION V11
P72x/EN CT/A11 Communication database

Page 2/78 MiCOM P721/P723

BLANK PAGE
Communication database P72x/EN CT/A11

MiCOM P721/P723 Page 3/78

CONTENT

1. INTRODUCTION 5
1.1 Purpose of this document 5

2. MODBUS PROTOCOL 6
2.1 Technical characteristics of the MODBUS connection 6
2.1.1 Parameters of the MODBUS connection 6
2.2 Synchronisation of exchanges messages 6
2.3 Message validity check 6
2.4 Address of the MiCOM relays 6
2.5 MODBUS functions of the MiCOM relays 7
2.6 Presentation of the MODBUS protocol 7
2.6.1 Frame size received by the protection device (slave) 7
2.6.2 Format of frames sent by the MiCOM relays 8
2.6.3 Messages validity check 8

3. MiCOM P721 AND P723 RELAY DATABASE ORGANISATION 9

3.1 Description of the application mapping 9
3.1.1 Settings 9
3.2 Page 0h – Product information, remote signalling and measurements 9
3.3 Page 1h – General remote parameters (part 1) 12
3.4 Page 2h –Setting group 1 remote parameters 16
3.5 Page 3h – Setting group 2 remote parameters 17
3.6 Page 4h –Access in writing 17
3.7 Page 5h – Boolean equations remote parameters 18
3.8 Page 6h – General remote parameters (part 2) 22
3.9 Page 7h – Remote device status 22
3.10 Page 8h –Remote data and time 22
3.11 Pages 9h to 21h – Disturbance record data 23
3.11.1 Meaning of each value channel 24
3.11.2 Calculation formula for phase current values 24
3.11.3 Calculation formula for earth current values 24
3.11.4 Logic channels 24
3.12 Page 22h – Disturbance record index frame 24
3.13 Page 35h 25
3.14 Page 36h – Event older record data 27
3.15 Page 37h – Fault record value data 28
3.15.1 Calculation formula for phase current values 28
3.15.2 Calculation formula for earth current values 28
3.16 Page 3Eh – Fault older record data 28
P72x/EN CT/A11 Communication database

Page 4/78 MiCOM P721/P723

3.17 Pages 38h to 3Ch – Disturbance record and channel selection 29

3.17.1 Disturbance record and channel selection (13 words) 29
3.17.2 Calculation formula for phase current values 30
3.17.3 Calculation formula for earth current values 30
3.18 Pages 3Dh – Disturbance records number available 30

4. DESCRIPTION OF THE MAPPING FORMAT 32

4.1 Disturbance record additional information 44
4.1.1 MODBUS request definition used for disturbance record 44
4.1.2 Request to know the number of disturbance records in SRAM 44
4.1.3 Service requests 44
4.1.4 Disturbance record upload request 45
4.1.5 Index frame upload request 45
4.1.6 Request to retrieve the oldest non-acknowledge event 45
4.1.7 Request to retrieve a dedicated event 45
4.1.8 Modbus request definition used to retrieve the fault records 46
4.1.9 Request to retrieve the oldest non-acknowledge fault record 46
4.1.10 Request to retrieve a dedicated fault record 46
Communication database P72x/EN CT/A11

MiCOM P721/P723 Page 5/78

1. INTRODUCTION
1.1 Purpose of this document
This document describes the characteristics of the different communication protocol of
MiCOM P721 and P723 relays.
The available communication protocols on the relay are listed below:

− MODBUS,

− IEC 60870-5-103,

− DNP3
The K-BUS/Courier is not available with the P72x relays.
P72x/EN CT/A11 Communication database

Page 6/78 MiCOM P721/P723

2. MODBUS PROTOCOL
MiCOM P721 and P723 relays can communicate by a RS 485 link behind the unit following
the MODBUS RTU protocol.
2.1 Technical characteristics of the MODBUS connection
2.1.1 Parameters of the MODBUS connection
The different parameters of the MODBUS connection are as follows:

− Isolated two-point RS485 connection (2kV 50Hz),

− MODBUS line protocol in RTU mode

Communication speed can be configured by an operator dialog in the front panel of the relay:

Baud rate (dec)

300
600
1200
2400
4800
9600
19200
38400

Transmission mode of the configured characters by operator dialog

Mode
1 start / 8 bits / 1 stop: total 10 bits
1 start / 8 bits / even parity / 1 stop: total 11 bits
1 start / 8 bits / odd parity / 1 stop: total 11 bits
1 start / 8 bits / 2 stop: total 11 bits

2.2 Synchronisation of exchanges messages

A character received after a silence (≥ 3 characters transmission time) is considered as a

frame start.
2.3 Message validity check
The validation of a frame is performed with a 16-bit Cyclical Redundancy Check (CRC).
Generator polynomial: 1+x²+x15+x16 = 1010 0000 0000 0001 (binary) = A001 (hexadecimal)
2.4 Address of the MiCOM relays
The address of the MiCOM relay on a same MODBUS network is situated between 1 and
255. The address 0 is reserved for the broadcast messages
Communication database P72x/EN CT/A11

MiCOM P721/P723 Page 7/78

2.5 MODBUS functions of the MiCOM relays

Protection device data may be read or modified by using function codes. Following are the
available function codes. Function codes to read from or write into parameter cells in the
protection device are described in the listed following table.

Function Nr. Data Read Data Write Data Format & Type

1 X N bits
2 X N bits
3 X N words
4 X N words
5 X 1 bit
6 X 1 word
7 Fast 8 bits
8 X Diagnostics counter
11 X Event counter
15 X N bits
16 X N words

2.6 Presentation of the MODBUS protocol

Master slave protocol, all exchange understands a master query and a slave response
Frame size received from MiCOM P721 and P723 relays.
2.6.1 Frame size received by the protection device (slave)
Frame transmitted by the master ( query):

Slave number Function code Information CRC16

1 byte 1 byte n bytes 2 bytes
0 à FFh 1 à 10h

Slave number:
The slave number is situated between 1 and 255.
A frame transmitted with a slave number 0 is globally addressed to all pieces of equipment
(broadcast frame)
Error code:
The MiCOM P72x relays manages the two following error codes:
• Code 01: the function code is not authorised or is unknown.

• Code 03: one of the following value from the data field is incorrect:

− control of data being read,

− control of data being written,
− control of data address,
− length of request for data message.
CRC16:
Value of the CRC16 calculated by the master.
NOTE: The MiCOM relay does not respond to globally broadcast frames sent
out by the master.
P72x/EN CT/A11 Communication database

Page 8/78 MiCOM P721/P723

2.6.2 Format of frames sent by the MiCOM relays

Frame sent by the MiCOM relay (response)

Slave number Function code Data CRC16

1 byte 1 byte n bytes 2 bytes
1 à FFh 1 à 10h

Slave number:
The slave number is situated between 1 and 255.
Function code:
Processed MODBUS function (1 to 16).
Data:
Contains reply data to master query .
CRC 16:
Value of the CRC 16 calculated by the slave.
2.6.3 Messages validity check
When MiCOM P721 and P723 relays receive a master query, it validates the frame:

− If the CRC is false, the frame is invalid. MiCOM 721 and P723 relays do not reply to the
query. The master must retransmit its query. Excepting a broadcast message, this is the
only case of non-reply by MiCOM P721 and P723 relays to a master query.

− If the CRC is good but the MiCOM relay can not process the query, it sends an
exception response.
Warning frame sent by the MiCOM relay (response)

Slave number Function code Warning code CRC16

1 byte 1 byte 1 byte 2 bytes
1 to FFh 81h or 83h or 8Ah or 8Bh pf ... PF

Slave number:
The slave number is situated between 1 and 255.
Function code:
The function code returned by the MiCOM relay in the warning frame is the code in which the
most significant bit (b7) is forced to 1.
Warning code:
On the 8 warning codes of the MODBUS protocol, the MiCOM relay manages two of them:

• code 01: function code unauthorised or unknown.

• code 03: a value in the data field is unauthorised ( incorrect data ).

− Control of pages being read

− Control of pages being written
− Control of addresses in pages
− Length of request messages
CRC16:
Value of the CRC16 calculated by the slave.
Communication database P72x/EN CT/A11

MiCOM P721/P723 Page 9/78

3. MiCOM P721 AND P723 RELAY DATABASE ORGANISATION

3.1 Description of the application mapping
3.1.1 Settings
MiCOM P721 and P723 application mapping has 7 pages of parameters.
Parameters are organized in pages.
The characteristics are the following:

Page Data type Read Write

permission permission
0h Product information, remote signalling, Through
measurements communication
1h General remote parameters (part 1) X X
2h Setting group 1 remote parameters X X
3h Setting group 2 remote parameters X X
4h Remote controls X X
5h Boolean equations remote parameters X X
6h General remote parameters (part 2) X X
7h Remote device status Fast
8h Remote data and time X X

They are completely listed below.

3.2 Page 0h – Product information, remote signalling and measurements
Read access only
Read access only.
Legend: Reserved: Free for future use
Obsolete: Do not use (reserved for old versions)

Values Form Fault

Address Group Description Step Unit Range
range at Value
0000 Relay Device description "00" – F10
Information characters 1 and 2: "ZZ" "P7"
0001 Device description "00" – F10
characters 3 and 4: "ZZ"
Device P721 "21"
Device P723 "23"
0002 Device description "00" – F10
characters 5 and 6: "ZZ"
" "
0003 Unit reference "00" – F10 "AL"
characters 1 and 2 "ZZ"
0004 Unit reference "00" – F10 "ST"
characters 3 and 4 "ZZ"
0005 Software version 100 – 999 1 F21
0006 Front/rear communication 0–3 1 F41
0007 Internal phase ratio 1 F1 3277
0008 Internal earth ratio 1 F1 16350
0009 Info General Start (only if 0–1 1 F1
IEC 60870-5-103
protocol)
000A – Reserved
000B
P72x/EN CT/A11 Communication database

Page 10/78 MiCOM P721/P723

Values Form Fault

Address Group Description Step Unit Range
range at Value
000C LED Status Binary 1 F73 8h
(health
y)
000D Real Active Setting 1–2 1 F51
Group (after taking into
account the protection
flags)
000E Password active ? 0–1 1 F24 0 (no)
000F Material alarm status Binary 1 F45 0 (no
warning
)
0010 Remote Logical inputs status Binary 1 F12 0 (no
signalling input)
0011 Logic output relay status Binary 1 F13 10h
(WD)
0012– logical inputs data Binary 1 F20
0013 signalisation
0014 Trip status 0–3 1 F22 0
0015– Reserved
0016
0017 Information of [87] CZ Binary 1 F17 0
status
0018 Information of [95] SUP Binary 1 F17 0
status
0019 Information of [87] DIFF Binary 1 F17 0
status
001A Information of [95N] SUP Binary 1 F16 0
status
001B Information of [87N] DIFF Binary 1 F16 0
status
001C– Information of general Binary 1 F38 0
001D instantaneous status
001E Information of equation Binary 1 F61 0
status
001F Reserved
0020 Alarms Memorisation of [95] SUP Binary 1 F17 0
memorised non acknowledged
alarms
0021 Memorisation of [87] Binary 1 F17 0
DIFF non acknowledged
alarms
0022 Reserved
0023 Memorisation of [95] Binary 1 F17 0
tSUP non acknowledged
alarms
0024 Memorisation of [87] Binary 1 F17 0
tDIFF non acknowledged
alarms
0025 Reserved
0026– Memorised flag for non Binary 1 F36 0
0028 acknowledged alarms
0029 Number of disturbance 0–5 1 F1 0
records available
002A Tripping origin 0 – 26 1 F78 0
002B Memorised logic output Binary 1 F13 0
relay latched
002C– Reserved
002E
Communication database P72x/EN CT/A11

MiCOM P721/P723 Page 11/78

Values Form Fault

Address Group Description Step Unit Range
range at Value
002F measure- Frequency 4500 – 1 10 mHz F1 9999
ments 6500
9999 if out
0030–0031 Phase A RMS value 0 – 600 1 10 mA F18 0
000
0032–0033 Phase B RMS value 0 – 600 1 10 mA F18 0
000
0034–0035 Phase C RMS value 0 – 600 1 10 mA F18 0
000
0036 – Earth RMS value 0 – 120 1 10 mA F18 0
0037 000
0038 – Phase A maximum RMS 0 – 600 1 10 mA F18 0
0039 value 000
003A – Phase B maximum RMS 0 – 600 1 10 mA F18 0
003B value 000
003C– Phase C maximum RMS 0 – 600 1 10 mA F18 0
003D value 000
003E – Earth maximum RMS 0 – 120 1 10 mA F18 0
003F value 000
0040– Reserved
004F
0050 Amplitudes for Phase A Amplitude value In / F1
sample of TC secondary (CAN Add.
protection format) 0007h
0051 Phase B Amplitude value In / F1
of TC secondary (CAN Add.
format) 0007h
0052 Phase C Amplitude value In / F1
of TC secondary (CAN Add.
format) 0007h
0053 Earth Amplitude value of In / F1
TC secondary (CAN Add.
format) 0008h
0054 Amplitudes for Phase A Amplitude value In / F1
fast sample of TC secondary (CAN Add.
protection format) 0007h
0055 Phase B Amplitude value In / F1
of TC secondary (CAN Add.
format) 0007h
0056 Phase C Amplitude value In / F1
of TC secondary (CAN Add.
format) 0007h
0057 Earth Amplitude value of In / F1
TC secondary (CAN Add.
format) 0008h
0058 Amplitudes for Phase A Amplitude value In / F1
Fourier of TC secondary (CAN Add.
protection format) 0007h
0059 Phase B Amplitude value In / F1
of TC secondary (CAN Add.
format) 0007h
005A Phase C Amplitude value In / F1
of TC secondary (CAN Add.
format) 0007h
005B Earth Amplitude value of In / F1
TC secondary (CAN Add.
format) 0008h
005C– Reserved
00DF
P72x/EN CT/A11 Communication database

Page 12/78 MiCOM P721/P723

Values Form Fault

Address Group Description Step Unit Range
range at Value
00E0– HMI screen Copy of the HMI screen ASCII 16 x
00EF code F10
00F0– Reserved
00FF

3.3 Page 1h – General remote parameters (part 1)

Read and write access
Values Fault
Address Group Description Step Unit Format Range
range Value
0100 Remote Address of front port 1 – 255 1 F1 1
settings
0101 HMI language 0 – 13 F63
0102 Password characters 1 "00" – "ZZ" F10 AA
and 2
0103 Password characters 3 "00" – "ZZ" F10 AA
and 4
0104 Frequency 50 – 60 10 Hz F1 50
0105 Display Phases label 0-2 F26 0
0106 Earth label 0-2 F26 0
0107–0109 reserved
010A User reference "00" – "ZZ" F10 AL
characters 1 and 2
010B User reference "00" – "ZZ" F10 ST
characters 3 and 4
010C Reserved
010D Logical input Configuration of logical Binary 1 F11 FFFFh
inputs active
010E Reserved
010F AC/DC voltage Type 0–1 1 F50 0 (DC)
applied to the logical
inputs
0110– Reserved
011F
0120 Connection Primary phase CT value 1 – 50000 1 A F1 1000
0121 Secondary phase CT 1–5 4 A F1 1
value
0122 Primary earth CT value 1 – 50000 1 A F1 1000
0123 Secondary earth CT 1–5 4 A F1 1
value
0124 Differential protection 0–1 1 F79 0 (Earth)
type
0125 Analogue input unit mode 0–1 1 F75 0 (Amp.)
0126 Stabilizing Resistor 300 – 1 Ohm/1 F1 300
Phase A 40000 0
0127 Stabilizing Resistor 300 – 1 Ohm/1 F1 300
Phase B 40000 0
0128 Stabilizing Resistor 300 – 1 Ohm/1 F1 300
Phase C 40000 0
0129 Stabilizing Resistor Earth 300 – 1 Ohm/1 F1 300
40000 0
012A– Reserved
012B
012C Output relays Local maintenance mode 0 – 1 1 F24 0 (no)
?
012D Relays latching Binary 1 F14 0 (no
conf.)
012E Fail safe and inversion Binary 1 F60 0 (no
relays conf.)
012F Reserved
Communication database P72x/EN CT/A11

MiCOM P721/P723 Page 13/78

Values Fault
Address Group Description Step Unit Format Range
range Value
0130 Rear port Baud rate 0–7 1 F4 6 (19200
communi-cation Bd)
0131 Parity 0–2 1 F5 0
(without)
0132 Data bits 0–1 1 F28 1 (8 bits)
0133 Stop bit 0–1 1 F29 0 (1 bit)
0134 Communication available 0–1 1 F24 1 (yes)
?
0135 Date Format 0–1 1 F48 0
(Private)
0136 Reserved
0137 Address of rear port:
Modbus 1 – 255 1
Courier 1 – 255 255
IEC870-5-103 1 – 255 1
DNP3 1 – 59999 1
0138 IEC870-5-103 only : 0-2 1 F80 2 (All)
Spontaneous event
enabling
0139 IEC870-5-103 only : 0-1 1 F24 0
Commands blocking
013A IEC870-5-103 only : 0-1 1 F24 0
Signals & measurements
blocking
013B IEC870-5-103 only : 0-3 1 F81 3 (ASDU
measurements enabling 3.4 & 9)
013C– Reserved 0
013F
0140 Config. setting Setting group 1–2 1 F51 1 (Group
group 1)
0141 Configuration of change 0–1 1 F47 0 (Menu)
of group selection
0142 Reserved
0143 Conf. alarms Validation of 0–1 1 F24 0 (no)
instantaneous alarms
auto reset ?
0144 Configuration of alarm 0–1 1 F24 0 (no)
reset on fault ?
0145 Inhibition of alarms Binary 1 F59 0Ch
(tAux3 &
tAux4)
0146– Reserved
014F
0150 – Conf. LED LED 5 Binary 1 F19 0 (no
0153 conf.)
0154– LED 6 Binary 1 F19 0 (no
0157 conf.)
0158– LED 7 Binary 1 F19 0 (no
015B conf.)
015C– LED 8 Binary 1 F19 0 (no
015F conf.)
0160– Logical input Logical input 1 Binary 1 F20 0 (no
0161 allocation conf.)
0162– Reserved
0163
0164– Logical input 2 Binary 1 F20 0 (no
0165 conf.)
0166– Reserved
0167
P72x/EN CT/A11 Communication database

Page 14/78 MiCOM P721/P723

Values Fault
Address Group Description Step Unit Format Range
range Value
0168– Logical input 3 Binary 1 F20 0 (no
0169 conf.)
016A– Reserved
016B
016C– Logical input 4 Binary 1 F20 0 (no
016D conf.)
016 – Reserved
016F
0170– Logical input 5 Binary 1 F20 0 (no
0171 conf.)
0172 – reserved
0173
0174 – reserved
017B
017C Auxiliary input 1 timer 0 – 20000 1 10 ms F1 0
017D Auxiliary input 2 timer 0 – 20000 1 10 ms F1 0
017E Auxiliary input 3 timer 0 – 20000 1 10 ms F1 0
017F Auxiliary input 4 timer 0 – 20000 1 10 ms F1 0
0180 Output relay Trip Binary 1 F14 0 (no
allocation conf.)
0181 [87] DIFF Binary 1 F14 0 (no
conf.)
0182 [87] tDIFF Binary 1 F14 0 (no
conf.)
0183 [87CZ] check zone Binary 1 F14 0 (no
conf.)
0184 Buswire shorting Binary 1 F14 0 (no
conf.)
0185 reserved
0186 [95] SUP Binary 1 F14 0 (no
conf.)
0187 [95] tSUP Binary 1 F14 0 (no
conf.)
0188 [95A] tSUP Binary 1 F14 0 (no
conf.)
0189 [95B] tSUP Binary 1 F14 0 (no
conf.)
018A [95C] tSUP Binary 1 F14 0 (no
conf.)
018B– reserved
018D
018E [87N] DIFF Binary 1 F14 0 (no
conf.)
018F [87N] tDIFF Binary 1 F14 0 (no
conf.)
0190 [95N] SUP Binary 1 F14 0 (no
conf.)
0191 [95N] tSUP Binary 1 F14 0 (no
conf.)
0192– reserved
0193
0194 tAux 1 Binary 1 F14 0 (no
conf.)
0195 tAux 2 Binary 1 F14 0 (no
conf.)
0196 tAux 3 Binary 1 F14 0 (no
conf.)
0197 tAux 4 Binary 1 F14 0 (no
conf.)
Communication database P72x/EN CT/A11

MiCOM P721/P723 Page 15/78

Values Fault
Address Group Description Step Unit Format Range
range Value
0198 tEquation A Binary 1 F14 0 (no
conf.)
0199 tEquation B Binary 1 F14 0 (no
conf.)
019A tEquation C Binary 1 F14 0 (no
conf.)
019B tEquation D Binary 1 F14 0 (no
conf.)
019C tEquation E Binary 1 F14 0 (no
conf.)
019D tEquation F Binary 1 F14 0 (no
conf.)
019E tEquation G Binary 1 F14 0 (no
conf.)
019F tEquation H Binary 1 F14 0 (no
conf.)
01A0 Logical input 1 Binary 1 F14 0 (no
(energized) conf.)
01A1 Logical input 2 Binary 1 F14 0 (no
(energized) conf.)
01A2 Logical input 3 Binary 1 F14 0 (no
(energized) conf.)
01A3 Logical input 4 Binary 1 F14 0 (no
(energized) conf.)
01A4 Logical input 5 Binary 1 F14 0 (no
(energized) conf.)
01A5– Reserved
01A6
01A7 CB failure (50BF) Binary 1 F14 0 (no
conf.)
01A8 Active setting group 2 Binary 1 F14 0 (no
conf.)
01A9 Control trip (from Binary 1 F14 0 (no
communication) conf.)
01AA– Reserved
01AD
01AE Automatism Reserved
01AF CB Operating time 10 – 500 1 10 ms F1 10
01B0– Trip command Binary 1 F6 0 (no
01B1 conf.)
01B2– Trip function latching Binary 1 F6 0 (no
01B3 conf.)
01B4– Blocking logic Blocking logic 1 Binary 1 F8 0 (no
01B5 conf.)
01B6– Blocking logic 2 Binary 1 F8 0 (no
01B7 conf.)
01B8– Reserved
01BF
01C0 Default record Default number to be 1 – 25 1 F1 25
displayed (newest)
01C1 Instantaneous fault 1–5 1 F1 5
number to be displayed (newest)
01C2– Reserved
01C4
01C5 Disturbance Pre-time 10 – 300 1 10 ms F1 100
record
01C6 Post-time 10 – 300 1 10 ms F1 200
01C7 Disturbance starting 0–1 1 F32 0 (inst.)
condition
P72x/EN CT/A11 Communication database

Page 16/78 MiCOM P721/P723

Values Fault
Address Group Description Step Unit Format Range
range Value
01C8– Reserved
01CF
01D0 CB failure CB failure function ? 0-1 1 F24 0 (no)
[50BF]
01D1 Idiff< CB failure 1 – 100 1 In/100 F1 10
01D2 tBF 3 – 1000 1 10 ms F1 10
01D3 Vdiff< CB failure 5 – 2000 10 100 F1 50
mV
01D4– Reserved
01DF
01E0 Equation timer Equation A rising tempo 0 – 60000 1 10 ms F1 0
01E1 Equation A falling tempo 0 – 60000 1 10 ms F1 0
01E2 Equation B rising tempo 0 – 60000 1 10 ms F1 0
01E3 Equation B falling tempo 0 – 60000 1 10 ms F1 0
01E4 Equation C rising tempo 0 – 60000 1 10 ms F1 0
01E5 Equation C falling tempo 0 – 60000 1 10 ms F1 0
01E6 Equation D rising tempo 0 – 60000 1 10 ms F1 0
01E7 Equation D falling tempo 0 – 60000 1 10 ms F1 0
01E8 Equation E rising tempo 0 – 60000 1 10 ms F1 0
01E9 Equation E falling tempo 0 – 60000 1 10 ms F1 0
01EA Equation F rising tempo 0 – 60000 1 10 ms F1 0
01EB Equation F falling tempo 0 – 60000 1 10 ms F1 0
01EC Equation G rising tempo 0 – 60000 1 10 ms F1 0
01ED Equation G falling tempo 0 – 60000 1 10 ms F1 0
01EE Equation H rising tempo 0 – 60000 1 10 ms F1 0
01EF Equation H falling tempo 0 – 60000 1 10 ms F1 0
01F0 – Reserved
01FF

3.4 Page 2h –Setting group 1 remote parameters

Access in reading and in writing
Values Fault
Address Group Description Step Unit Format Range
range Value
0200 [87] ph. [87] DIFF function ? 0–1 1 F24 0 (No)
differential
0201 [87] Current IDIFF 2 – 200 1 In/100 F1 200
Threshold
0202 [87] Voltage VDIFF 10 – 4000 10 100 mV F1 4000
Threshold
0203 [87] tDIFF timer value 0 – 200 1 10 ms F1 0
0204 [87] tRESET timer value 0 – 60000 1 10 ms F1 0
0205 [87] Filter of analog input 1, 3, 4 1 F74 1
protection (Sampl
e
mode)
0206 [87] Check zone 0–1 1 F24 0 (No)
permission ?
0207– Reserved
021F
0220 [95] Buswire [95] SUP function ? 0–1 1 F24 0 (No)
supervision
0221 [95] Current ISUP 2– 200 1 In/100 F1 200
Threshold
0222 [95] Voltage VSUP 10 – 4000 10 100 mV F1 4000
Threshold
0223 [95] tSUP timer value 50 – 300 1 10 ms F1 300
0224 [95] tRESET timer value 0 – 60000 1 10 ms F1 0
Communication database P72x/EN CT/A11

MiCOM P721/P723 Page 17/78

Values Fault
Address Group Description Step Unit Format Range
range Value
0225 [95] Filter of analog input 1, 3, 4 1 F74 1
protection (Sampl
e
mode)
0226– Reserved
023F
0240 [87N] E/gnd [87N] DIFF function ? 0–1 1 F24 0 (No)
differential
0241 [87N] Current IDIFF 1 – 100 1 In/100 F1 100
Threshold
0242 [87N] Voltage VDIFF 5 – 2000 10 100 mV F1 2000
Threshold
0243 [87N] tDIFF timer value 0 – 200 1 10 ms F1 0
0244 [87N] tRESET timer 0 – 60000 1 10 ms F1 0
value
0245 [87N] Filter of analog 1, 3, 4 1 F74 1
input protection (Sampl
e
mode)
0246– Reserved
025F
0260 [95N] Buswire [95N] SUP function 0–1 1 F24 0 (No)
supervision ?Function
0261 [95N] Current ISUP 1 – 100 1 In/100 F1 100
Threshold
0262 [95N] Voltage VSUP 5 – 2000 10 100 mV F1 2000
Threshold
0263 [95N] tSUP timer value 50 – 300 1 10 ms F1 300
0264 [95N] tRESET timer 0 – 60000 1 10 ms F1 0
value
0265 [95N] Filter of analog 1, 3, 4 1 F74 1
input protection (Sampl
e
mode)
0266– Reserved
027F

3.5 Page 3h – Setting group 2 remote parameters

Access in reading and in writing
The same as page 2H except addresses are 03XX instead of 02XX.

3.6 Page 4h –Access in writing

Values Fault
Address Group Description Step Unit Format Range
range Value
0400– Remote Protection remote control Binary 1 F9 0
0401 control
0402– Reserved
0403
0404 Output relay remote Binary 1 F13 0
control in maintenance
mode
0405 Keyboard remote control Binary 1 F76 0
0406– Reserved
040F
P72x/EN CT/A11 Communication database

Page 18/78 MiCOM P721/P723

3.7 Page 5h – Boolean equations remote parameters

Read and write access.
Address Def.
Group Description Values range Step Unit Format
(hex) Value
0500 Bool Equations Equation A.00 operator 0–1 1 F70 0
0501 Equation A.00 operand 0 – 24 1 F72 0
0502 Equation A.01 operator 0–3 1 F71 0
0503 Equation A.01 operand 0 – 24 1 F72 0
0504 Equation A.02 operator 0–3 1 F71 0
0505 Equation A.02 operand 0 – 24 1 F72 0
0506 Equation A.03 operator 0–3 1 F71 0
0507 Equation A.03 operand 0 – 24 1 F72 0
0508 Equation A.04 operator 0–3 1 F71 0
0509 Equation A.04 operand 0 – 24 1 F72 0
050A Equation A.05 operator 0–3 1 F71 0
050B Equation A.05 operand 0 – 24 1 F72 0
050C Equation A.06 operator 0–3 1 F71 0
050D Equation A.06 operand 0 – 24 1 F72 0
050E Equation A.07 operator 0–3 1 F71 0
050F Equation A.07 operand 0 – 24 1 F72 0
0510 Equation A.08 operator 0–3 1 F71 0
0511 Equation A.08 operand 0 – 24 1 F72 0
0512 Equation A.09 operator 0–3 1 F71 0
0513 Equation A.09 operand 0 – 24 1 F72 0
0514 Equation A.10 operator 0–3 1 F71 0
0515 Equation A.10 operand 0 – 24 1 F72 0
0516 Equation A.11 operator 0–3 1 F71 0
0517 Equation A.11 operand 0 – 24 1 F72 0
0518 Equation A.12 operator 0–3 1 F71 0
0519 Equation A.12 operand 0 – 24 1 F72 0
051A Equation A.13 operator 0–3 1 F71 0
051B Equation A.13 operand 0 – 24 1 F72 0
051C Equation A.14 operator 0–3 1 F71 0
051D Equation A.14 operand 0 – 24 1 F72 0
051E Equation A.15 operator 0–3 1 F71 0
051F Equation A.15 operand 0 – 24 1 F72 0
0520 Equation B.00 operator 0–1 1 F70 0
0521 Equation B.00 operand 0 – 24 1 F72 0
0522 Equation B.01 operator 0–3 1 F71 0
0523 Equation B.01 operand 0 – 24 1 F72 0
0524 Equation B.02 operator 0–3 1 F71 0
0525 Equation B.02 operand 0 – 24 1 F72 0
0526 Equation B.03 operator 0–3 1 F71 0
0527 Equation B.03 operand 0 – 24 1 F72 0
0528 Equation B.04 operator 0–3 1 F71 0
0529 Equation B.04 operand 0 – 24 1 F72 0
052A Equation B.05 operator 0–3 1 F71 0
052B Equation B.05 operand 0 – 24 1 F72 0
052C Equation B.06 operator 0–3 1 F71 0
052D Equation B.06 operand 0 – 24 1 F72 0
052E Equation B.07 operator 0–3 1 F71 0
052F Equation B.07 operand 0 – 24 1 F72 0
0530 Equation B.08 operator 0–3 1 F71 0
0531 Equation B.08 operand 0 – 24 1 F72 0
0532 Equation B.09 operator 0–3 1 F71 0
0533 Equation B.09 operand 0 – 24 1 F72 0
0534 Equation B.10 operator 0–3 1 F71 0
0535 Equation B.10 operand 0 – 24 1 F72 0
0536 Equation B.11 operator 0–3 1 F71 0
Communication database P72x/EN CT/A11

MiCOM P721/P723 Page 19/78

Address Def.
Group Description Values range Step Unit Format
(hex) Value
0537 Equation B.11 operand 0 – 24 1 F72 0
0538 Equation B.12 operator 0–3 1 F71 0
0539 Equation B.12 operand 0 – 24 1 F72 0
053A Equation B.13 operator 0–3 1 F71 0
053B Equation B.13 operand 0 – 24 1 F72 0
053C Equation B.14 operator 0–3 1 F71 0
053D Equation B.14 operand 0 – 24 1 F72 0
053E Equation B.15 operator 0–3 1 F71 0
053F Equation B.15 operand 0 – 24 1 F72 0
0540 Equation C.00 operator 0–1 1 F70 0
0541 Equation C.00 operand 0 – 24 1 F72 0
0542 Equation C.01 operator 0–3 1 F71 0
0543 Equation C.01 operand 0 – 24 1 F72 0
0544 Equation C.02 operator 0–3 1 F71 0
0545 Equation C.02 operand 0 – 24 1 F72 0
0546 Equation C.03 operator 0–3 1 F71 0
0547 Equation C.03 operand 0 – 24 1 F72 0
0548 Equation C.04 operator 0–3 1 F71 0
0549 Equation C.04 operand 0 – 24 1 F72 0
054A Equation C.05 operator 0–3 1 F71 0
054B Equation C.05 operand 0 – 24 1 F72 0
054C Equation C.06 operator 0–3 1 F71 0
054D Equation C.06 operand 0 – 24 1 F72 0
054E Equation C.07 operator 0–3 1 F71 0
054F Equation C.07 operand 0 – 24 1 F72 0
0550 Equation C.08 operator 0–3 1 F71 0
0551 Equation C.08 operand 0 – 24 1 F72 0
0552 Equation C.09 operator 0–3 1 F71 0
0553 Equation C.09 operand 0 – 24 1 F72 0
0554 Equation C.10 operator 0–3 1 F71 0
0555 Equation C.10 operand 0 – 24 1 F72 0
0556 Equation C.11 operator 0–3 1 F71 0
0557 Equation C.11 operand 0 – 24 1 F72 0
0558 Equation C.12 operator 0–3 1 F71 0
0559 Equation C.12 operand 0 – 24 1 F72 0
055A Equation C.13 operator 0–3 1 F71 0
055B Equation C.13 operand 0 – 24 1 F72 0
055C Equation C.14 operator 0–3 1 F71 0
055D Equation C.14 operand 0 – 24 1 F72 0
055E Equation C.15 operator 0–3 1 F71 0
055F Equation C.15 operand 0 – 24 1 F72 0
0560 Equation D.00 operator 0–1 1 F70 0
0561 Equation D.00 operand 0 – 24 1 F72 0
0562 Equation D.01 operator 0–3 1 F71 0
0563 Equation D.01 operand 0 – 24 1 F72 0
0564 Equation D.02 operator 0–3 1 F71 0
0565 Equation D.02 operand 0 – 24 1 F72 0
0566 Equation D.03 operator 0–3 1 F71 0
0567 Equation D.03 operand 0 – 24 1 F72 0
0568 Equation D.04 operator 0–3 1 F71 0
0569 Equation D.04 operand 0 – 24 1 F72 0
056A Equation D.05 operator 0–3 1 F71 0
056B Equation D.05 operand 0 – 24 1 F72 0
056C Equation D.06 operator 0–3 1 F71 0
056D Equation D.06 operand 0 – 24 1 F72 0
056E Equation D.07 operator 0–3 1 F71 0
056F Equation D.07 operand 0 – 24 1 F72 0
0570 Equation D.08 operator 0–3 1 F71 0
0571 Equation D.08 operand 0 – 24 1 F72 0
P72x/EN CT/A11 Communication database

Page 20/78 MiCOM P721/P723

Address Def.
Group Description Values range Step Unit Format
(hex) Value
0572 Equation D.09 operator 0–3 1 F71 0
0573 Equation D.09 operand 0 – 24 1 F72 0
0574 Equation D.10 operator 0–3 1 F71 0
0575 Equation D.10 operand 0 – 24 1 F72 0
0576 Equation D.11 operator 0–3 1 F71 0
0577 Equation D.11 operand 0 – 24 1 F72 0
0578 Equation D.12 operator 0–3 1 F71 0
0579 Equation D.12 operand 0 – 24 1 F72 0
057A Equation D.13 operator 0–3 1 F71 0
057B Equation D.13 operand 0 – 24 1 F72 0
057C Equation D.14 operator 0–3 1 F71 0
057D Equation D.14 operand 0 – 24 1 F72 0
057E Equation D.15 operator 0–3 1 F71 0
057F Equation D.15 operand 0 – 24 1 F72 0
0580 Equation E.00 operator 0–1 1 F70 0
0581 Equation E.00 operand 0 – 24 1 F72 0
0582 Equation E.01 operator 0–3 1 F71 0
0583 Equation E.01 operand 0 – 24 1 F72 0
0584 Equation E.02 operator 0–3 1 F71 0
0585 Equation E.02 operand 0 – 24 1 F72 0
0586 Equation E.03 operator 0–3 1 F71 0
0587 Equation E.03 operand 0 – 24 1 F72 0
0588 Equation E.04 operator 0–3 1 F71 0
0589 Equation E.04 operand 0 – 24 1 F72 0
058A Equation E.05 operator 0–3 1 F71 0
058B Equation E.05 operand 0 – 24 1 F72 0
058C Equation E.06 operator 0–3 1 F71 0
058D Equation E.06 operand 0 – 24 1 F72 0
058E Equation E.07 operator 0–3 1 F71 0
058F Equation E.07 operand 0 – 24 1 F72 0
0590 Equation E.08 operator 0–3 1 F71 0
0591 Equation E.08 operand 0 – 24 1 F72 0
0592 Equation E.09 operator 0–3 1 F71 0
0593 Equation E.09 operand 0 – 24 1 F72 0
0594 Equation E.10 operator 0–3 1 F71 0
0595 Equation E.10 operand 0 – 24 1 F72 0
0596 Equation E.11 operator 0–3 1 F71 0
0597 Equation E.11 operand 0 – 24 1 F72 0
0598 Equation E.12 operator 0–3 1 F71 0
0599 Equation E.12 operand 0 – 24 1 F72 0
059A Equation E.13 operator 0–3 1 F71 0
059B Equation E.13 operand 0 – 24 1 F72 0
059C Equation E.14 operator 0–3 1 F71 0
059D Equation E.14 operand 0 – 24 1 F72 0
059E Equation E.15 operator 0–3 1 F71 0
059F Equation E.15 operand 0 – 24 1 F72 0
05A0 Equation F.00 operator 0–1 1 F70 0
05A1 Equation F.00 operand 0 – 24 1 F72 0
05A2 Equation F.01 operator 0–3 1 F71 0
05A3 Equation F.01 operand 0 – 24 1 F72 0
05A4 Equation F.02 operator 0–3 1 F71 0
05A5 Equation F.02 operand 0 – 24 1 F72 0
05A6 Equation F.03 operator 0–3 1 F71 0
05A7 Equation F.03 operand 0 – 24 1 F72 0
05A8 Equation F.04 operator 0–3 1 F71 0
05A9 Equation F.04 operand 0 – 24 1 F72 0
05AA Equation F.05 operator 0–3 1 F71 0
05AB Equation F.05 operand 0 – 24 1 F72 0
05AC Equation F.06 operator 0–3 1 F71 0
Communication database P72x/EN CT/A11

MiCOM P721/P723 Page 21/78

Address Def.
Group Description Values range Step Unit Format
(hex) Value
05AD Equation F.06 operand 0 – 24 1 F72 0
05AE Equation F.07 operator 0–3 1 F71 0
05AF Equation F.07 operand 0 – 24 1 F72 0
05B0 Equation F.08 operator 0–3 1 F71 0
05B1 Equation F.08 operand 0 – 24 1 F72 0
05B2 Equation F.09 operator 0–3 1 F71 0
05B3 Equation F.09 operand 0 – 24 1 F72 0
05B4 Equation F.10 operator 0–3 1 F71 0
05B5 Equation F.10 operand 0 – 24 1 F72 0
05B6 Equation F.11 operator 0–3 1 F71 0
05B7 Equation F.11 operand 0 – 24 1 F72 0
05B8 Equation F.12 operator 0–3 1 F71 0
05B9 Equation F.12 operand 0 – 24 1 F72 0
05BA Equation F.13 operator 0–3 1 F71 0
05BB Equation F.13 operand 0 – 24 1 F72 0
05BC Equation F.14 operator 0–3 1 F71 0
05BD Equation F.14 operand 0 – 24 1 F72 0
05BE Equation F.15 operator 0–3 1 F71 0
05BF Equation F.15 operand 0 – 24 1 F72 0
05C0 Equation G.00 operator 0–1 1 F70 0
05C1 Equation G.00 operand 0 – 24 1 F72 0
05C2 Equation G.01 operator 0–3 1 F71 0
05C3 Equation G.01 operand 0 – 24 1 F72 0
05C4 Equation G.02 operator 0–3 1 F71 0
05C5 Equation G.02 operand 0 – 24 1 F72 0
05C6 Equation G.03 operator 0–3 1 F71 0
05C7 Equation G.03 operand 0 – 24 1 F72 0
05C8 Equation G.04 operator 0–3 1 F71 0
05C9 Equation G.04 operand 0 – 24 1 F72 0
05CA Equation G.05 operator 0–3 1 F71 0
05CB Equation G.05 operand 0 – 24 1 F72 0
05CC Equation G.06 operator 0–3 1 F71 0
05CD Equation G.06 operand 0 – 24 1 F72 0
05CE Equation G.07 operator 0–3 1 F71 0
05CF Equation G.07 operand 0 – 24 1 F72 0
05D0 Equation G.08 operator 0–3 1 F71 0
05D1 Equation G.08 operand 0 – 24 1 F72 0
05D2 Equation G.09 operator 0–3 1 F71 0
05D3 Equation G.09 operand 0 – 24 1 F72 0
05D4 Equation G.10 operator 0–3 1 F71 0
05D5 Equation G.10 operand 0 – 24 1 F72 0
05D6 Equation G.11 operator 0–3 1 F71 0
05D7 Equation G.11 operand 0 – 24 1 F72 0
05D8 Equation G.12 operator 0–3 1 F71 0
05D9 Equation G.12 operand 0 – 24 1 F72 0
05DA Equation G.13 operator 0–3 1 F71 0
05DB Equation G.13 operand 0 – 24 1 F72 0
05DC Equation G.14 operator 0–3 1 F71 0
05DD Equation G.14 operand 0 – 24 1 F72 0
05DE Equation G.15 operator 0–3 1 F71 0
05DF Equation G.15 operand 0 – 24 1 F72 0
05E0 Equation H.00 operator 0–1 1 F70 0
05E1 Equation H.00 operand 0 – 24 1 F72 0
05E2 Equation H.01 operator 0–3 1 F71 0
05E3 Equation H.01 operand 0 – 24 1 F72 0
05E4 Equation H.02 operator 0–3 1 F71 0
05E5 Equation H.02 operand 0 – 24 1 F72 0
05E6 Equation H.03 operator 0–3 1 F71 0
05E7 Equation H.03 operand 0 – 24 1 F72 0
P72x/EN CT/A11 Communication database

Page 22/78 MiCOM P721/P723

Address Def.
Group Description Values range Step Unit Format
(hex) Value
05E8 Equation H.04 operator 0–3 1 F71 0
05E9 Equation H.04 operand 0 – 24 1 F72 0
05EA Equation H.05 operator 0–3 1 F71 0
05EB Equation H.05 operand 0 – 24 1 F72 0
05EC Equation H.06 operator 0–3 1 F71 0
05ED Equation H.06 operand 0 – 24 1 F72 0
05EE Equation H.07 operator 0–3 1 F71 0
05EF Equation H.07 operand 0 – 24 1 F72 0
05F0 Equation H.08 operator 0–3 1 F71 0
05F1 Equation H.08 operand 0 – 24 1 F72 0
05F2 Equation H.09 operator 0–3 1 F71 0
05F3 Equation H.09 operand 0 – 24 1 F72 0
05F4 Equation H.10 operator 0–3 1 F71 0
05F5 Equation H.10 operand 0 – 24 1 F72 0
05F6 Equation H.11 operator 0–3 1 F71 0
05F7 Equation H.11 operand 0 – 24 1 F72 0
05F8 Equation H.12 operator 0–3 1 F71 0
05F9 Equation H.12 operand 0 – 24 1 F72 0
05FA Equation H.13 operator 0–3 1 F71 0
05FB Equation H.13 operand 0 – 24 1 F72 0
05FC Equation H.14 operator 0–3 1 F71 0
05FD Equation H.14 operand 0 – 24 1 F72 0
05FE Equation H.15 operator 0–3 1 F71 0
05FF Equation H.15 operand 0 – 24 1 F72 0

3.8 Page 6h – General remote parameters (part 2)

Read and write access
Values Fault
Address Group Description Step Unit Format
range Value
0600 – Reserved
06FF

3.9 Page 7h – Remote device status

Access in quick reading only (MODBUS 07 function)
Values Fault
Address Group Description Step Unit Format
range Value
0700 Device status 1 - F23 1

3.10 Page 8h –Remote data and time

Read and write access
Time synchronisation: access in writing for n words (function 16). The time synchronisation
format is based on 8 bits (4 words).
If date Format (0135h) is private date then format is:
Values Fault
Address Group Description Step Unit Format
range Value
0800 Date Year 1994-2093 1 Year F1 1994
0801 Month 1 -12 1 Month F1 1
MSB
Day 1 – 31 1 Days F1 1
lsb
0802 Hour 0 – 23 1 Hours F1 0
MSB
Minute 0 – 59 1 mn F1 0
lsb
0803 Milliseconds 0 – 59999 1 ms F1 0
Communication database P72x/EN CT/A11

MiCOM P721/P723 Page 23/78

Else format is ( Inverted IEC 870-5-4 CP56Time2a):

Values Fault
Address Group Description Step Unit Format
range Value
0800 Date Year : 00 – 99 : 1 Year F1 94
1994 – 1999 94 – 99
2000 – 2093 00 – 93
0801 Month 1 -12 1 Month F1 1
MSB
Day of the week : 1–7 1 Days F1 lsb 1
Monday – bit 5-7
Sunday
Day of the month 1 – 31 1 Days F1 lsb 1
bit 0-4
0802 Season : 1 Season F1 0
Summer – Winter 0 – 1 MSB bit
7
Hour 0 – 23 1 Hours F1 0
MSB bit
0-4
Date validity : 1 F1 lsb 0
Valid – Invalid 0–1 bit 7
Minute 0 – 59 1 mn F1 lsb 0
bit 0-6
0803 Milliseconds 0 – 59999 1 ms F1 0

3.11 Pages 9h to 21h – Disturbance record data

Disturbance record data (25 pages). Access in words writing (function 03)
Each disturbance mapping page contain 250 words.
Addresses (hex) Contents
0900 to 09FA 250 disturbance data words
0A00 to 0AFA 250 disturbance data words
0B00 to 0BFA 250 disturbance data words
0C00 to 0CFA 250 disturbance data words
0D00 to 0DFA 250 disturbance data words
0E00 to 0EFA 250 disturbance data words
0F00 to 0FFA 250 disturbance data words
1000 to 10FA 250 disturbance data words
1100 to 11FA 250 disturbance data words
1200 to 12FA 250 disturbance data words
1300 to 13FA 250 disturbance data words
1400 to 14FA 250 disturbance data words
1500 to 15FA 250 disturbance data words
1600 to 16FA 250 disturbance data words
1700 to 17FA 250 disturbance data words
1800 to 18FA 250 disturbance data words
1900 to 19FA 250 disturbance data words
1A00 to 1AFA 250 disturbance data words
1B00 to 1BFA 250 disturbance data words
1C00 to 1CFA 250 disturbance data words
1D00 to 1DFA 250 disturbance data words
1E00 to 1EFA 250 disturbance data words
1F00 to 1FFA 250 disturbance data words
2000 to 20FA 250 disturbance data words
2100 to 21FA 250 disturbance data words
NOTE: The disturbance data pages contain values of one channel from one
given disturbance record.
P72x/EN CT/A11 Communication database

Page 24/78 MiCOM P721/P723

3.11.1 Meaning of each value channel

• IA, IB, IC and IO channels:

The value is an signed 16 bits word equivalent to the ADC value
3.11.2 Calculation formula for phase current values
Line phase current value (primary value) = phase sampled value x phase primary CT / phase
internal CT ratio (mapping address 0007 = 800) x √2
3.11.3 Calculation formula for earth current values
Line earth current value (primary value) = earth sampled value (e.g. word 10 or 14) x earth
primary CT / earth internal CT ratio (mapping address 0008h) x √2
3.11.4 Logic channels
Logic channel MODBUS & DNP 3.0 IEC 61870-5-103
Bit 0 Trip relay (RL1) Earth Starting
Bit 1 Output relay 2 General Starting
Bit 2 Output relay 3 CB Fail
Bit 3 Output relay 4 General Trip
Bit 4 Watch-dog relay [95] tSUP
Bit 5 Output relay 5 [87] tDIFF
Bit 6 Output relay 6 Reserved
Bit 7 Output relay 7 [95N] tSUP
Bit 8 Output relay 8 [87N] tDIFF
Bit 9 Reserved Reserved
Bit 10 Logic input 1 Logic input 1
Bit 11 Logic input 2 Logic input 2
Bit 12 Logic input 3 Logic input 3
Bit 13 Logic input 4 Logic input 4
Bit 14 Logic input 5 Logic input 5
Bit 15 Reserved Reserved

3.12 Page 22h – Disturbance record index frame

Disturbance record index frame (7 to 9 Words)
Access in word reading (function 03)
Addresses Contents
2200h Disturbance data index frame
Disturbance record index frame
Word Contents
n° 1 Disturbance record number
n° 2 Disturbance record finish date (second)
n° 3 Disturbance record finish date (second)
n° 4 Disturbance record finish date (millisecond)
n° 5 Disturbance record finish date (millisecond)
n° 6 Disturbance record starting condition:
1: tripping command (RL1)
2: instantaneous
3: remote command
4: logic input
n° 7 Frequency at the post-time beginning
n° 8 (=0) Optional
n° 9 (=0) Optional
Communication database P72x/EN CT/A11

MiCOM P721/P723 Page 25/78

3.13 Page 35h

Addresses 3500h to 354Ah.

Addresses (hex) Contents

3500 Event records 1

3501 Event records 2
… …
354A Event records 250

Event record data (9 words)

Word n° 1: Event code
Word n° 2: MODBUS associated value
Word n° 3: MODBUS address
Word n° 4:
Words n° 5 & 6 if data format is private:
Event date (second) number of seconds since 01/01/94
Words n° 7 & 8 if data format is private:
Event date (millisecond)
Words N°5, 6, 7, 8, if data format is Inverted IEC 870-5-4 CP56Time2a:
See format page 8h
Word n° 9: Acknowledge
0=event non acknowledged
1= event acknowledged
MODBUS COURIER
Code Meaning of the event Type
address Cell
00 No event
01
02 Remote control tripping F9 Ctrl 1
03 Disturbance recording start F82
04 Trip output unlatched F9 Ctrl 1
05 Setting change Address
06
07 Maintenance Mode F45 ↑ ↓ Yes
08 Output relay remote word in F13
maintenance mode
09 [95] SUP F17 ↑ ↓ Yes
10 [87] DIFF F17 ↑ ↓ Yes
11
12 [95N] SUP F16 ↑ ↓ Yes
13 [87N] DIFF F16 ↑ ↓ Yes
14
15
16
17 [95] tSUP F17 ↑ ↓ Yes
18 [87] tDIFF F17 ↑ ↓ Yes
19
20 [95N] tSUP F16 ↑ ↓ Yes
21 [87N] tDIFF F16 ↑ ↓ Yes
P72x/EN CT/A11 Communication database

Page 26/78 MiCOM P721/P723

MODBUS COURIER
Code Meaning of the event Type
address Cell
22
23
24
25 tAux 1 F38 word 1↑ ↓ Yes
26 tAux 2 F38 word 1 ↑ ↓ Yes
27 CB Failure (50BF) F38 word 1 ↑ ↓ Yes
28
29
30 Blocking logic 1 F20 word 1 ↑ ↓ Yes
31 Blocking logic 2 F20 word 1 ↑ ↓ Yes
32 Setting group change 1 or 2
33
34
35 Output relays unlatched (Logical F20 word 1 ↑ ↓
input)
36
37
38 Change of logical input state F12 ↑ ↓
39
40
41 [87] tDIFF fault (tripping) F13
42
43
44 [87N] tDIFF fault (tripping) F13
45
46
47
48 tAux 1 fault (tripping) F13
49 tAux 2 fault (tripping) F13
50 Output relays command F13
51 Front panel single alarm
acknowledge.
52 Front panel all alarms acknowledge
53 Remote single alarm acknowledge
54 Remote all alarms acknowledge
55 Major material alarm F45 ↑ ↓ Yes
56 Minor material alarm F45 ↑ ↓ Yes
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68 General Start (IEC 60870-5-103) F24 ↑ ↓
69
70
71 Auxiliary output relays latched F13 Yes
72
73
74
75
76
77 Local Mode (IEC 60870-5-103) F24 ↑ ↓
Communication database P72x/EN CT/A11

MiCOM P721/P723 Page 27/78

MODBUS COURIER
Code Meaning of the event Type
address Cell
78 Trip output relay latched F22 ↑ ↓
79 tAux 3 F38 word 1 ↑ ↓ Yes
80 tAux 3 fault (tripping) F13
81 tAux 4 F38 word 1 ↑ ↓ Yes
82 tAux 4 fault (tripping) F13
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93 Local Mode F20 word 2 ↑ ↓
94 Reset alarms & LED (IEC 60870-5-
103)
95
96
97 Synchronization > 10 s F23
98
99 tEquation A F61 ↑ ↓ Yes
100 tEquation B F61 ↑ ↓ Yes
101 tEquation C F61 ↑ ↓ Yes
102 tEquation D F61 ↑ ↓ Yes
103 tEquation E F61 ↑ ↓ Yes
104 tEquation F F61 ↑ ↓ Yes
105 tEquation G F61 ↑ ↓ Yes
106 tEquation H F61 ↑ ↓ Yes
107 tEquation A fault (tripping) F13
108 tEquation B fault (tripping) F13
109 tEquation C fault (tripping) F13
110 tEquation D fault (tripping) F13
111 tEquation E fault (tripping) F13
112 tEquation F fault (tripping) F13
113 tEquation G fault (tripping) F13
114 tEquation H fault (tripping) F13
115 t[87CZ] check zone F17 ↑ ↓ Yes
116 Buswire shorting F36 word 1 ↑ ↓ Yes
117 Signals & measurements blocking F24 ↑ ↓
(IEC 60870-5-103)
118 Commands blocking (IEC 60870-5-103) F24 ↑ ↓

NOTA: The double arrow ↑ ↓ means the event is generated on event

occurrence (↑) and on event disappearance (↓).
On event occurrence, the corresponding bit of the associated format is
set to « 1 ».
On event disappearance, the corresponding bit of the associated
format is set to « 0 ».

3.14 Page 36h – Event older record data

Access in word reading (function 03)
Addresses Contents
3600h Most older event data
P72x/EN CT/A11 Communication database

Page 28/78 MiCOM P721/P723

3.15 Page 37h – Fault record value data

Access in word reading (function 03)
Addresses Contents
3700h Fault value record n°1
3701h Fault value record n°2
3702h Fault value record n°3
… …
3718h Fault value record n°25
Each record is made up of 15 words:
Word Nr. Contents
1 Fault number
PRIVATE FORMAT: 2 & 3 Fault date (number of seconds since 01/01/94)
PRIVATE FORMAT: 4 & 5 Fault date (milli-seconds)
IEC FORMAT: 2 to 5 Fault date (see format of time synchronisation, address 0800h)
6 Fault date (season)
0= winter
1= summer
2= undefined
7 Active setting group during the fault (1 or 2)
8 Phase/earth fault origin (format F77)
9 Fault recording starting origin (format F78)
10 Fault value
11 Phase A current value (nominal value)
12 Phase B current value (nominal value)
13 Phase C current value (nominal value)
14 Earth current value (nominal value)
15 Acknowledgement:
0 = fault not acknowledged
1 = fault acknowledged

3.15.1 Calculation formula for phase current values

Line phase current value (primary value) = phase sampled value (e.g. word 10, 11, 12 or 13)
x phase primary CT / phase internal CT ratio (mapping address 0007 = 800)
3.15.2 Calculation formula for earth current values
Line earth current value (primary value) = earth sampled value (e.g. word 10 or 14) * earth
primary CT ratio / earth internal CT ratio (mapping address 0008h).

3.16 Page 3Eh – Fault older record data

Access in word reading (function 03)
Addresses Contents
3E00h Most older Fault record
Communication database P72x/EN CT/A11

MiCOM P721/P723 Page 29/78

3.17 Pages 38h to 3Ch – Disturbance record and channel selection

Selection of the disturbance record and channel (11 to 13 words are uploaded for each
address reading)
Access in word reading (function 03)
Address Disturbance record number Format
3800h 1 IA
3801h 1 IB
3802h 1 IC
3803h 1 IE
3804h 1 Frequency
3805h 1 Logic input and outputs
3900h 2 IA
3901h 2 IB
3902h 2 IC
3903h 2 IE
3904h 2 Frequency
3905h 2 Logic input and outputs
3A00h 3 IA
3A01h 3 IB
3A02h 3 IC
3A03h 3 IE
3A04h 3 Frequency
3A05h 3 Logic input and outputs
3B00h 4 IA
3B01h 4 IB
3B02h 4 IC
3B03h 4 IE
3B04h 4 Frequency
3B05h 4 Logic input and outputs
3C00h 5 IA
3C01h 5 IB
3C02h 5 IC
3C03h 5 IE
3C04h 5 Frequency
3C05h 5 Logic input and outputs

3.17.1 Disturbance record and channel selection (13 words)

Word n° 1: Number of samples included in the mapping
Word n° 2: Sample number in pre-time
Word n° 3: Sample number in post-time
Word n° 4: Phase primary CT ratio
Word n° 5: Phase secondary CT ratio
Word n° 6: Earth primary CT ratio
Word n° 7: Earth secondary CT ratio
Word n° 8: Phase internal CT ratio
Word n° 9: Earth internal CT ratio
Word n° 10: Mapping last page number
Word n° 11: Number of words in the mapping last page
Word n° 12: Coefficient of samples conversion (=1) (Optional)
Word n° 13: Reference of samples conversion (=1) (Optional)
P72x/EN CT/A11 Communication database

Page 30/78 MiCOM P721/P723

3.17.2 Calculation formula for phase current values

Line phase current value (primary value) = phase sampled value (e.g. address 3800h, 3801h
or 3802h) x phase primary CT x (1 / phase internal CT ratio*) x √2
(*) Mapping address 0007h
3.17.3 Calculation formula for earth current values
Line earth current value (primary value) = earth sampled value (e.g. address 3803h) x earth
primary CT x (1 / earth internal CT ratio*) x √2
(*) Mapping address 0008h

3.18 Pages 3Dh – Disturbance records number available

Number of disturbance records available
Access in word reading (function 03)
Addresses Contents
3D00h Number of disturbance records available
Word n° 1: Number of disturbance records available
Word n° 2: Oldest disturbance record number (n)
Words n° 3 & 4: Oldest disturbance record date (second)
Words n° 5 & 6: Oldest disturbance record date (millisecond)
Word n° 7: Disturbance record starting origin
1= trip relay (RL1)
2= instantaneous threshold
3= remote command
4= logic input
Word n° 8: Acknowledge
Word n° 9: Number of Previous Disturbance record (n+1)
Words n° 10 & 11: Previous disturbance record date (second)
Words n° 12 & 13: Previous disturbance record date (millisecond)
Word n° 14: Disturbance record starting origin
1= trip relay (RL1)
2= instantaneous threshold
3= remote command
4= logic input
Word n° 15: Acknowledge
Word n° 16: Number of Previous Disturbance record (n+2)
Words n° 17 & 18: Previous disturbance record date (second)
Words n° 19 & 20: Previous disturbance record date (millisecond)
Word n° 21: Disturbance record starting origin
1= trip relay (RL1)
2= instantaneous threshold
3= remote command
4= logic input
Word n° 22: Acknowledge
Word n° 23: Number of Previous Disturbance record (n+3)
Words n° 24 & 25: Previous disturbance record date (second)
Communication database P72x/EN CT/A11

MiCOM P721/P723 Page 31/78

Words n° 26 & 27: Previous disturbance record date (millisecond)

Word n° 28: Disturbance record starting origin
1= trip relay (RL1)
2= instantaneous threshold
3= remote command
4= logic input
Word n° 29: Acknowledge
Word n° 30: Number of Previous Disturbance record (n+4)
Words n° 31 & 32: Previous disturbance record date (second)
Words n° 33 & 34: Previous disturbance record date (millisecond)
Word n° 35: Disturbance record starting origin
1= trip relay (RL1)
2= instantaneous threshold
3= remote command
4= logic input
Word n° 36: Acknowledge
P72x/EN CT/A11 Communication database

Page 32/78 MiCOM P721/P723

4. DESCRIPTION OF THE MAPPING FORMAT

CODE DESCRIPTION
F1 Unsigned integer – numerical data: 0 to 65535
F2 Signed integer – numerical data: -32768 to 32767
F3 Reserved
F4 Unsigned integer: MODBUS speed
0: 300 bd
1: 600 bd
2: 1200 bd
3: 2400 bd
4: 4800 bd
5: 9600 bd
6: 19200 bd
7: 38400 bd
F5 Unsigned integer: parity
0: without
1: even
2: odd
F6 Unsigned integer: Tripping configuration and latching
Word 1:
bit 0:
bit 1: [87] tDIFF
bit 2:
bit 3:
bit 4: [87N] tDIFF
bit 5:
bit 6:
bit 7:
bit 8:
bit 9: tAux 1
bit 10: tAux 2
bit 11:
bit 12:
bit 13: tAux 3
bit 14: tAux 4
bit 15:
Word 2:
bit 0 (bit 16):
bit 1 (bit 17): Control trip
bit 2 (bit 18): tEquation A
bit 3 (bit 19): tEquation B
bit 4 (bit 20): tEquation C
bit 5 (bit 21): tEquation D
bit 6 (bit 22): tEquation E
bit 7 (bit 23): tEquation F
bit 8 (bit 24): tEquation G
bit 9 (bit 25): tEquation H
bit 10 (bit 26):
bit 11 (bit 27):
bit 12 (bit 28):
bit 13 (bit 39):
bit 14 (bit 30):
bit 15 (bit 31):
F7 Reserved
Communication database P72x/EN CT/A11

MiCOM P721/P723 Page 33/78

CODE DESCRIPTION
F8a Unsigned integer: Blocking logic (based on F6)
Word 1:
bit 0:
bit 1: [87] tDIFF
bit 2:
bit 3:
bit 4: [87N] tDIFF
bit 5:
bit 6:
bit 7:
bit 8:
bit 9: tAux 1
bit 10: tAux 2
bit 11:
bit 12:
bit 13: tAux 3
bit 14: tAux 4
bit 15:
Word 2:
bit 0 (bit 16):
bit 1 (bit 17):
bit 2 (bit 18):
bit 3 (bit 19):
bit 4 (bit 20):
bit 5 (bit 21):
bit 6 (bit 22):
bit 7 (bit 23):
bit 8 (bit 24):
bit 9 (bit 25):
bit 10 (bit 26):
bit 11 (bit 27):
bit 12 (bit 28):
bit 13 (bit 39):
bit 14 (bit 30):
bit 15 (bit 31):

F9 Unsigned 2 word: Protection remote control

Word 1:
bit 0: Output tripping and auxiliary contact delatched
bit 1: 1st alarm acknowledgement
bit 2: All alarms acknowledgement
bit 3: Remote control tripping
bit 4:
bit 5: Setting group change
bit 6:
bit 7: Max & average RMS value reset
bit 8: Disturbance record remote start
bit 9: Mode Maintenance remote start
bit 10:
bit 11:
bit 12: Local manual acknowledgement
bit 13: Oldest event record acknowledgement
bit 14: Oldest fault record acknowledgement
bit 15: Statistic alarm acknowledgement
Word 2:
bit 0 (bit 16):
bit 1 (bit 17): Output tripping contact delatched
bit 2 (bit 18): Acknowledgement of the oldest disturbance record
bit 3 (bit 19): Mode Maintenance remote stop
bit 4 (bit 20):
bit 5 (bit 21):
bit 6 (bit 22): All LED and alarms reset
bit 7 (bit 23):
P72x/EN CT/A11 Communication database

Page 34/78 MiCOM P721/P723

CODE DESCRIPTION
bit 8 (bit 24):
bit 9 (bit 25):
bit 10 (bit 26):
bit 11 (bit 27):
bit 12 (bit 28):
bit 13 (bit 39):
bit 14 (bit 30): All records suppres. (alarms, events, faults, inst., stat. and dist.)
bit 15 (bit 31):
F10 2 characters ASCII
32 –127 = ASCII character1
32 – 127 = ASCII character 2
F11 Unsigned integer: Configuration of logical inputs active
bit 0: logical input number 1
bit 1: logical input number 2
bit 2: logical input number 3
bit 3: logical input number 4
bit 4: logical input number 5
bit 5:
bit 6:
bit 7:
bit 8:
bit 9:
bit 10:
bit 11:
bit 12:
bit 13:
bit 14:
bit 15:
bit value = 0, input is active if de-energized
bit value = 1, input is active if energized
F12 Unsigned integer: Logical input status
bit 0: logical input number 1
bit 1: logical input number 2
bit 2: logical input number 3
bit 3: logical input number 4
bit 4: logical input number 5
bit 5:
bit 6:
bit 7:
bit 8:
bit 9:
bit 10:
bit 11:
bit 12:
bit 13:
bit 14:
bit 15:
bit value = 0, input is de-energized
bit value = 1, input is energized
Communication database P72x/EN CT/A11

MiCOM P721/P723 Page 35/78

CODE DESCRIPTION
F13 Unsigned integer: Logic outputs relay
bit 0: logic output number RL1 (tripping)
bit 1: logic output number RL2
bit 2: logic output number RL3
bit 3: logic output number RL4
bit 4: logic output number RL0 (watchdog)
bit 5: logic output number RL5
bit 6: logic output number RL6
bit 7: logic output number RL7
bit 8: logic output number RL8
bit 9:
bit 10:
bit 11:
bit 12:
bit 13:
bit 14:
bit 15:
F14 Unsigned integer: Output relay allocation
bit 0: Logic output relay 2
bit 1: Logic output relay 3
bit 2: Logic output relay 4
bit 3: Logic output relay 5
bit 4: Logic output relay 6
bit 5: Logic output relay 7
bit 6: Logic output relay 8
bit 7:
bit 8:
bit 9:
bit 10:
bit 11:
bit 12:
bit 13:
bit 14:
bit 15:
F15 Reserved
F16 Unsigned integer: threshold earth information status
bit 0: information of earth threshold exceeded
bit 1: reserved
bit 2: reserved
bit 3: reserved
bit 4: reserved
bit 5: Instantaneous information diff
bit 6: Temporized information tdiff
bit 7:
bit 8:
bit 9:
bit 10:
bit 11:
bit 12:
bit 13:
bit 14:
bit 15:
P72x/EN CT/A11 Communication database

Page 36/78 MiCOM P721/P723

CODE DESCRIPTION
F17 Unsigned integer: threshold phase information status
bit 0: information of phase threshold exceeded
bit 1: Instantaneous line A
bit 2: Instantaneous line B
bit 3: Instantaneous line C
bit 4: reserved
bit 5: Instantaneous information diff
bit 6: Temporized information tdiff
bit 7:
bit 8:
bit 9:
bit 10:
bit 11:
bit 12:
bit 13:
bit 14:
bit 15:
F18 Long integer
F19 Unsigned 3 words: Configuration LED
Word 1:
bit 0: [95] SUP
bit 1: [95] tSUP
bit 2: [87] DIFF
bit 3: [87] tDIFF
bit 4:
bit 5:
bit 6: [95N] SUP
bit 7: [95N] tSUP
bit 8: [87N] DIFF
bit 9: [87N] tDIFF
bit 10:
bit 11:
bit 12: [95A] tSUP
bit 13: [95B] tSUP
bit 14: [95C] tSUP
bit 15: CB failure (50BF)
Word 2:
bit 0 (bit 16): Logical input 1 (energized)
bit 1 (bit 17): Logical input 2 (energized)
bit 2 (bit 18): Logical input 3 (energized)
bit 3 (bit 19): Logical input 4 (energized)
bit 4 (bit 20): Logical input 5 (energized)
bit 5 (bit 21):
bit 6 (bit 22):
bit 7 (bit 23): tAux 1
bit 8 (bit 24): tAux 2
bit 9 (bit 25):
bit 10 (bit 26):
bit 11 (bit 27): tAux 3
bit 12 (bit 28): tAux 4
bit 13 (bit 29): [87CZ] check zone
bit 14 (bit 30): Buswire shorting
bit 15 (bit 31):
Word 3:
bit 0 (bit 32): tEquation A
bit 1 (bit 33): tEquation B
bit 2 (bit 34): tEquation C
bit 3 (bit 35): tEquation D
bit 4 (bit 36): tEquation E
bit 5 (bit 37): tEquation F
bit 6 (bit 38): tEquation G
bit 7 (bit 39): tEquation H
bit 8 (bit 40):
Communication database P72x/EN CT/A11

MiCOM P721/P723 Page 37/78

CODE DESCRIPTION
bit 9 (bit 41):
bit 10 (bit 42):
bit 11 (bit 43):
bit 12 (bit 44):
bit 13 (bit 45):
bit 14 (bit 46):
bit 15 (bit 47):
Word 4:
Not used
F20 Unsigned long: logical input settings and signalization
Word 1:
bit 0:
bit 1:
bit 2: Unlatch output relays
bit 3:
bit 4:
bit 5:
bit 6: Auxiliary input 1
bit 7: Auxiliary input 2
bit 8: Blocking logic 1
bit 9: Blocking logic 2
bit 10: Start disturbance
bit 11:
bit 12: Setting group 2 selection
bit 13:
bit 14:
bit 15:
Word 2:
bit 0 (bit 16):
bit 1 (bit 17): Reset of all alarms
bit 2 (bit 18): Maintenance mode
bit 3 (bit 19): Auxiliary input 3
bit 4 (bit 20): Auxiliary input 4
bit 5 (bit 21):
bit 6 (bit 22): Local mode
bit 7 (bit 23): Synchronization
bit 8 (bit 24): [87CZ] check zone
bit 9 (bit 25):
bit 10 (bit 26):
bit 11 (bit 27):
bit 12 (bit 28):
bit 13 (bit 29):
bit 14 (bit 30):
bit 15 (bit 31):
F21 Unsigned integer: software version
100: Version 10.A
101: Version 10.B
110: Version 11.A
…
F22 Unsigned integer: Trip status
bit 0: Trip output relay RL1 latched
bit 1: Memorization of trip information
bit 2 to bit 15: free
F23 Unsigned integer 8 bits: Device status
bit 0: Device status
bit 1: Minor material alarm
bit 2: Presence of non-acknowledged event record
bit 3: Synchronisation state
bit 4: Presence of non-acknowledged disturbance record
bit 5: Presence of non-acknowledged fault record
bit 6:
bit 7:
P72x/EN CT/A11 Communication database

Page 38/78 MiCOM P721/P723

CODE DESCRIPTION
F24 Unsigned integer: Status of the relay functions
0: Disabled / No
1: Enabled / Yes
F25 Reserved
F26 Phases and Earth identifier
Phase1 Phase2 Phase3
0: “L1” “L2” “L3”
1: “ A” “ B” “ C”
2: “ R” “ S” “ T”
Earth
0: “ N”
1: “ o”
2: “ E”
F27 Reserved
F28 Unsigned integer: Rear port communication data bits
0: 7 data bits
1: 8 data bits
F29 Unsigned integer: Rear port communication stop bits
0: 1 stop bit
1: 2 stop bits
F30 Unsigned integer: Rear port communication available
0: Communication non-available
1: Communication available
F31 Reserved
F32 Unsigned integer:
0: Disturbance record start condition on INSTANTANEOUS
1: Disturbance record start condition on TRIPPING
F33 Reserved
F34 Reserved
F35 Reserved
F36 Unsigned 3 words: Memorised flags of non acknowledged alarms
Word 1
bit 0: [95N] SUP
bit 1: [95N] tSUP
bit 2: [87N] DIFF
bit 3: [87N] tDIFF
bit 4:
bit 5:
bit 6: [87CZ] check zone
bit 7: Buswire shorting
bit 8:
bit 9: CB failure (50BF)
bit 10:
bit 11:
bit 12:
bit 13: tAux 1
bit 14: tAux 2
bit 15:
Word 2
bit 0 (bit 16):
bit 1 (bit 17):
bit 2 (bit 18):
bit 3 (bit 19):
bit 4 (bit 20):
bit 5 (bit 21): tAux 3
bit 6 (bit 22): tAux 4
bit 7 (bit 23):
bit 8 (bit 24):
bit 9 (bit 25):
bit 10 (bit 26):
bit 11 (bit 27):
bit 12 (bit 28):
Communication database P72x/EN CT/A11

MiCOM P721/P723 Page 39/78

CODE DESCRIPTION
bit 13 (bit 29):
bit 14 (bit 30):
bit 15 (bit 31):
Word 3
bit 0 (bit 32): tEquation A
bit 1 (bit 33): tEquation B
bit 2 (bit 34): tEquation C
bit 3 (bit 35): tEquation D
bit 4 (bit 36): tEquation E
bit 5 (bit 37): tEquation F
bit 6 (bit 38): tEquation G
bit 7 (bit 39): tEquation H
bit 8 (bit 40):
bit 9 (bit 42):
bit 10 (bit 43):
bit 11 (bit 44):
bit 12 (bit 45):
bit 13 (bit 46):
bit 14 (bit 47):
F37 Reserved
F38 Unsigned 2 words: Information of general status
Word 1:
bit 0: Pole earth opening
bit 1: CB failure (50BF)
bit 2: Pole phase A opening
bit 3: Pole phase B opening
bit 4: Pole phase C opening
bit 5:
bit 6: tAux 1
bit 7: tAux 2
bit 8:
bit 9: CB failure delay started (start tBF)
bit 10:
bit 11:
bit 12: tAux 3
bit 13: tAux 4
bit 14: Buswires shorting
bit 15:
Word 2:
bit 0 (bit 16):
bit 1 (bit 17):
bit 2 (bit 18):
bit 3 (bit 19):
bit 4 (bit 20):
bit 5 (bit 21):
bit 6 (bit 22):
bit 7 (bit 23):
bit 8 (bit 24):
bit 9 (bit 25):
bit 10 (bit 26):
bit 11 (bit 27):
bit 12 (bit 28):
bit 13 (bit 29):
bit 14 (bit 30):
bit 15 (bit 31):
F39 Reserved
F40 Reserved
F41 Unsigned integer: Front/rear communication
0: Front and rear MODBUS communication
1: Front MODBUS and rear Courier communication
2: Front MODBUS and rear IEC 60870-5-103 communication
3: Front MODBUS and rear DNP3 communication
P72x/EN CT/A11 Communication database

Page 40/78 MiCOM P721/P723

CODE DESCRIPTION
F42 Reserved
F43 Reserved
F44 Reserved
F45 Unsigned integer: Material alarm status
bit 0: Watch-Dog operating *
bit 1: Communication failure
bit 2: Program data failure *
bit 3: Analogue input failure *
bit 4: Datation failure
bit 5: Calibration data failure *
bit 6: Record data failure
bit 7:
bit 8: Maintenance Mode
bit 9: Default settings alarm *
bit 10: Inconsistent setting *
bit 11:
bit 12:
bit 13:
bit 14:
bit 15:
* Major alarm
F46 Reserved
F47 Unsigned integer: Setting group change configuration
0: setting group change either by communication, or of the relay front (MENU)
1: setting group change on logical input state (LEVEL) of digital input.
F48 Unsigned integer: Communication date format
0: Private Format Date
1: IEC Format Date
F50 Unsigned integer: AC/DC voltage Type applied to the logical inputs
0: Direct current (DC) voltage
1: Alternative current (AC) voltage
F51 Unsigned integer: Setting group
1: Setting group 1
2: Setting group 2
F52 Reserved
F53 Reserved
F54 Reserved
F55 Reserved
F56 Unsigned integer : IEC870-5-103 messages option for non-standard protections
0 : Public messages
1 : Private messages.
F57 Reserved
F58 Reserved
F59 Unsigned integer : Inhibition of alarms
bit 0: Alarm tAux1 inhibited
bit 1: Alarm tAux2 inhibited
bit 2: Alarm tAux3 inhibited
bit 3: Alarm tAux4 inhibited
bit 4:
bit 5:
bit 6:
bit 7:
bit 8:
bit 9:
bit 10:
bit 11:
bit 12:
bit 13:
bit 14:
bit 15:
Communication database P72x/EN CT/A11

MiCOM P721/P723 Page 41/78

CODE DESCRIPTION
F60 Unsigned integer : Fail safe and inversion relays
bit 0 : Fail safe logic output number RL1 (tripping)
bit 1 : Fail safe logic output number RL2
bit 2 : Inversion logic output number RL3
bit 3 : Inversion logic output number RL4
bit 4 : Inversion logic output number RL5
bit 5 : Inversion logic output number RL6
bit 6 : Inversion logic output number RL7
bit 7 : Inversion logic output number RL8
bit 8:
bit 9:
bit 10:
bit 11:
bit 12:
bit 13:
bit 14:
bit 15:
bit value = 0 : relay normally de-energized.
bit value = 1 : relay normally energized.
F61 Unsigned integer : Information of equation status
bit 0 : tEquation A
bit 1 : tEquation B
bit 2 : tEquation C
bit 3 : tEquation D
bit 4 : Temporisation A, B,… or H active
bit 5 : tEquation E
bit 6 : tEquation F
bit 7 : tEquation G
bit 8 : tEquation H
bit 9 :
bit 10 :
bit 11 :
bit 12 :
bit 13 :
bit 14 :
bit 15:
F62 Reserved
F63 Unsigned integer: HMI language *
00 – French
01 – English
02 – Spanish
03 – German
04 – Italian
05 – Russian
06 – Polish
07 – Portuguese
08 – Dutch
09 – American
10 – Czech
11 – Hungarian
12 – Greek
13 – Chinese
Other – Language by default (product code)
* The list of available language depends of the release.
F64 Reserved
F65 Reserved
F66 Reserved
F67 Reserved
F68 Reserved
F69 Reserved
P72x/EN CT/A11 Communication database

Page 42/78 MiCOM P721/P723

CODE DESCRIPTION
F70 Unsigned integer: 1st operator for Boolean equations
0 : NULL
1 : NOT
F71 Unsigned integer: Other than 1st operator for Boolean equations
0 : OR
1 : OR NOT
2 : AND
3 : AND NOT
F72 Unsigned integer: Operand for Boolean equations
0: NULL
1: [95] SUP
2: [95] tSUP
3: [95A] tSUP
4: [95B] tSUP
5: [95C] tSUP
6: [87] DIFF
7: [87] tDIFF
8: [95N] SUP
9: [95N] tSUP
10: [87N] DIFF
11: [87N] tDIFF
12: [87CZ] check zone
13: Buswire shorting
14: tAux 1
15: tAux 2
16: tAux 3
17: tAux 4
18: Logic input 1 (energized)
19: Logic input 2 (energized)
20: Logic input 3 (energized)
21: Logic input 4 (energized)
22: Logic input 5 (energized)
23: Active setting group 2
24: CB Failure
F73 Unsigned integer: LED status (bit = 0 if LED inactive)
bit 0: Trip LED
bit 1: Alarm LED
bit 2: Warning LED
bit 3: Healthy LED (always active)
bit 4: LED 5
bit 5: LED 6
bit 6: LED 7
bit 7: LED 8
bit 8:
bit 9:
bit 10:
bit 11:
bit 12:
bit 13:
bit 14:
bit 15:
F74 Unsigned integer: Filter of analogue input protection
correspondence :
1: Sample mode only
3: Sample mode + Fast sample mode
4: Fourier mode
(said differently: bit 0 is for Samples mode, bit 1 is for Fast samples mode, bit 2 is for
Fourier mode)

F75 Unsigned integer: Diff. threshold unit mode

0: Current set (A) / Ampere
1: Voltage set (V) / Volt
Communication database P72x/EN CT/A11

MiCOM P721/P723 Page 43/78

CODE DESCRIPTION
F76 Unsigned integer: Keyboard remote control word.
Only one bit simultaneously. The bit active simulate a pressure on the key.
bit 0: CLEAR key
bit 1: ALARM key
bit 2: UP key
bit 3: RIGHT key
bit 4: ENTER key
bit 5: DOWN key
bit 6: LEFT key
bit 7:
bit 8:
bit 9:
bit 10:
bit 11:
bit 12:
bit 13:
bit 14:
bit 15: Dialog re-init (factory test reserved)
F77 Unsigned integer: Phase/earth fault origin.
0: none
1: phase A
2: phase B
3: phase C
4: phases A-B
5: phases A-C
6: phases B-C
7: phases A-B-C
8: earth
F78 Unsigned integer: Fault recording starting origin (Trip origin).
0: none
1: Remote Control trip
2:
3:
4: [87] tDIFF
5:
6:
7: [87N] tDIFF
8:
9:
10:
11: tAux1
12: tAux2
13:
14:
15: tAux3
16: tAux4
17:
18:
19: tEquation A
20: tEquation B
21: tEquation C
22: tEquation D
23: tEquation E
24: tEquation F
25: tEquation G
26: tEquation H
F79 Unsigned integer: Differential protection type
0: Earth protection
1: Three-phase protection
F80 Unsigned integer: Spontaneous event enabling for IEC870-5-103 communication
0 : None
1 : IEC only
2 : All (IEC + Private)
P72x/EN CT/A11 Communication database

Page 44/78 MiCOM P721/P723

CODE DESCRIPTION
F81 Unsigned integer: Measurements transmission enabling for IEC870-5-103 communication
0 : None
1 : ASDU3.4 only
2: ASDU 9 only
3 : ASDU3.4 + ASDU 9
F82 Unsigned integer: Source of the disturbance recording start.
0 : None
1 : On trip protection
2: On instantaneous protection
3 : On communication order
4 : On logic input order
5 : No disturbance

4.1 Disturbance record additional information

4.1.1 MODBUS request definition used for disturbance record
To upload a disturbance record, the following requests must be done in the exact given
order:
1. (optional): Send a request to know the number of disturbance records available in
SRAM.
2. (compulsory): Send a request with the record number and the channel number.
3. (compulsory): Send one or several requests to upload the disturbance record data. It
depends of the number of samples.
4. (compulsory): Send a request to upload the index frame.
4.1.2 Request to know the number of disturbance records in SRAM

Slave number Function code Word address Word number CRC

xx 03h 3Dh 00 00 24h xx xx

This request may be answered an error message with the error code:
EVT_NOK(OF): No record available
NOTA: If there is less than 5 records available, the answer will contains zero
in the non-used words.
4.1.3 Service requests
This request must be send before uploading the disturbance record channel samples. It
allows to know the record number and the channel number to upload. It allows also to know
the number of samples in the channel.

Slave number Function code Word address Word number CRC

xx 03h Refer to mapping 00 0Bh xx xx

This request may be answered an error message with two different error codes:
CODE_DEF_RAM(02): SRAM failure
CODE_EVT_NOK(03): No disturbance record available in SRAM
Communication database P72x/EN CT/A11

MiCOM P721/P723 Page 45/78

4.1.4 Disturbance record upload request

Slave number Function code Word address Word number CRC

xx 03h 22h to 00 01 to 7Dh xx xx

This request may be answered an error message with two different error codes:
CODE_DEP_DATA(04): The required disturbance data number is
greater than the memorised number.
CODE_SERV_NOK(05): The service request for disturbance record and
channel number has not been send.
4.1.5 Index frame upload request

Slave number Function code Word address Word number CRC

xx 03h 22h 00 00 07h xx xx

This request may be answered an error message with an error code:

CODE_SERV_NOK(05): The service request for disturbance record and
channel number has not been send.
Two ways can be followed to retrieve an event record:

− Send a request to retrieve the oldest non-acknowledge event.

− Send a request to retrieve a dedicated event.

4.1.6 Request to retrieve the oldest non-acknowledge event

Slave number Function code Word address Word number CRC

xx 03h 36h 00 00 09h xx xx

This event request may be answered an error message with the error code:
EVT_EN_COURS_ECRIT (5): An event is being written into the saved RAM.
NOTE: On event retrieval, two possibilities exist regarding the event record
acknowledgement:
a) Automatic event record acknowledgement on event retrieval.
b) Non automatic event record acknowledgement on event
retrieval.
a) Automatic event record acknowledgement on event retrieval:
The bit12 of the remote order frame (format F9 – mapping address 0400h) shall be set to 0.
On event retrieval, this event record is acknowledged.
b) Non automatic event record acknowledgement on event retrieval:
The bit12 of the remote order frame (format F9 – mapping address 0400h) shall be set to 1.
On event retrieval, this event record is not acknowledged.
To acknowledge this event, an other remote order shall be sent to the relay. The bit 13 of
this frame (format F9 – mapping address 0400h) shall be set to 1.
4.1.7 Request to retrieve a dedicated event

Slave number Function code Word address Word number CRC

xx 03h Refer to mapping 00 09h xx xx

This event request may be answered an error message with the error code:
EVT_EN_COURS_ECRIT (5): An event is being written into the saved RAM.
NOTA: This event retrieval does not acknowledge this event.
P72x/EN CT/A11 Communication database

Page 46/78 MiCOM P721/P723

4.1.8 Modbus request definition used to retrieve the fault records

Two ways can be followed to retrieve a fault record:
Send a request to retrieve the oldest non-acknowledge fault record.
Send a request to retrieve a dedicated fault record.
4.1.9 Request to retrieve the oldest non-acknowledge fault record

Slave number Function code Word address Word number CRC

xx 03h 3Eh 00 00 0Fh xx xx

NOTA: On fault retrieval, two possibilities exist regarding the fault record
acknowledgement:
a) Automatic fault record acknowledgement on event retrieval.
b) Non automatic fault record acknowledgement on event
retrieval.
a) Automatic fault record acknowledgement on fault retrieval:
The bit12 of the remote order frame (format F9 – mapping address 0400h) shall be set to 0.
On fault retrieval, this fault record is acknowledged.
b) Non automatic fault record acknowledgement on fault retrieval:
The bit12 of the remote order frame (format F9 – mapping address 0400h) shall be set to 1.
On fault retrieval, this fault record is not acknowledged.
To acknowledge this fault, an other remote order shall be sent to the relay. The bit 14 of this
frame (format F9 – mapping address 0400h) shall be set to 1.
4.1.10 Request to retrieve a dedicated fault record

Slave number Function code Word address Word number CRC

xx 03h Refer to mapping 00 0Fh xx xx

NOTA: This fault value retrieval does not acknowledge this fault record.
Communication database P72x/EN CT/A11

MiCOM P721/P723 Page 47/78

IEC 60870-5-103
DATABASE
MiCOM P721/P723
VERSION V11
P72x/EN CT/A11 Communication database

Page 48/78 MiCOM P721/P723

BLANK PAGE
Communication database P72x/EN CT/A11

MiCOM P721/P723 Page 49/78

CONTENTS

1. IEC60870-5-103 INTERFACE 51
1.1 Physical connection and link layer 51
1.2 Link layer 51
1.3 Message validity check 52
1.4 IEC870-5-103 address 52
1.5 Initialisation 52
1.6 Time synchronisation 52
1.7 Spontaneous events 52
1.8 General interrogation 52
1.9 Cyclic measurements 53
1.10 Commands 53
1.11 Disturbance records 53
1.12 Blocking of monitor direction 53

2. APPENDIX 1 54
2.1 Spontaneous messages managed by MiCOM P72x 54
2.2 List of data contained in General Interrogation 57
2.3 Processed Commands 59
2.4 Relay re initialization 60
2.5 Cyclic Messages (Class 2 – measurements) 60
2.6 IEC870-5-103 messages for Disturbance record extraction 61
P72x/EN CT/A11 Communication database

Page 50/78 MiCOM P721/P723

BLANK PAGE
Communication database P72x/EN CT/A11

MiCOM P721/P723 Page 51/78

5. IEC60870-5-103 INTERFACE
The IEC60870-5-103 interface is a master/slave interface with the relay as the slave device.
This protocol is based on the VDEW communication protocol. The relay conforms to
compatibility level 2, compatibility level 3 is not supported.
The following IEC60870-5-103 facilities are supported by this interface:

• Initialisation (Reset)

• Time Synchronisation

• Event Record Extraction

• Disturbance Record Extraction

• General Interrogation

• Cyclic Measurements

• General Commands

5.1 Physical connection and link layer

Connection is available for IEC60870-5-103 through the rear RS485 port. It is possible to
select both the relay address and baud rate using the front panel interface. Following a
change, a reset command is required to re-establish communications.
The parameters of the communication are the following:

• Even Parity,

• 8 Data bits,

• 1 stop bit,

• Communication speed can be set in the front panel of the relay:

Baud rate (dec)

300
600
1200
2400
4800
9600
19200
38400

• Isolated two-point RS485 connection (2kV 50Hz),

• Asynchronous transmission.
To connect the relay after a parameter, speed, parity or address modification, a reset
command is required.
5.2 Link layer
IEC870-5-103 frame conforms with IEC 870-5-FT1.2 standards. In addition, Special
commands are added in accordance with IEC870-5-103 standard.
P72x/EN CT/A11 Communication database

Page 52/78 MiCOM P721/P723

5.3 Message validity check

The validation of a frame is performed with a 16-bit Cyclical Redundancy Check (CRC).
Generator polynomial: 1+x²+x15+x16 = 1010 0000 0000 0001 (binary) = A001 (hexadecimal)
5.4 IEC870-5-103 address
A slave address is defined in the range 1-254.
The address “255” is a standard address, frames with 255 are received by all slave devices.
5.5 Initialisation
Whenever the relay has been powered up, or if the communication parameters have been
changed a reset command is required to initialise the communications. The relay will
respond to either of the two reset commands (Reset CU or Reset FCB), the difference being
that the Reset CU will clear any unsent messages in the relay’s transmit buffer.
The relay will respond to the reset command with an identification message ASDU 5, the
Cause Of Transmission COT of this response will be either Reset CU or Reset FCB
depending on the nature of the reset command. The following information will be contained
in the data section of this ASDU:
Manufacturer Name: Schneider Electric
The Software Identification Section will contain the first four characters of the relay model
number to identify the type of relay, e.g. P723.
In addition to the above identification message, if the relay has been powered up it will also
produce a power up event.
5.6 Time synchronisation
The relay time and date can be set using the time synchronisation feature of the IEC60870-
5-103 protocol. The relay will correct for the transmission delay as specified in IEC60870-5-
103. If the time synchronisation message is sent as a send/confirm message then the relay
will respond with a confirm. Whether the time synchronisation message is sent as a send
confirm or a broadcast (send/no reply) message, a time synchronisation message will be
returned as Class 1 data.
5.7 Spontaneous events
The events created by the relay will be passed using the standard function type/information
numbers to the IEC60870-5-103 master station. Private codes are not used, thus any events
that cannot be passed using the standardised messages will not be sent.
Events are categorised using the following information:

• Common Address

• Function Type

• Information number

• Cause of Transmission (to caracterise event origin).

APPENDIX 1 contains a complete listing of all events produced by the relay.
5.8 General interrogation
The GI request can be used to read the status of the relay, the function numbers, information
numbers and common address offsets that will be returned during the GI cycle are indicated
in APPENDIX 1.
Communication database P72x/EN CT/A11

MiCOM P721/P723 Page 53/78

5.9 Cyclic measurements

The relay will produce measured values using ASDU 9 and ASDU 3.4 on a cyclical basis,
this can be read from the relay using a Class 2 poll.
It should be noted that the measurands transmitted by the relay are sent as a proportion of
2.4 times the rated value of the analogue value. The selection of either 1.2 or 2.4 for a
particular value is indicated in APPENDIX 1.
5.10 Commands
A list of the supported commands is contained in APPENDIX 1. The relay will respond to
other commands with an ASDU 1, with a cause of transmission (COT) of negative
acknowledgement of a command. If the relay takes in account the command, it will answer
with an ASDU 1, with a cause of transmission (COT) of positive acknowledgement.
A blocking command (Control directioncan be introduced using a communication parameter.
5.11 Disturbance records
The disturbance records stored by the relay cannot be extracted using the mechanism
defined in the IEC60870-5-103 standard. A list of the analog channels and tags (logic
signals) for record extraction is indicated in APPENDIX 1.
5.12 Blocking of monitor direction
The relay does not support a facility to block messages in the Monitor direction.IEC 60870-5-
103 DATABASES
P72x/EN CT/A11 Communication database

Page 54/78 MiCOM P721/P723

6. APPENDIX 1
6.1 Spontaneous messages managed by MiCOM P72x
These messages include a sub-assembly of events which are generated on the relay,
because some generated events are not registered in VDEW. They are the most priority
messages.
An event is always generated on the rising edge of the information.
Some events can be generated on the rising or lowering edge.
In the list below, events only generated on rising edge will be tagged with a ‘*’.
Two types of ASDU can be generated for events: ASDU 1 (time-tagged message) or ASDU
2 (time-tagged message with relative time).
The following list of processed events is the list with the private messages option active,
for all Overcurrent protection functions, with the associated FUNCTION Type,
INFORMATION NUMBER, ASDU TYPE, CAUSE OF TRANSMISSION and COMMON
ADDRESS OF ASDU (The corresponding numbers with private messages option inactive
are given just below).
FUN <208>: Function type in Public range for High-impedance Differential Protections
(compatible).
FUN <210>: Function type in Private range (Reserved for High-impedance Differential
Protections).

Status indications in
Availability
monitor direction
LEDs reset: FUN<208>;INF <19>; TYP <1>;
COT<1>;<ADDR>,*
Local parameter Setting active: FUN<208>;INF <22>; TYP <1>;
COT<1>,<ADDR>↑↓
Monitor direction blocked: FUN<208>;INF <20>; TYP <1>;
COT<1>,<ADDR>↑↓
Command direction blocked: FUN<210>;INF <151>; TYP <1>;
COT<1>,<ADDR>↑↓
Setting Group number 1 active: FUN<208>;INF <23>; TYP <1>;
COT<1>,<ADDR>↑↓
Setting Group number 2 active: FUN<208>;INF <24>; TYP <1>;
COT<1>,<ADDR>↑↓
Auxiliary input 1: FUN<208>;INF <27>; TYP <1>;
COT<1>,<ADDR>↑↓
Auxiliary input 2: FUN<208>;INF <28>; TYP <1>;
COT<1>,<ADDR>↑↓
Auxiliary input 3: FUN<208>;INF <29>; TYP <1>;
COT<1>,<ADDR>↑↓
Auxiliary input 4: FUN<208>;INF <30>; TYP <1>;
COT<1>,<ADDR>↑↓
Group Warning (Minor FUN<208>;INF <46>; TYP <1>;
hardware alarm): COT<1>,<ADDR>↑↓
Group Alarm (Major hardware FUN<208>;INF <47>; TYP <1>;
alarm): COT<1>,<ADDR>↑↓
Communication database P72x/EN CT/A11

MiCOM P721/P723 Page 55/78

Status indications in
Availability
monitor direction
Logical input 1: FUN<210>;INF <160>; TYP <1>;
COT<1>,<ADDR>↑↓
Logical input 2: FUN<210>;INF <161>; TYP <1>;
COT<1>,<ADDR>↑↓
Logical input 3: FUN<210>;INF <162>; TYP <1>;
COT<1>,<ADDR>↑↓
Logical input 4: FUN<210>;INF <163>; TYP <1>;
COT<1>,<ADDR>↑↓
Logical input 5: FUN<210>;INF <164>; TYP <1>;
COT<1>,<ADDR>↑↓
Logical output 1: FUN<210>;INF <176>; TYP <1>;
COT<1>,<ADDR>↑↓
Logical output 2: FUN<210>;INF <177>; TYP <1>;
COT<1>,<ADDR>↑↓
Logical output 3: FUN<210>;INF <178>; TYP <1>;
COT<1>,<ADDR>↑↓
Logical output 4: FUN<210>;INF <179>; TYP <1>;
COT<1>,<ADDR>↑↓
Logical output 5 (Watch-dog): FUN<210>;INF <180>; TYP <1>;
COT<1>,<ADDR>↑↓
Logical output 6: FUN<210>;INF <181>; TYP <1>;
COT<1>,<ADDR>↑↓
Logical output 7: FUN<210>;INF <182>; TYP <1>;
COT<1>,<ADDR>↑↓
Logical output 8: FUN<210>;INF <183>; TYP <1>;
COT<1>,<ADDR>↑↓
Logical output 9: FUN<210>;INF <184>; TYP <1>;
COT<1>,<ADDR>↑↓
Logical blocking 1: FUN<210>;INF <30>; TYP <1>;
COT<1>,<ADDR>↑↓
Logical blocking 2: FUN<210>;INF <31>; TYP <1>;
COT<1>,<ADDR>↑↓
Local mode active: FUN<210>;INF <40>; TYP <1>;
COT<1>,<ADDR>↑↓
Time Synchronisation: FUN<210>;INF <226>; TYP <1>; COT<1>;
<ADDR>,*

NOTE: The double arrow ↑↓ means that the event generated on event
occurrence and another event is generated on event disappearing.
P72x/EN CT/A11 Communication database

Page 56/78 MiCOM P721/P723

Supervision Indications in Availability

monitor direction
Start / pick-up [95] Diff>: FUN<210>;INF <9>; TYP <2>;
COT<1>,<ADDR>↑↓
Start / pick-up [87] Diff>>: FUN<210>;INF <10>; TYP <2>;
COT<1>,<ADDR>↑↓
Start / pick-up [95N] Diff>: FUN<210>;INF <12>; TYP <2>;
COT<1>,<ADDR>↑↓
Start / pick-up [87N] Diff>>: FUN<210>;INF <13>; TYP <2>;
COT<1>,<ADDR>↑↓
Start / pick-up Check Zone: FUN<210>;INF <24>; TYP <2>;
COT<1>,<ADDR>↑↓
Start / pick-up Bus Wire FUN<210>;INF <26>; TYP <2>;
Shorting: COT<1>,<ADDR>↑↓
General Trip: FUN<208>;INF <68>; TYP <2>;
COT<1>,<ADDR>,*
General Start / pick-up: FUN<208>;INF <84>; TYP <2>;
COT<1>,<ADDR>↑↓
Breaker failure: FUN<208>;INF <85>; TYP <2>;
COT<1>,<ADDR>,*
Trip [95] Diff>: FUN<210>;INF <17>; TYP <2>;
COT<1>,<ADDR>,*
Trip [95A] Diff>: FUN<210>;INF <42>; TYP <2>;
COT<1>,<ADDR>,*
Trip [95B] Diff>: FUN<210>;INF <43>; TYP <2>;
COT<1>,<ADDR>,*
Trip [95C] Diff>: FUN<210>;INF <44>; TYP <2>;
COT<1>,<ADDR>,*
Trip [87] Diff>>: FUN<210>;INF <18>; TYP <2>;
COT<1>,<ADDR>,*
Trip [95N] Diff>: FUN<210>;INF <20>; TYP <2>;
COT<1>,<ADDR>,*
Trip [87N] Diff>>: FUN<210>;INF <21>; TYP <2>;
COT<1>,<ADDR>,*
Trip Equation A: FUN<210>;INF <144>; TYP
<2>;COT<1>,<ADDR>,↑↓
Trip Equation B: FUN<210>;INF <145>; TYP
<2>;COT<1>,<ADDR>,↑↓
Trip Equation C: FUN<210>;INF <146>; TYP
<2>;COT<1>,<ADDR>,↑↓
Trip Equation D: FUN<210>;INF <147>; TYP
<2>;COT<1>,<ADDR>,↑↓
Trip Equation E: FUN<210>;INF <196>; TYP
<2>;COT<1>,<ADDR>,↑↓
Trip Equation F: FUN<210>;INF <197>; TYP
<2>;COT<1>,<ADDR>,↑↓
Communication database P72x/EN CT/A11

MiCOM P721/P723 Page 57/78

Supervision Indications in Availability

monitor direction
Trip Equation G: FUN<210>;INF <198>; TYP
<2>;COT<1>,<ADDR>,↑↓
Trip Equation H: FUN<210>;INF <199>; TYP
<2>;COT<1>,<ADDR>,↑↓

NOTE: The double arrow ↑↓ means that the event generated on event
occurrence and another event is generated on event disappearing.

Auto-recloser Indications Availability

(monitor direction)
Trip TC: FUN<210>;INF <1>; TYP <1>;
COT<1>,<ADDR>↑↓

NOTE: The double arrow ↑↓ means that the event generated on event
occurrence and another event is generated on event disappearing.

6.2 List of data contained in General Interrogation

It is given in the answer to the General Interrogation (GI).
Relay state information are Class 1 data, they are systematically sent to the master station,
during a General Interrogation.
The list of processed data, following a General Interrogation, is given below: it is a sub-
assembly of the spontaneous message list, so like spontaneous messages, these data are
generated on rising and lowering edge.
Status indications (monitor direction):

Status Indications (monitor direction):

Status Indications (monitor Availability

direction)
Local parameter Setting active: FUN<208>;INF <22>; TYP <1>;
COT<9>,<ADDR>
Monitor direction blocked: FUN<208>;INF <20>; TYP <1>;
COT<9>,<ADDR>
Setting Group number 1 active: FUN<208>;INF <23>; TYP <1>;
COT<9>,<ADDR>
Setting Group number 2 active: FUN<208>;INF <24>; TYP <1>;
COT<9>,<ADDR>
Auxiliary input 1: FUN<208>;INF <27>; TYP <1>;
COT<9>,<ADDR>
Auxiliary input 2: FUN<208>;INF <28>; TYP <1>;
COT<9>,<ADDR>
Auxiliary input 3: FUN<208>;INF <29>; TYP <1>;
COT<9>,<ADDR>
Auxiliary input 4: FUN<208>;INF <30>; TYP <1>;
COT<9>,<ADDR>
P72x/EN CT/A11 Communication database

Page 58/78 MiCOM P721/P723

Status Indications (monitor Availability

direction)
Group Warning (Minor hardware FUN<208>;INF <46>; TYP <1>;
alarm): COT<9>,<ADDR>
Group Alarm (Major hardware FUN<208>;INF <47>; TYP <1>;
alarm): COT<9>,<ADDR>
General Start / pick-up: FUN<208>;INF <84>; TYP <2>;
COT<9>,<ADDR>
Command direction blocked: FUN<210>;INF <151>; TYP <1>;
COT<9>,<ADDR>
Maintenance mode trig: FUN<210>;INF <7>; TYP <1>;
COT<9>,<ADDR>

Fault Indications in monitor Availability

direction
Start / pick-up [95] Diff>: FUN<210>;INF <9>; TYP <2>;
COT<9>,<ADDR>
Start / pick-up [87] Diff>>: FUN<210>;INF <10>; TYP <2>;
COT<9>,<ADDR>
Start / pick-up [95N] Diff >: FUN<210>;INF <12>; TYP <2>;
COT<9>,<ADDR>
Start / pick-up [87N] Diff>>: FUN<210>;INF <13>; TYP <2>;
COT<9>,<ADDR>
Start / pick-up Check Zone: FUN<210>;INF <24>; TYP <2>;
COT<9>,<ADDR>
Start / pick-up Bus Wire Shorting: FUN<210>;INF <26>; TYP <2>;
COT<9>,<ADDR>

Status Indications in monitor

Availability
direction
Logical input 1: FUN<210>;INF <160>; TYP <1>;
COT<9>,<ADDR>
Logical input 2: FUN<210>;INF <161>; TYP <1>;
COT<9>,<ADDR>
Logical input 3: FUN<210>;INF <162>; TYP <1>;
COT<9>,<ADDR>
Logical input 4: FUN<210>;INF <163>; TYP <1>;
COT<9>,<ADDR>
Logical input 5: FUN<210>;INF <164>; TYP <1>;
COT<9>,<ADDR>
Logical output 1: FUN<210>;INF <176>; TYP <1>;
COT<9>,<ADDR>
Logical output 2: FUN<210>;INF <177>; TYP <1>;
COT<9>,<ADDR>
Logical output 3: FUN<210>;INF <178>; TYP <1>;
COT<9>,<ADDR>
Communication database P72x/EN CT/A11

MiCOM P721/P723 Page 59/78

Status Indications in monitor

Availability
direction
Logical output 4: FUN<210>;INF <179>; TYP <1>;
COT<9>,<ADDR>
Logical output 5 (Watch-dog): FUN<210>;INF <180>; TYP <1>;
COT<9>,<ADDR>
Logical output 6: FUN<210>;INF <181>; TYP <1>;
COT<9>,<ADDR>
Logical output 7: FUN<210>;INF <182>; TYP <1>;
COT<9>,<ADDR>
Logical output 8: FUN<210>;INF <183>; TYP <1>;
COT<9>,<ADDR>
Logical output 9: FUN<210>;INF <184>; TYP <1>;
COT<9>,<ADDR>

6.3 Processed Commands

System Commands Availability

Synchronization Command FUN<255>,INF <0>; TYP <6>;COT<8>
(ASDU 6)

This command can be sent to a specific relay, or global. The time sent by master is the time
of the first bit of the frame. The relay synchronizes with this time, corrected by the frame
transmission delay. After updating its time, the relay send back an acknowledge to the
master, by giving its new current time. This acknowledge message will be an event of ASDU
6 type.

− General Interrogation Initialization command (ASDU 7):

This command starts the relay interrogation:

− The relay then sends a list of data containing the relay state (see list described above).

− The GI command contains a scan number which will be included in the answers of the
GI cycle generated by the GI command.
If a data has just changed before extracted by the GI, the new state is sent to the master
station.
When an event is generated during the GI cycle, the event is sent in priority, and the GI cycle
is temporarily interrupted. The end of the GI consists in sending an ASDU 8 to the master
station.
If, during a General Interrogation cycle, another GI Initialization command is received, the
precedent answer is stopped, and the new GI cycle started.

General Commands (ASDU Availability

20) (Control Direction)
LEDs Reset: This command FUN<208>;INF<19>, TYP<20>, COT
acknowledge all alarms on Front <20>,<ADDR>
Panel on MiCOM P72x products:
Setting group number 1: FUN<208>;INF<23>, TYP<20>, COT
<20>,<ADDR>
Setting group number 2: FUN<208>;INF<24>, TYP<20>, COT
<20>,<ADDR>
P72x/EN CT/A11 Communication database

Page 60/78 MiCOM P721/P723

General Commands (ASDU Availability

20) (Control Direction)
Trip TC: FUN<210>;INF <1>; TYP <20>;
COT<20>,<ADDR>
Disturbance trig: FUN<210>;INF <3>; TYP <20>;
COT<20>,<ADDR>
Maintenance mode trig: FUN<210>;INF <7>; TYP <20>;
COT<20>,<ADDR>

After executing one of these commands, the relay sends an acknowledge message, which
contains the result of command execution.
If a state change is the consequence of the command, it must be sent in a ASDU 1 with COT
12 (remote operation).
If the relay receive another command message from the master station before sending the
acknowledge message, it will be discarded.
Commands which are not processed by the relay are rejected with a negative acknowledge
message.
6.4 Relay re initialization
In case of relay re initialization, the relay send to the master station:

Availability
A message indicating relay (FUN<208>;INF <5>; TYP <5> COT <5>)
start/restart:
or a message indicating Reset (FUN<208>;INF <5>; TYP <3> COT <4>)
CU:
or a message indicating Reset (FUN<208>;INF <5>; TYP <2> COT <3>)
FCB :

Each identification message of the relay (ASDU 5) contains the manufacturer name in 8
ASCII characters and 2 free bytes containing: « 721 » or « 723 »,in decimal format, then 2
free bytes containing the software version number in decimal (for ex. : 112 corresponds to
“11.C”).
6.5 Cyclic Messages (Class 2 – measurements)
Only measurands can be stored in these messages.
The measurands values are stored in lower levels of communication, before polling by
master station.
Measurands I1,I2,I3,V1,V2,V3, P, Q FUN<208>;INF <148>; TYP <9>;
COT<2>,<ADDR>

Several of the fields in the ASDU 9 are not used (Voltage and Power values), so they are set
to 0: Only RMS Ia, Ib, Ic values and frequency are stored (with a rate such as: 2,4 * nominal
value = 4096).
Measurands In, Ven FUN<208>;INF <147>; TYP <3>;
COT<2>,<ADDR>

The second ASDU is ASDU3.4 (STRUCT<2>), which contains in first position In earth
current value in rated format (with a rate such as: 2,4 * nominal value = 4096). Ven value
does not exist, so the second position value in ASDU3.4 is set to « unused ».
Communication database P72x/EN CT/A11

MiCOM P721/P723 Page 61/78

6.6 IEC870-5-103 messages for Disturbance record extraction

The disturbance extraction procedure with IEC870-5-103 in MICOM Px2x relays is in
conformance with IEC870-5-103 standard definition.
The maximum disturbance record number stored in a P721 and P723 is 5.
The disturbance record mapping is the following:

− 4 analog channels:

• Channel 1: Ia current (Phase L1).

• Channel 2: Ib current (Phase L2).

• Channel 3: Ic current (Phase L3).

• Channel 4: IN current (Earth).

− 12 Identifiers of tags transmitted in ASDU 29 (logical informations):

• Tag number 1: General start: FUN <208> INF <84>

• Tag number 2: CB Failure: FUN <208> INF <85>

• Tag number 3: General Trip: FUN <208> INF <68>

• Tag number 4: [95] Diff>: FUN <210> INF <17>

• Tag number 5: [87] Diff>>: FUN <210> INF <18>

• Tag number 6 [95N] Diff>: FUN <210> INF <20>

• Tag number 7 [87N] Diff>>: FUN <210> INF <21>

• Tag number 8 Log input 1: FUN <210> INF <160>

• Tag number 9 Log input 2: FUN <210> INF <161>

• Tag number 10 Log input 3: FUN <210> INF <162>

• Tag number 11 Log input 4: FUN <210> INF <163>

• Tag number 12 Log input 5: FUN <210> INF <164>

P72x/EN CT/A11 Communication database

Page 62/78 MiCOM P721/P723

BLANK PAGE
Communication database P72x/EN CT/A11

MiCOM P721/P723

DNP 3.0 DATABASE

MiCOM P721/P723
VERSION V11
P72x/EN CT/A11 Communication database

Page 64/78 MiCOM P721/P723

BLANK PAGE
Communication database P72x/EN CT/A11

MiCOM P721/P723 Page 65/78

CONTENTS

1. INTRODUCTION 67
1.1 Purpose of this document 67
1.2 DNP V3.00 device Profile 67
1.3 Implementation Table 70
1.4 Point List 72
1.4.1 Binary Input Points 72
1.4.2 Binary Output Status Points and Control Relay Output Blocks 74
1.4.3 Counters 75
1.4.4 Analog Inputs 76
P72x/EN CT/A11 Communication database

Page 66/78 MiCOM P721/P723

BLANK PAGE
Communication database P72x/EN CT/A11

MiCOM P721/P723 Page 67/78

1. INTRODUCTION

1.1 Purpose of this document

The purpose of this document is to describe the specific implementation of the Distributed
Network Protocol (DNP) 3.0 within P72x MiCOM relays.
P72x uses the Triangle MicroWorks, Inc. DNP 3.0 Slave Source Code Library Version 2.18.
This document, in conjunction with the DNP 3.0 Basic 4 Document Set, and the DNP Subset
Definitions Document, provides complete information on how to communicate with P72x via
the DNP 3.0 protocol.
This implementation of DNP 3.0 is fully compliant with DNP 3.0 Subset Definition Level 2,
contains many Subset Level 3 features, and contains some functionality even beyond
Subset Level 3.

1.2 DNP V3.00 device Profile

The following table provides a “Device Profile Document” in the standard format defined in
the DNP 3.0 Subset Definitions Document. While it is referred to in the DNP 3.0 Subset
Definitions as a “Document,” it is only a component of a total interoperability guide. This
table, in combination with the following should provide a complete
interoperability/configuration guide for P72x:

• the Implementation Table provided in Section 1.3 (beginning on page 70),

• the Point List Tables provided in Section 1.4 (beginning on page 72),

• and a description of configuration methods and user-interface in Sections

P72x/EN CT/A11 Communication database

Page 68/78 MiCOM P721/P723

DNP V3.00
DEVICE PROFILE DOCUMENT
(ALSO SEE THE IMPLEMENTATION TABLE IN SECTION 1.3, BEGINNING ON PAGE 70).
Vendor Name: Schneider Electric
Device Name: SERIAL 20 Platform using the Triangle MicroWorks, Inc. DNP 3.0 Slave
Source Code Library, Version 2.18.
Highest DNP Level Supported: Device Function:

For Requests: Level 2 Master

For Responses: Level 2 Slave
Notable objects, functions, and/or qualifiers supported in addition to the Highest DNP Levels
Supported (the complete list is described in the attached table):

For static (non-change-event) object requests, request qualifier codes 00 and 01 (start-
stop), 07 and 08 (limited quantity), and 17 and 28 (index) are supported in addition to
request qualifier code 06 (no range – or all points).
Static object requests received with qualifiers 00, 01, 06, 07, or 08, will be responded with
qualifiers 00 or 01. Static object requests received with qualifiers 17 or 28 will be
responded with qualifiers 17 or 28.
For change-event object requests, qualifiers 17 or 28 are always responded.
16-bit and 32-bit Analog Change Events with Time may be requested.
The read function code for Object 50 (Time and Date), variation 1, is supported.
Maximum Data Link Frame Size (octets): Maximum Application Fragment Size (octets):
Transmitted: 292 Transmitted: 2048
Received 292 Received: 2048
Maximum Data Link Re-tries: Maximum Application Layer Re-tries:
None
Fixed at 2 None
Configurable Configurable
Requires Data Link Layer Confirmation:
Never
Always
Sometimes
Configurable
Requires Application Layer Confirmation:

Never
Always
When reporting Event Data
When sending multi-fragment responses
Sometimes
Configurable
Timeouts while waiting for:

Data Link Confirm: None Fixed (100 ms) Variable Configurable.

Complete Appl. Fragment: None Fixed at ____ Variable Configurable
Application Confirm: None Fixed (1s) Variable Configurable
Complete Appl. Response: None Fixed at ____ Variable Configurable

Others:
Binary input change scanning period: 5ms
Analog input change scanning period: 1s
Communication database P72x/EN CT/A11

MiCOM P721/P723 Page 69/78

DNP V3.00
DEVICE PROFILE DOCUMENT
(ALSO SEE THE IMPLEMENTATION TABLE IN SECTION 1.3, BEGINNING ON PAGE 70).
Sends/Executes Control Operations:

WRITE Binary Outputs Never Always Sometimes Configurable

SELECT/OPERATE Never Always Sometimes Configurable
DIRECT OPERATE Never Always Sometimes Configurable
DIRECT OPERATE – NO ACK Never Always Sometimes Configurable

Count > 1 Never Always Sometimes Configurable

Pulse On Never Always Sometimes Configurable
Pulse Off Never Always Sometimes Configurable
Latch On Never Always Sometimes Configurable
Latch Off Never Always Sometimes Configurable

Queue Never Always Sometimes Configurable

Clear Queue Never Always Sometimes Configurable
Reports Binary Input Change Events when Reports time-tagged Binary Input Change Events
no specific variation requested: when no specific variation requested:

Never Never
Only time-tagged for P721 and Binary Input Change With Time for
P723 P721 and P723
Only non-time-tagged Binary Input Change With Relative Time
Configurable Configurable (attach explanation)
Sends Unsolicited Responses: Sends Static Data in Unsolicited Responses:

Never Never
Configurable When Device Restarts
Only certain objects When Status Flags Change
Sometimes (attach explanation)
ENABLE/DISABLE UNSOLICITED No other options are permitted.
Function codes supported
Default Counter Object/Variation: Counters Roll Over at:

No Counters Reported No Counters Reported

Configurable Configurable (attach explanation)
Default Object: 20 16 Bits
Default Variation: 5 32 Bits
Point-by-point list attached Other Value: _____
Point-by-point list attached
Sends Multi-Fragment Responses:
Yes
No
P72x/EN CT/A11 Communication database

Page 70/78 MiCOM P721/P723

1.3 Implementation Table

The following table identifies the variations, function codes, and qualifiers supported by the
P72x in both request messages and in response messages.
For static (non-change-event) objects, requests sent with qualifiers 00, 01, 06, 07, or 08, will
be responded with qualifiers 00 or 01. Static object requests sent with qualifiers 17 or 28 will
be responded with qualifiers 17 or 28. For change-event objects, qualifiers 17 or 28 are
always responded.

In the table below the text shaded as indicates

Subset Level 3
Subset Level 3 functionality
beyond Subset Level Indicates
(beyond Subset Level 2), and text shaded as
3 functionality
beyond Subset Level 3.

REQUEST RESPONSE
OBJECT
(Library will parse) (Library will respond with)
Object Variation Function Codes Qualifier Function Qualifier
Description (dec)
Number Number Codes (hex) Codes (dec) Codes (hex)
1 0 Binary Input (Variation 0 is used 1 (read) 00, 01 (start-stop)
06 (no range, or all)
to request default variation) 07, 08 (limited qty)
17, 28 (index)
1 1 Binary Input 1 (read) 00, 01 (start-stop) 129 (response) 00, 01 (start-stop)
(default – 22 06 (no range, or all) 17, 28 (index –
see note 1) 07, 08 (limited qty) see note 2)
17, 28 (index)
1 2 Binary Input with Status 1 (read) 00, 01 (start-stop) 129 (response) 00, 01 (start-stop)
06 (no range, or all) 17, 28 (index –
07, 08 (limited qty) see note 2)
17, 28 (index
2 0 Binary Input Change (Variation 0 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all)
07, 08 (limited qty)
is used to request default
variation)
2 1(default – Binary Input Change without 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all) 129 (response) 17, 28 (index)
see note1) 07, 08 (limited qty)
Time
2 2 Binary Input Change with Time 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all) 129 (response) 17, 28 (index)
(default – 07, 08 (limited qty)
see note 1)
10 0 Binary Output Status (Variation 0 1 (read) 00, 01 (start-stop)
06 (no range, or all)
is used to request default 07, 08 (limited qty)
variation) 17, 28 (index)
10 2 Binary Output Status 1 (read) 00, 01 (start-stop) 129 (response) 00, 01 (start-stop)
(default – 06 (no range, or all) 17, 28 (index –
see note 1) 07, 08 (limited qty) see note 2)
17, 28 (index)
12 1 Control Relay Output Block 3 (select) 00, 01 (start-stop) 129 (response) echo of request
4 (operate) 07, 08 (limited qty)
5 (direct op) 17, 28 (index)
6 (dir. op, noack)
20 0 Binary Counter (Variation 0 is 1 (read) 00, 01 (start-stop)
7 (freeze) 06 (no range, or all)
used to request default variation) 8 (freeze noack) 07, 08 (limited qty)
9 (freeze clear) 17, 28 (index)
10 (frz. cl. Noack)
20 1 32-Bit Binary Counter 1 (read) 00, 01 (start-stop) 129 (response) 00, 01 (start-stop)
7 (freeze) 06 (no range, or all) 17, 28 (index –
8 (freeze noack) 07, 08 (limited qty) see note 2)
9 (freeze clear) 17, 28 (index)
10 (frz. cl. Noack)
20 2 16-Bit Binary Counter 1 (read) 00, 01 (start-stop) 129 (response) 00, 01 (start-stop)
7 (freeze) 06 (no range, or all) 17, 28 (index –
8 (freeze noack) 07, 08 (limited qty) see note 2)
9 (freeze clear) 17, 28 (index)
10 (frz. cl. Noack)
20 5 32-Bit Binary Counter without 1 (read) 00, 01 (start-stop) 129 (response) 00, 01 (start-stop)
7 (freeze) 06 (no range, or all) 17, 28 (index –
Flag 8 (freeze noack) 07, 08 (limited qty) see note 2)
9 (freeze clear) 17, 28 (index)
10 (frz. cl. Noack)
20 6 16-Bit Binary Counter without 1 (read) 00, 01 (start-stop) 129 (response) 00, 01 (start-stop)
7 (freeze) 06 (no range, or all) 17, 28 (index –
Flag 8 (freeze noack) 07, 08 (limited qty) see note 2)
9 (freeze clear) 17, 28 (index)
10 (frz. cl. Noack)
Communication database P72x/EN CT/A11

MiCOM P721/P723 Page 71/78

REQUEST RESPONSE
OBJECT
(Library will parse) (Library will respond with)
Object Variation Function Codes Qualifier Function Qualifier
Description (dec)
Number Number Codes (hex) Codes (dec) Codes (hex)
21 0 Frozen Counter (Variation 0 is 1 (read) 00, 01 (start-stop)
06 (no range, or all)
used to request default variation) 07, 08 (limited qty)
17, 28 (index)
21 1 32-Bit Frozen Counter 1 (read) 00, 01 (start-stop) 129 (response) 00, 01 (start-stop)
06 (no range, or all) 17, 28 (index –
07, 08 (limited qty) see note 2)
17, 28 (index)
21 2 16-Bit Frozen Counter 1 (read) 00, 01 (start-stop) 129 (response) 00, 01 (start-stop)
06 (no range, or all) 17, 28 (index –
07, 08 (limited qty) see note 2)
17, 28 (index)
21 9 32-Bit Frozen Counter without 1 (read) 00, 01 (start-stop) 129 (response) 00, 01 (start-stop)
06 (no range, or all) 17, 28 (index –
Flag 07, 08 (limited qty) see note 2)
17, 28 (index)
21 10 16-Bit Frozen Counter without 1 (read) 00, 01 (start-stop) 129 (response) 00, 01 (start-stop)
06 (no range, or all) 17, 28 (index –
Flag 07, 08 (limited qty) see note 2)
17, 28 (index)
30 0 Analog Input (Variation 0 is used 1 (read) 00, 01 (start-stop)
06 (no range, or all)
to request default variation) 07, 08 (limited qty)
17, 28 (index)
30 1 32-Bit Analog Input 1 (read) 00, 01 (start-stop) 129 (response) 00, 01 (start-stop)
(default – 06 (no range, or all) 17, 28 (index –
see note 1 07, 08 (limited qty) see note 2)
17, 28 (index)
30 2 16-Bit Analog Input 1 (read) 00, 01 (start-stop) 129 (response) 00, 01 (start-stop)
06 (no range, or all) 17, 28 (index –
07, 08 (limited qty) see note 2)
17, 28 (index)
30 3 32-Bit Analog Input without Flag 1 (read) 00, 01 (start-stop) 129 (response) 00, 01 (start-stop)
06 (no range, or all) 17, 28 (index –
07, 08 (limited qty) see note 2)
17, 28 (index)
30 4 16-Bit Analog Input without Flag 1 (read) 00, 01 (start-stop) 129 (response) 00, 01 (start-stop)
06 (no range, or all) 17, 28 (index –
07, 08 (limited qty) see note 2)
17, 28 (index)
32 0 Analog Change Event (Variation 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all)
07, 08 (limited qty)
0 is used to request default
variation)
32 1 32-Bit Analog Change Event 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all) 129 (response) 17, 28 (index)
(default – 07, 08 (limited qty)
without Time
see note 1)
32 2 16-Bit Analog Change Event 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all) 129 (response) 17, 28 (index)
07, 08 (limited qty)
without Time
32 3 32-Bit Analog Change Event with 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all) 129 (response) 17, 28 (index)
07, 08 (limited qty)
Time
32 4 16-Bit Analog Change Event with 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all) 129 (response) 17, 28 (index)
07, 08 (limited qty)
Time
50 0 Time and Date 1 (read) 00, 01 (start-stop) 129 (response) 00, 01 (start-stop)
06 (no range, or all) 17, 28 (index –
07, 08 (limited qty) see note 2)
17, 28 (index)
50 1 Time and Date 1 (read) 00, 01 (start-stop) 129 (response) 00, 01 (start-stop)
(default – 2 (write) 06 (no range, or all) 17, 28 (index –
see note 1) 07 (limited qty=1) see note 2)
08 (limited qty)
17, 28 (index)
52 2 Time Delay Fine 129 (response) 07 (limited qty)
(qty = 1)
60 0 Class 0, 1, 2, and 3 Data 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all)

60 1 Class 0 Data 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all) 129 17,28

60 2 Class 1 Data 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all) 129 17,28

07, 08 (limited qty)
60 3 Class 2 Data 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all) 129 17,28
07, 08 (limited qty)
60 4 Class 3 Data 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all) 129 17,28
07, 08 (limited qty)
80 1 Internal Indications 2 (write) 00 (start-stop)
(index must =7)
No Object (function code only) –See 13 (cold restart)
Note 3
No Object (function code only) 14 (warm restart)
No Object (function code only) 23 (delay meas.)

Note 1: A Default variation refers to the variation responded when variation 0

is requested and/or in class 0, 1, 2, or 3 scans.
P72x/EN CT/A11 Communication database

Page 72/78 MiCOM P721/P723

Note 2: For static (non-change-event) objects, qualifiers 17 or 28 are only

responded when a request is sent with qualifiers 17 or 28,
respectively. Otherwise, static object requests sent with qualifiers 00,
01, 06, 07, or 08, will be responded with qualifiers 00 or 01. (For
change-event objects, qualifiers 17 or 28 are always responded.)
Note 3: For P72x, a cold restart is implemented as a warm restart – the
executable is not restarted, but the DNP process is restarted.

1.4 Point List

The tables in the following sections identify all the individual data points provided by this
implementation of DNP 3.0. uses the database protection.
1.4.1 Binary Input Points
Every Binary Input Status points are included in class 0 polls, because they are included in
one of classes 1, 2 or 3.

Binary Input Points

Static (Steady-State) Object Number: 1
Change Event Object Number: 2
Request Function Codes supported: 1 (read)
Static Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 1 (Binary Input without status)
Change Event Variation reported when variation 0 requested:
2 (Binary Input Change with
Time) for P721 and P723
P72x P721 P723 Change Event
Point Presence Presence Name/Description init val. Class (1, 2, 3 or
Index none)
0 X X Output relay 1 (trip) 0 1
1 X X Output relay 2 0 2
2 X X Output relay 3 0 2
3 X X Output relay 4 0 2
4 X X Output relay 0 ( watch dog) 0 2
5 X Output relay 5 0 2
6 X Output relay 6 0 2
7 X Output relay 7 0 2
8 X Output relay 8 0 2
9 X X Opto isolator 1 0 2
10 X X Opto isolator 2 0 2
11 X Opto isolator 3 0 2
12 X Opto isolator 4 0 2
13 X Opto isolator 5 0 2
14 X [95] diff> start 0 1
15 X [95] tdiff> trip 0 1
16 X [87] diff>> start 0 1
17 X [87] tdiff>> trip 0 1
18 X X [95N] diff> start 0 1
19 X X [95N] tdiff> trip 0 1
20 X X [87N] diff>> start 0 1
21 X X [87N] tdiff>> trip 0 1
22 X X [87CZ] check zone 0 1
23 X X Buswire shorting 0 1
24 X X tAux1 0 1
25 X X tAux2 0 1
26 X X tAux3 0 1
27 X X tAux4 0 1
28 X X Blocking Logic 1 0 1
Communication database P72x/EN CT/A11

MiCOM P721/P723 Page 73/78

Binary Input Points

Static (Steady-State) Object Number: 1
Change Event Object Number: 2
Request Function Codes supported: 1 (read)
Static Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 1 (Binary Input without status)
Change Event Variation reported when variation 0 requested:
2 (Binary Input Change with
Time) for P721 and P723
P72x P721 P723 Change Event
Point Presence Presence Name/Description init val. Class (1, 2, 3 or
Index none)
29 X X Blocking Logic 2 0 1
30 X X De latching by a logic input 0 1
31 X X De latching of the Tripping output relay by remote order 0 1
32 X X Tripping order by remote order 0 1
33 X CB Failure (50BF) 0 1
34 X X tEquation A 0 1
35 X X tEquation B 0 1
36 X X tEquation C 0 1
37 X X tEquation D 0 1
38 X X tEquation E 0 1
39 X X tEquation F 0 1
40 X X tEquation G 0 1
41 X X tEquation H 0 1
42 X X Shifting to maintenance mode 0 1
43 X X Major material Alarms 0 1
44 X X Minor material Alarms 0 1
45 X X Latching of Relay 0 2
46 X [95] tdiff> trip alarm (latched) 0 3
47 X [87] tdiff>> trip alarm (latched) 0 3
48 X X [95N] tdiff> trip alarm (latched) 0 3
49 X X [87N] tdiff>> trip alarm (latched) 0 3
50 X X [87CZ] check zone alarm (latched) 0 3
51 X X Buswire shorting alarm (latched) 0 3
52 X X tAux1 alarm (latched) 0 3
53 X X tAux2 alarm (latched) 0 3
54 X X tAux3 alarm (latched) 0 3
55 X X tAux4 alarm (latched) 0 3
56 X CB Failure alarm (50BF) (latched) 0 3
57 X X tEquation A (latched) 0 3
58 X X tEquation B (latched) 0 3
59 X X tEquation C (latched) 0 3
60 X X tEquation D (latched) 0 3
61 X X tEquation E (latched) 0 3
62 X X tEquation F (latched) 0 3
63 X X tEquation G (latched) 0 3
64 X X tEquation H (latched) 0 3
P72x/EN CT/A11 Communication database

Page 74/78 MiCOM P721/P723

1.4.2 Binary Output Status Points and Control Relay Output Blocks
The following table lists both the Binary Output Status Points (Object 10) and the Control
Relay Output Blocks (Object 12). Binary Output Status points are not included in class 0
polls.

Binary Output Status Points

Object Number: 10
Request Function Codes supported: 1 (read)
Default Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 2 (Binary Output Status)
Control Relay Output Blocks
Object Number: 12
Request Function Codes supported: 3 (select), 4 (operate),
5 (direct operate), 6 (direct operate, noack)
P72x
Point P721 P723 Initial Status Supported Control Relay
Name/Description
Inde presence presence Value Output Block Fields
x
0 X X De Latch of relays 0 Unpaired Pulse On,
Paired Trip/Pulse On,
Paired Close/Pulse On
1 X X Acknowledgement of the 1st alarm 0 Unpaired Pulse On,
Paired Trip/Pulse On,
Paired Close/Pulse On
2 X X Acknowledgement of all the alarms 0 Unpaired Pulse On,
Paired Trip/Pulse On,
Paired Close/Pulse On
3 X X Remote control Tripping 0 Unpaired Pulse On,
Paired Trip/Pulse On,
4 X X Change of Active Group 0 Unpaired Pulse On,
Paired Trip/Pulse On,
Paired Close/Pulse On
5 X maximum RMS values reset 0 Unpaired Pulse On,
Paired Trip/Pulse On,
Paired Close/Pulse On
6 X X Disturbance remote start 0 Unpaired Pulse On,
Paired Trip/Pulse On,
Paired Close/Pulse On
7 X X Maintenance mode enabling 0 Unpaired Pulse On,
Paired Trip/Pulse On,
Paired Close/Pulse On
8 X X Maintenance mode disabling 0 Unpaired Pulse On,
Paired Trip/Pulse On,
Paired Close/Pulse On
Communication database P72x/EN CT/A11

MiCOM P721/P723 Page 75/78

1.4.3 Counters
The following table lists both Binary Counters (Object 20) and Frozen Counters (Object 21).
When a freeze function is performed on a Binary Counter point, the frozen value is available
in the corresponding Frozen Counter point.
Binary Counters and Frozen Counters are not included in class 0 polls.
P721 does not support binary Counters and Frozen Counters.

Binary Counters
Static (Steady-State) Object Number: 20
Change Event Object Number: not supported
Request Function Codes supported: 1 (read), 7 (freeze), 8 (freeze noack)
9 (freeze and clear), 10 (freeze and clear, noack)
Static Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 5 (32-Bit Binary Counter without Flag
Change Event Variation reported when variation 0 requested: none-not supported
Frozen Counters
Static (Steady-State) Object Number: 21
Change Event Object Number: not supported
Request Function Codes supported: 1 (read)
Static Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 9 (32-Bit Frozen Binary without Flag)
Change Event Variation reported when variation 0 requested: none-not supported
P723
Point Name/Description Data type
Index
0 Max RMS current phase A (A/100) D1
1 Max RMS current phase B (A/100) D1
2 Max RMS current phase C (A/100) D1
P72x/EN CT/A11 Communication database

Page 76/78 MiCOM P721/P723

1.4.4 Analog Inputs

The following table lists Analog Inputs (Object 30). It is important to note that 16-bit and
32-bit variations of Analog Inputs, Analog Output Control Blocks, and Analog Output
Statuses are transmitted through DNP as signed numbers. Even for analog input points that
are not valid as negative values, the maximum positive representation is 32767. For each
point, the “Scaling and Units” column indicates the value of a transmitted 32767. This also
implies the value of a transmitted –32767. The entry in the column does not imply a valid
value for the point.
Always indicating the representation of 32767 in the tables below is a consistent method for
representing scale, applicable to all scaling possibilities.
The “Default Deadband,” and the “Default Change Event Assigned Class” columns are used
to represent the absolute amount by which the point must change before an analog change
event will be generated, and once generated in which class poll (1, 2, 3) will the change
event be reported. Only the default values for these columns are documented here because
the values may change in operation due to either local (user-interface) or remote (through
DNP) control.
Every Analog Inputs points are included in class 0 polls, because they are included in one of
classes 1, 2 or 3.

Analog Inputs
Static (Steady-State) Object Number: 30
Change Event Object Number: 32
Request Function Codes supported: 1 (read)
Static Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 1 (32-Bit Analog Input)
Change Event Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 1 (32-Bit Analog Change Event w/o
Time)
Change Event Scan Rate: The scan rate for analog input change events is fixed at 1s
Scaling
and Units
P72x Change
(represent Initial Change
Point P721 P723 Initial Valid Event
Name/Description ation of Event Class (1,
Inde presence presence Value Range Dead-
32767 – 2, 3 or none)
x band
see
above)
0 X X Active Group 1 32767 1à2 1 1
1 X Magnitude IA 0 10 In 0 to 10 In 0.4 %In 3
2 X Magnitude IB 0 10 In 0 to 10 In 0.4 %In 3
3 X Magnitude IC 0 10 In 0 to 10 In 0.4 %In 3
4 X X Magnitude IN 0 2 IEn 0 to 2 IEn 0.08 % 3
IEn
5 X rms IA 0A 327.67A 0 to 3
10000000 2%
A/100
6 X rms IB 0A 327.67A 0 to 3
10000000 2%
A/100
7 X rms IC 0A 327.67A 0 to 3
10000000 2%
A/100
8 X X rms IN 0A 327.67A 0 to 3
10000000 2%
A/100
9 X X Frequency 0 327,67 Hz 45Hz to 1Hz 3
65 Hz and
99.99Hz
== ERROR
10 X X Fault number 0 32767 0 to 65535 1 2
11 X X group 0 32767 1 to 2 each new 2
fault
12 X X Fault phase 0 32767 0 to 8 (F1) each new 2
fault
13 X X Fault origin 0 32767 0 to 26 (F2) each new 2
fault
Communication database P72x/EN CT/A11

MiCOM P721/P723 Page 77/78

Analog Inputs
Static (Steady-State) Object Number: 30
Change Event Object Number: 32
Request Function Codes supported: 1 (read)
Static Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 1 (32-Bit Analog Input)
Change Event Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 1 (32-Bit Analog Change Event w/o
Time)
Change Event Scan Rate: The scan rate for analog input change events is fixed at 1s
Scaling
and Units
P72x Change
(represent Initial Change
Point P721 P723 Initial Valid Event
Name/Description ation of Event Class (1,
Inde presence presence Value Range Dead-
32767 – 2, 3 or none)
x band
see
above)
14 X X Fault magnitude 0 10 In 0 to 10 In each new 2
fault
15 X Fault magnitude IA 0 10 In 0 to 10 In each new 2
fault
16 X Fault magnitude IB 0 10 In 0 to 10 In each new 2
fault
17 X Fault magnitude IC 0 10 In 0 to 10 In each new 2
fault
18 X X Fault magnitude IN 0 2 IEn 0 to 2 IEn each new 2
fault

Format:
F1:
0: None, 1: Phase A, 2: Phase B, 3: Phase C, 4: Phase AB, 5: Phase AC, 6: Phase BC, 7:
Phase A B C, 8: Earth.
F2:
0: Null, 1: Remote trip, 2: … (See format F78 in MODBUS conception document).
P72x/EN CT/A11 Communication database

Page 78/78 MiCOM P721/P723

BLANK PAGE
Commissioning and Maintenance P72x/EN CM/C21

MiCOM P721/P723

COMMISSIONING AND
MAINTENANCE GUIDE
Commissioning and Maintenance P72x/EN CM/C21

MiCOM P721/P723 Page 1/28

CONTENTS

1. REQUIREMENTS PRIOR TO COMMISSIONING 3

2. COMMISSIONING TEST ENVIRONMENT 4

2.1 Important notes 4
2.1.1 Injection test sets 4
2.1.2 Additional commissioning test equipment 4
2.1.3 Communication 4
2.2 Commissioning test sheets 4

3. PRODUCT VERIFICATION TESTS 5

3.1 Allocation of terminals 5
3.2 Electrostatic discharge (ESD) 5
3.3 Visual inspection 5
3.4 Earthing 5
3.5 Current transformers (CTs) 5
3.6 Auxiliary supply 6
3.7 Logic inputs 6
3.8 Logic outputs 7
3.9 RS 485 rear communication 7

4. SETTING CHECK 8
4.1 Settings 8
4.2 Measurements 8
4.2.1 MiCOM P721 8
4.2.2 MiCOM P723 8
4.3 Phase differential proteciton ([87] Threshold I Diff]) 9
4.3.1 Test wiring diagram 9
4.3.2 MiCOM settings 11
4.3.3 [87] Threshold I Diff with Fourier mode 11
4.3.4 [87] Threshold I Diff with Sample mode 12
4.3.5 [87] Threshold I Diff with Fast mode 12
4.4 Earth differential protection ([87N] Threshold I Diff) 13
4.4.1 Test wiring diagram 13
4.4.2 MiCOM settings 14
4.4.3 [87N] Threshold I Diff with Fourier mode 15
4.4.4 [87N] Threshold I Diff with Sample mode 15
4.4.5 [87N] Threshold I Diff with Fast mode 16
P72x/EN CM/C21 Commissioning and Maintenance

Page 2/28 MiCOM P721/P723

4.5 Phase bus wire supervision ([95] Phase Bus-Wire Sup) 16

4.5.1 Test wiring diagram 16
4.5.2 MiCOM settings 16
4.5.3 [95] Threshold I Sup with Fourier mode 17
4.5.4 [95] Threshold I Sup with Sample mode 17
4.5.5 [95] Threshold I Sup with Fast mode 18
4.6 Earth bus wire supervision ([95N] Earth Bus-Wire Sup) 19
4.7 REF/BEF Primary Injection Tests 19
4.7.1 Correct set up check 19
4.8 Busbar Primary Injection Tests 21
4.9 Final checks 23

5. MAINTENANCE 24
5.1 Equipment failure 24
5.1.1 Minor fault 24
5.1.2 Major fault 24
5.1.3 Hardware and software faults 25
5.2 Method of repair 25
5.2.1 Replacing the active part 25
5.2.2 Replacing the complete relay 25
5.3 Problem solving 26
5.3.1 Password lost or not accepted 26
5.3.2 Communication 26
Commissioning and Maintenance P72x/EN CM/C21

MiCOM P721/P723 Page 3/28

1. REQUIREMENTS PRIOR TO COMMISSIONING

The MiCOM P72x relays are fully numerical in their design, implementing all protection and
non-protection functions in software. The MiCOM relays use a high degree of self-checking
and, in the unlikely event of a failure, will give an alarm. As a result of this, the
commissioning tests do not need to be as extensive as with non-numerical relays (static or
electromechanical).
To commission MiCOM relays, it is only necessary to verify that the hardware is functioning
correctly and that the application-specific software settings have been applied to the MiCOM
relay. It is considered unnecessary to test every function of the relay if the settings have
been verified by one of the following methods:

• Extracting the settings applied to the relay using the appropriate setting software
MiCOM S1 (preferred method)

• From the front panel user interface.

REMINDER: It is not possible to download new setting software while the
programming mode is active.
To confirm that the product is operating correctly once the application-specific settings have
been applied, a test should be performed on a single protection element.
Unless previously agreed to the contrary, the customer will be responsible for determining
the application-specific settings to be applied to the MiCOM relays and for testing of any
scheme logic applied by external wiring.
Blank commissioning test sheets and commissioning setting record sheets are provided in
the Commissioning Test and Record Sheets (RS) chapter.
BEFORE CARRYING OUT ANY WORK ON THE EQUIPMENT, THE
USER SHOULD BE FAMILIAR WITH THE CONTENTS OF THE SAFETY
GUIDE SFTY/4LM/G11 OR LATER ISSUE, OR THE SAFETY AND
TECHNICAL DATA SECTION OF THE TECHNICAL MANUAL AND ALSO
THE RATINGS ON THE EQUIPMENT RATING LABEL.
P72x/EN CM/C21 Commissioning and Maintenance

Page 4/28 MiCOM P721/P723

2. COMMISSIONING TEST ENVIRONMENT

2.1 Important notes
All commissioning tests of MiCOM P721 and P723 relays are carried out by injecting
currents to the secondary of the earth and/or phase CTs using the appropriate injection test
sets provided for this purpose.
2.1.1 Injection test sets
For convenience (weight, space, transportation), a single-phase injection test set is more
suitable for commissioning and can perform all commissioning tests for the MiCOM P72x
relay.
The following descriptions indicate how to conduct the commissioning tests with a single-
phase injection test set.
However, for certain commissioning tests, the three-phase wiring diagrams are easier to
understand and in this case the description is also given in three-phase format.
Single-phase injection test set
1 current (0 to 50 A), timer (precision 1 ms).
Three-phase injection test set
3 currents (0 to 50 A), timer (precision 1 ms).
2.1.2 Additional commissioning test equipment

− 1 multimeter (precision 1%),

− 1 connecting terminal to measure the currents exceeding 10 A (precision 2%),

− Test plugs and wires to carry out injections to the CT's secondary (dimensions
according to the currents injected).
2.1.3 Communication
For all commissioning tests, the records can be downloaded using the RS232 front
communication port in the P72x.
According to each RS 485 communication protocol (MODBUS, Courier, IEC 60870-5-103,
DNP3.0).
2.2 Commissioning test sheets
Blank commissioning test sheets are provided in the Commissioning Test and Record
Sheets (RS) chapter.
The Commissioning test sheets enable you to log:

− The name of the relay, station and circuit

− The characteristics of the MiCOM P72x relay

− The various settings

− The results of the protection and automation checks

− The result of the test records after commissioning.

Commissioning and Maintenance P72x/EN CM/C21

MiCOM P721/P723 Page 5/28

3. PRODUCT VERIFICATION TESTS

BEFORE CARRYING OUT ANY WORK ON THE EQUIPMENT, THE
USER SHOULD BE FAMILIAR WITH THE CONTENTS OF THE SAFETY
GUIDE SFTY/4LM/E11 OR LATER ISSUE, OR THE SAFETY AND
TECHNICAL DATA SECTIONS OF THE TECHNICAL MANUAL AND
ALSO THE RATINGS ON THE EQUIPMENT RATING LABEL.

3.1 Allocation of terminals

Consult the appropriate wiring diagrams in the Connection Diagrams (CO) chapter while
observing the various polarities and ground/earth connections.
3.2 Electrostatic discharge (ESD)
The case of the P72x protects it from electrostatic discharge. Do not remove the front panel
unnecessarily.
A person’s normal movements can generate high electrostatic voltages which can cause
serious damage to electronic components. The damage is not always immediately apparent
but can reduce reliability.
For further details see the chapter Handling Installation and Case Dimensions (IN).
3.3 Visual inspection
Carefully examine the relay to see if there has been any possible deterioration following
installation.
Check the external wiring corresponds to the appropriate relay diagram or the assembly
diagram. The reference number of the relay diagram is on a label under the upper flap of the
front panel.
When the relay is withdrawn from its case, use a continuity tester to check if the current
short-circuits (phases and earth CTs) between the terminals indicated on the wiring diagram
are closed.
3.4 Earthing
Check if the earth connection of the case situated above the rear terminal block is used to
connect the relay to a local earth bar. With several relays present, make sure that the copper
earth bar is properly installed for solidly connecting the earthing terminals of each case.
3.5 Current transformers (CTs)
WARNING: NEVER OPEN CIRCUIT THE SECONDARY CIRCUIT OF A CURRENT
TRANSFORMER SINCE THE HIGH VOLTAGE PRODUCED MAY BE
LETHAL AND COULD DAMAGE INSULATION.
P72x/EN CM/C21 Commissioning and Maintenance

Page 6/28 MiCOM P721/P723

3.6 Auxiliary supply

Check the value of the auxiliary supply voltage (terminals 33 and 34). The value measured
shall be between 0.8 and 1.2 times the dc nominal auxiliary supply voltage, or 0.8 and 1.1
times the ac nominal auxiliary supply voltage indicated on the MiCOM P72x.

Maximum peak value

Uaux range (Volts) Uaux nominal zone (Volts)
(Volts)
24 - 60 Vdc 19 - 72 Vdc 80
48 - 250 Vdc/48 - 240 Vac 38 - 300 Vdc/38 - 264 Vac 336
24 - 250 Vdc/24 - 240 Vac 19 - 300 Vdc/19 - 264 Vac 336

3.7 Logic inputs

This test checks that all the opto-isolated inputs are functioning correctly. The P723 relays
have 5 opto-isolated inputs whereas the P721 relays have 2 opto-isolated inputs.
The opto inputs should be energized one at a time. The status of the input can be viewed
using the menu OP. PARAMETERS > Input Status. 1 indicates an energized input and 0
indicates a de-energized input. When each logic input is energized, one of the characters on
the bottom line of the menu display changes to the value shown in the following table to
indicate the new state of the inputs.

OP. PARAMETERS/Inputs
Input MiCOM P72x models
Status cell value

Opto input 1
P721, P723 00001
22-24 Terminals
Opto input 2
P721, P723 00010
26-28 Terminals
Opto input 3
P723 00100
17-19 Terminals
Opto input 4
P723 01000
21-23 Terminals
Opto input 5
P723 10000
25-27 Terminals
Commissioning and Maintenance P72x/EN CM/C21

MiCOM P721/P723 Page 7/28

3.8 Logic outputs

This test checks that all outputs are functioning correctly. The P723 has 8 outputs whereas
the P721 has 4 outputs.
The Watchdog normally-closed contact is in terminals 35-36 and the Watchdog normally-
open contact is in terminals 35-37.
RL1 and RL2 are change-over relays (2-4-6, 8-10-12).
RL3 to RL4 are normally open relays (14-16, 18-20).
RL5 to RL8 are normally open relays (1-3, 5-7, 11-9, 15-13).
Each output contact may have its own independent power supply (refer to wiring schemes).
To view the status of the outputs, use the menu OP. PARAMETERS > Relay Status.
1 indicates a closed output relay and 0 indicates an open output relay. When each output
relay is closed, one of the corresponding characters on the bottom line of the menu display
changes to the value shown in the following table to indicate the new state of the output.

OP. PARAMETERS >

OUTPUT MiCOM P72x models RelayStatus
cell value
RL 1
P721, P723 00000001
2-4-6 Terminals
RL 2
P721, P723 00000010
8-10-12 Terminals
RL 3
P721, P723 00000100
14-16 Terminals
RL 4
P721, P723 00001000
18-20 Terminals
RL 5
P723 00010000
1-3 Terminals
RL 6
P723 00100000
5-7 Terminals
RL 7
P723 01000000
11-9 Terminals
RL 8
P723 10000000
15-13 Terminals

3.9 RS 485 rear communication

This test should only be performed where the relay is to be accessed from a remote location
and will vary depending on the communication protocol being used (refer to the label under
the upper flap).
The test is not intended to verify the operation of the complete system from the relay to the
remote location, just the relay's rear communication port and any protocol converter
necessary.
Connect a laptop PC to the RS485 rear port (for instance via an ACKSYS for Courier
communication) and check the communication.
P72x/EN CM/C21 Commissioning and Maintenance

Page 8/28 MiCOM P721/P723

4. SETTING CHECK
The setting checks ensure that all of the application-specific relay settings for the particular
installation have been correctly applied to the relay.
Transfer the setting file to the relay using a laptop PC running the appropriate software
through the RS232 front port (all MiCOM P72x models) or the RS485 rear port (all MiCOM
models). This method is preferred because it is much faster. If the setting software is not
used, enter the settings manually using the relay front panel interface.
Commissioning consists of the following points:

• Configuration of the settings

• Validation of the measurements

• Validation of the thresholds and associated timers.

4.1 Settings
Enter the settings on the commissioning test sheets.
4.2 Measurements
The MiCOM P721 measures the earth differential current (true rms), the maximum earth
differential current, and the frequency.
The MiCOM P723 measures the phase or earth differential currents (true rms), the maximum
phase or earth differential currents (true rms), and the frequency.
The MiCOM P723 measures earth differential current when the Connection setting is Earth.
It measures phase differential currents when the Connection setting is Phase.
WARNING: MiCOM P721 AND P723 RELAYS HAVE 1 AND 5 AMP CURRENT
INPUTS.
CHECK THAT THE INJECTED CURRENT IS COMPATIBLE WITH THE
SELECTED RANGE.
4.2.1 MiCOM P721

− Note the selected CT ratio.

− Energize the MiCOM P721 relay.

− Apply current to input terminals 55-56 or 47-48 and verify the INDiff value on the LCD.

− Carry forward the results to the Commissioning test sheets (Injected current and relay
current displayed)
4.2.2 MiCOM P723

− Note the selected phase and earth CTs ratio.

− Energize the MiCOM P723 relay.

− Apply current to inputs 55-56 or 47-48. Verify the INDiff values on the LCD.

− Apply current to inputs 49-50 or 41-42, 51-52 or 43-44 and 53-54 or 45-46 and verify
the IDiff values on the LCD.

− Enter the results on the Commissioning test sheets (Injected current and relay current
displayed).
Commissioning and Maintenance P72x/EN CM/C21

MiCOM P721/P723 Page 9/28

4.3 Phase differential proteciton ([87] Threshold I Diff])

Set the Trip [87] tDiff to the Trip Commands. Note that [87] tDiff is affected by the timer, any
blocking logic, the bus wire supervision and the check zone. On the other hand, [87] Diff is
instantaneous and it is not affected by any blocking logic, the bus wire supervision or the
check zone. To monitor the [87] Diff operation, assign it to any of the relay outputs available
(Rl2 to Rl8). The logic scheme of the three-phase high impedance differential protection is
shown in Figure 1:

FIGURE 1: [87] I DIFF LOGIC

4.3.1 Test wiring diagram
The test wiring diagram shown in Figure 2 makes it possible to conduct tests related to the
[87] Threshold I Diff.
The diagram describes current injection onto the 5 Amp phase current inputs (terminals 41-
42, 43-44, 45-46), as well as current injection onto the 1 Amp phase current inputs (terminals
49-50, 51-52, 53-54).
P72x/EN CM/C21 Commissioning and Maintenance

Page 10/28 MiCOM P721/P723

FIGURE 2: I DIFF TESTS WIRING

Commissioning and Maintenance P72x/EN CM/C21

MiCOM P721/P723 Page 11/28

4.3.2 MiCOM settings

4.3.2.1 MiCOM P723 Settings
Note that the setting cell Protection line select under Configuration/Connection should be set
as Phase.
Protection Menu

[87] PHASE DIFF. PROTECTION

[87] Phase diff. Prot. YES

[87] Threshold I Diff 2.00 In
[87] Fault Timer t diff 0.00 s
[87] Check Zone? No
[87] Measurement Filter Fourier, Sample, Fast sample modes
[87] Reset Timer tReset 0.00 s

AUTOMAT. CTRL/Trip commands Menu

TRIP [87] tDiff YES

4.3.3 [87] Threshold I Diff with Fourier mode

The Fourier mode is based on the module of the fundamental of the differential current. If
Idiff > [87] Threshold I Diff , the relay trips.

Values to be recorded:
[87] Threshold I Diff for each phase
Time delay tDiff> for each phase.
[87] Threshold I Diff check:
If the time delay [87] Fault Timer tdiff is short, gradually increase the injection current up to
the value of the [87] Threshold I Diff.
If the time delay [87] Fault Timer tdiff is long, inject 0.95 x [87] Threshold I Diff and check that
there is no tripping. Then inject 1.1 x [87] Threshold I Diff and check the trip.
Gradually decrease the injected current and record the value of the drop out.
Checks:
Alarm message on the LCD.
Alarm LED flashes.
Trip LED on
[87] tDiff LED on (if programmed).
Trip output closes.
[87] tDiff output closes (if programmed).
[87] Fault Timer tdiff check:
Apply a current onto phase A and measure the time delay [87] tDiff by pre-setting the current
above the [87] Threshold I Diff (I injected > 2 x [87] Threshold I Diff). Repeat the same test
for phases B and C.
P72x/EN CM/C21 Commissioning and Maintenance

Page 12/28 MiCOM P721/P723

4.3.4 [87] Threshold I Diff with Sample mode

The sample mode compares the peak-to-peak value of the differential current divided by
2 × √2 against the [87] Threshold I Diff.

Idiffpeak − peak
If > [87] Threshold I Diff , then the relay trips.
2× 2
Values to be recorded:
[87] Threshold I Diff for each phase
Time delay tDiff> for each phase.
[87] Threshold I Diff check:
If the time delay [87] Fault Timer tdiff is short, gradually increase the injection current up to
the value of the [87] Threshold I Diff.
If the time delay [87] Fault Timer tdiff is long, inject 0.95 x [87] Threshold I Diff and check that
there is no tripping. Then inject 1.1 x [87] Threshold I Diff and check the trip.
Gradually decrease the injected current and record the value of the drop out.
Checks:
Alarm message on the LCD.
Alarm LED flashes.
Trip LED on
[87] tDiff LED on (if programmed).
Trip output closes.
[87] tDiff output closes (if programmed).
[87] Fault Timer tdiff check:
Apply a current onto phase A and measure the time delay [87] tDiff by presetting the current
above the [87] Threshold I Diff (I injected > 2 x [87] Threshold I Diff). Repeat the same test
for phases B and C.
4.3.5 [87] Threshold I Diff with Fast mode
The Fast mode detects a number of samples above the threshold during one AC half cycle.
The Fast mode threshold is 2 × √2 × [87] Threshold I Diff. If four consecutive samples are
above 2 × √2 × [87] Threshold I Diff, then the relay trips.
Values to be recorded:
[87] Threshold I Diff for each phase
Time delay tDiff> for each phase.
[87] Threshold I Diff check:
If the time delay [87] Fault Timer tdiff is short, gradually increase the injection current up to
the value of 2 × √2 × [87] Threshold I Diff.

If the time delay [87] Fault Timer tdiff is long, inject 0.95 × 2 × √2 × [87] Threshold I Diff and
check that there is no tripping. Then inject 1.1 × 2 × √2 × [87] Threshold I Diff and check the
trip.
Gradually decrease the injected current and record the value of the drop out.
Commissioning and Maintenance P72x/EN CM/C21

MiCOM P721/P723 Page 13/28

Checks:
Alarm message on the LCD.
Alarm LED flashes.
Trip LED on
[87] tDiff LED on (if programmed).
Trip output closes.
[87] tDiff output closes (if programmed).
[87] Fault Timer tdiff check:
Apply a current onto phase A and measure the time delay [87] tDiff by presetting the current
above the 2 × √2 × [87] Threshold I Diff (I injected > 2 × 2 × √2 ×
[87] Threshold I Diff). Repeat the same test for phases B and C.
4.4 Earth differential protection ([87N] Threshold I Diff)
Set the Trip [87N] tDiff to the Trip Commands. Note that [87N] tDiff is affected by the timer,
the bus wire supervision and any blocking logic. On the other hand, [87N] Diff is
instantaneous and it is not affected by any blocking logic or the bus wire supervision. To
monitor the [87N] Diff operation, assign it to any of the relay outputs available (RL2 to RL8).
The logic scheme of the single-phase high impedance differential protection is shown in
Figure 3.

FIGURE 3: [87N] I DIFF LOGIC

4.4.1 Test wiring diagram
The test wiring diagram shown in Figure 4 makes it possible to conduct tests related to the
[87N] Threshold I Diff.
The diagram describes current injection onto the 5 Amp phase current inputs (terminals
47-48), as well as current injection onto the 1 Amp phase inputs (terminals 55-56).
P72x/EN CM/C21 Commissioning and Maintenance

Page 14/28 MiCOM P721/P723

FIGURE 4: [87N] I DIFF TESTS WIRING

4.4.2 MiCOM settings
4.4.2.1 MiCOM P721 and P723 settings
Protection Menu
In the P723 setting file, the cell Description under Op Parameters can be set as either P721
or P723. If it is set as P723, then setting cell Protection line select under
Configuration/Connection may be set as either [87N] Earth or [87] Phase. If the cell
Description is set to P721, then setting cell Protection line select under
Configuration/Connection can only be set as [87N] Earth.

[87N] EARTH DIFF. PROTECTION

[87N] Earth Diff Prot. Yes
[87N] Threshold I Diff 1.00 In
[87N] Flt Timer t Diff 0.00 s
[87N] Measurement Filter Fourier, Sample, Fast sample modes
[87N] Rst Timer tReset 0.00 s

AUTOMAT. CTRL/Trip commands Menu

TRIP [87N] tDiff YES

Commissioning and Maintenance P72x/EN CM/C21

MiCOM P721/P723 Page 15/28

4.4.3 [87N] Threshold I Diff with Fourier mode

The Fourier mode is based on the differential current fundamental module. If
Idiff > [87] Threshold I Diff , then the relay trips.

Values to be recorded:
[87N] Threshold I Diff
Time delay tDiff>
[87] Threshold I Diff check:
If the time delay [87N] Flt Timer tdiff is short, gradually increase the injection current up to
the value of the [87N] Threshold I Diff.
If the time delay [87N] Flt Timer tdiff is long, inject 0.95 x [87N] Threshold I Diff and check
that there is no tripping. Then inject 1.1 x [87N] Threshold I Diff and check the trip.
Gradually decrease the injected current and record the value of the drop out.
Checks:
Alarm message on the LCD.
Alarm LED flashes.
Trip LED on
[87N] tDiff LED on (if programmed).
Trip output closes.
[87N] tDiff output closes (if programmed).
[87N] Flt Timer tdiff check:
Apply a current onto the single phase CT input and measure the time delay [87N] tDiff by
pre-setting the current above the [87N] Threshold I Diff (I injected > 2 x [87N] Threshold I
Diff).
4.4.4 [87N] Threshold I Diff with Sample mode

The sample mode compares the peak-to-peak value of the differential current divided by 2 ×
Idiffpeak − peak
√2 against the [87N] Threshold I Diff. If > [87N] Threshold I Diff , then the
2× 2
relay trips.
Values to be recorded:
[87N] Threshold I Diff
Time delay tDiff>
[87] Threshold I Diff check:
If the time delay [87N] Flt Timer tdiff is short, gradually increase the injection current up to
the value of the [87N] Threshold I Diff.
If the time delay [87N] Flt Timer tdiff is long, inject 0.95 x [87N] Threshold I Diff and check
that there is no tripping. Then inject 1.1 x [87N] Threshold I Diff and check the trip.
Gradually decrease the injected current and record the value of the drop out.
Checks:
Alarm message on the LCD.
Alarm LED flashes.
Trip LED on
P72x/EN CM/C21 Commissioning and Maintenance

Page 16/28 MiCOM P721/P723

[87N] tDiff LED on (if programmed).

Trip output closes.
[87N] tDiff output closes (if programmed).
[87N] Fault Timer tdiff check:
Apply a current onto the single phase CT input and measure the time delay [87N] tDiff by
pre-setting the current above the [87N] Threshold I Diff (I injected > 2 x [87N] Threshold I
Diff).
4.4.5 [87N] Threshold I Diff with Fast mode
The Fast mode detects a number of samples above the threshold during one AC half cycle.
The Fast mode threshold is 2 × √2 × [87N] Threshold I Diff. If four consecutive samples are
above 2 × √2 × [87N] Threshold I Diff, then the relay trips.
Values to be recorded:
[87N] Threshold I Diff
Time delay tDiff>
[87N] Threshold I Diff check:
If the time delay [87N] Flt Timer tdiff is short, gradually increase the injection current up to
the value of 2 × √2 × [87N] Threshold I Diff.

If the time delay [87N] Fault Timer tdiff is long, inject 0.95 x 2 × √2 × [87N] Threshold I Diff
and check that there is no tripping. Then inject 1.1 x 2 × √2 × [87N] Threshold I Diff and
check the trip.
Gradually decrease the injected current and record the value of the drop out.
Checks:
Alarm message on the LCD.
Alarm LED flashes.
Trip LED on
[87N] tDiff LED on (if programmed).
Trip output closes.
[87N] tDiff output closes (if programmed).
[87N] Fault Timer tdiff check:
Apply a current onto the single phase CT and measure the time delay [87N] tDiff by pre-
setting the current above the 2 × √2 × [87N] Threshold I Diff (I injected > 2 x 2 × √2 × [87N]
Threshold I Diff).
4.5 Phase bus wire supervision ([95] Phase Bus-Wire Sup)
4.5.1 Test wiring diagram
The same test wiring diagram shown in section 4.3.1 can be used.
4.5.2 MiCOM settings
4.5.2.1 MiCOM P723 Settings
Note that the setting cell Protection line select under Configuration/Connection should be set
as [87] Phase.
Commissioning and Maintenance P72x/EN CM/C21

MiCOM P721/P723 Page 17/28

Protection Menu

[95] PHASE BUS-WIRE SUPERV

[95] Phase Bus-Wire Sup YES

[95] Threshold I Sup 2.00 In
[95] Fault timer t Sup 3.00 s
[95] Measurement Filter Fourier, Sample, Fast sample modes
[95] Reset Timer tReset 0.00 s
AUTOMAT. CTRL/Output Relays
Assign [95A] tSup A, [95B] tSup B, [95C] tSup C and [95] Sup to any of the outputs relays
(RL2-RL8) to monitor the status of the bus wire supervision function.
4.5.3 [95] Threshold I Sup with Fourier mode
The Fourier mode is based on the module of the fundamental of the differential current.
Values to be recorded:
[95] Threshold I Sup for each phase
Time delay tSup for each phase.
[95] Threshold I Sup check:
If the time delay [95] Fault Timer t Sup is short, gradually increase the injected current up to
the value of the [95] Threshold I Sup and verify that [95] Sup is asserted. Keep injecting the
current and after the timer elapses verify that [95] tSup is also asserted.
If the time delay [95] Fault Timer t Sup is long, inject 0.95 x [95] Threshold I Sup and check
that [95] Sup is not asserted. Then inject 1.1 x [95] Threshold I Sup and check [95] Sup is
asserted. Keep injecting the later current and after the timer elapses verify that [95] tSup is
also asserted.
Gradually decrease the injected current and record the value of the drop out.
Checks:
Alarm message on the LCD.
Alarm LED flashes.
[95] tSup LED on (if programmed).

Trip output does not close (If [95] Threshold I Sup < Idiff < [87] Threshold I Diff and the
[95] Fault timer t Sup has elapsed).
[95A] tSup A output closes (if programmed).
[95B] tSup B output closes (if programmed).
[95C] tSup C output closes (if programmed).
[95] Fault Timer t Sup check:
Apply a current onto phase A and measure the time delay [95A] tSup A by presetting the
current above the [95] Threshold I Sup (2 x [95] Threshold I Diff < I injected < [87] Threshold
I Diff). Repeat the same test for phases B and C using [95B] tSup B and [95C] tSup C
respectively.
4.5.4 [95] Threshold I Sup with Sample mode
The sample mode compares the peak to peak value of the differential current divided by
2 × √2 against the [95] Threshold I Sup.
P72x/EN CM/C21 Commissioning and Maintenance

Page 18/28 MiCOM P721/P723

Values to be recorded:
[95] Threshold I Sup for each phase
Time delay tSup for each phase.
[95] Threshold I Sup check:
If the time delay [95] Fault Timer t Sup is short, gradually increase the injected current to [95]
Threshold I Sup and verify that [95] Sup is asserted. Keep injecting the current and after the
timer elapses verify that [95] tSup is also asserted.

If the time delay [95] Fault Timer t Sup is long, inject 0.95 × [95] Threshold I Sup and check
that [95] Sup is not asserted. Then inject 1.1 × [95] Threshold I Sup and check that [95] Sup
is asserted. Keep injecting the later current and after the timer elapses verify that [95] tSup
is also asserted.
Gradually decrease the injected current and record the value of the drop out.
Checks:
Alarm message on the LCD.
Alarm LED flashes.
[95] tSup LED on (if programmed).
Trip output does not close

Idiffpeak − peak
(If [95] Threshold I Sup < < [87] Threshold I Diff and the [95] Fault timer
2× 2
t Sup has elapsed).
[95A] tSup A output closes (if programmed).
[95B] tSup B output closes (if programmed).
[95C] tSup C output closes (if programmed).
[95] Fault Timer tSup check:
Apply a current onto one of the phases and measure the time delay [95] tSup by presetting
the current above the [95] Threshold I Sup (2 x [95] Threshold I Sup < I injected < [87]
Threshold I Diff) and verify that [95] Sup is asserted. Keep injecting the current and after the
timer elapses verify that [95] tSup is also asserted. Repeat the same test for phases B and
C using [95B] tSup B and [95C] tSup C respectively.
4.5.5 [95] Threshold I Sup with Fast mode
The Fast mode detects a number of samples above the threshold during one AC half cycle.
The Fast mode threshold is 2 × √2 × [95] Threshold I Sup.
Values to be recorded:
[95] Threshold I Sup for each phase
Time delay tSup for each phase.
[95] Threshold I Sup check:
If the time delay [95] Fault Timer tSup is short, gradually increase the injection current up to
the value of 2 × √2 × [95] Threshold I Sup and verify that [95] Sup is asserted. Keep
injecting the current and after the timer elapses verify that [95] tSup is also asserted.

If the time delay [95] Fault Timer tSup is long, inject 0.95 x 2 × √2 × [95] Threshold I Sup and
check that [95] Sup is not asserted. Then inject 1.1 x 2 × √2 × [95] Threshold I Sup and
check that [95] Sup is asserted. Keep injecting the later current and after the timer elapses
verify that [95] tSup is also asserted.
Gradually decrease the injected current and record the value of the drop out.
Commissioning and Maintenance P72x/EN CM/C21

MiCOM P721/P723 Page 19/28

Checks:
Alarm message on the LCD.
Alarm LED flashes.
[95] tSup LED on (if programmed).
Trip output does not close

(If 2 × 2 × [95] Threshold I Sup < Idiff < 2 × 2 × [87] Threshold I Diff and the [95] Fault
timer t Sup has elapsed).
[95A] tSup A output closes (if programmed).
[95B] tSup B output closes (if programmed).
[95C] tSup C output closes (if programmed).
[95] Fault Timer tdiff check:
Apply a current onto phase A and measure the time delay [95A] tDiff A by pre-setting the
current above the 2 × √2 × [95] Threshold I Sup (2 × 2 × √2 × [95] Threshold I Sup < I
injected < 2 × √2 × [87] Threshold I Diff). Repeat the same test for phases B and C using
[95B] tSup B and [95C] tSup C respectively.
4.6 Earth bus wire supervision ([95N] Earth Bus-Wire Sup)
Three P721 relays are required to use the P721 in three phase applications. In this case,
the [95N] Earth Bus-wire Sup should be tested the same way as the [95] Phase Bus-wire
Sup in the P723. [95N] Sup and [95N] tSup should be verified. Check section 4.5 for further
test details.
4.7 REF/BEF Primary Injection Tests
Primary injection tests will be used to check that the current transformers for the high
impedance differential scheme are correctly connected.
4.7.1 Correct set up check
Before commencing any primary injection tests it is essential to ensure that the circuit is
dead, isolated from the remainder of the system and that only those earth connections
associated with the primary injection test equipment are in position.
The stability of the scheme can be checked by injecting through the neutral current
transformer and each phase current transformer in turn. This test is required when the P72x
is used in a high impedance REF.
Figure 7 shows the connections for the P721 and P723 when the relays are used in a high
impedance differential scheme.
P72x/EN CM/C21 Commissioning and Maintenance

Page 20/28 MiCOM P721/P723

FIGURE 5: REF - PRIMARY INJECTION - STABILITY TEST SET UP

During the stability test, it is necessary to measure the spill current in the relay circuit,
therefore the stabilizing resistor should be shorted out. The current should be increased up
to as near full load as possible and the current flowing through ammeter A1 noted. If the
connections are correct, this current would be very low, only a few milliamps. A high reading,
(twice the injected current, referred through the current transformer ratio) indicates that one
of the current transformer connections is reversed. This test should be repeated for the
B-phase CT and neutral CT, and then for the C-phase CT and neutral CT.
The sensitivity of the protection can be checked by injecting with the single phase test set
through each of the main current transformers in turn. This is shown in Figure 6. While
carrying out this test it is advisable to measure the voltage across the relay coil and
stabilizing resistance, and so to check the approximate voltage developed by the main
current transformer to cause relay operation. During this test the P79x auxiliary relay should
be kept energized, thus the stabilizing resistor is not short circuited.

FIGURE 6: REF/BEF - PRIMARY INJECTION - SENSITIVITY TEST SET UP

Commissioning and Maintenance P72x/EN CM/C21

MiCOM P721/P723 Page 21/28

4.8 Busbar Primary Injection Tests

First choose any of the CTs as the reference CT. The polarity and ratio of the reference CT
should be checked first. Afterwards the polarity and ratio of the other CTs in the high
impedance differential busbar scheme should be verified against the reference CT.
As shown in Figure 7, primary current should be injected through the reference CT to verify
the CT ratio. It is important to short circuit the stabilizing resistor since it may not be rated to
continuously withstand the injected current. Since the P723 has a low burden, the varistor is
effectively short circuited when the stabilizing resistor is short circuited. If the P79x is de-
energized, the stabilizing resistor and varistor will be short circuited.

Primary Injection A
Test Set
B

C +V
A2
Protection N .O.
watchdog contact

AC Supply
N
Protection Bus -wire
Supervision contact

49 51 53

Protection
V P72x P72x P72x trip contact

50 52 54

R. R. R.
P79x
St. St. St. Auxiliary
relay
A
-V
B

C P4507ENa

FIGURE 7: BUSBAR APPLICATION - PRIMARY INJECTION – RATIO CHECK OF REFERENCE CT

The ratio of A2 to A1 should approximate closely to the actual CT ratio.
To check the polarity of reference current transformers, current injection should be carried
out through the primaries of two current transformers in the group as shown in Figure 8.
During this test keep the P79x de-energized so that the stabilizing resistor and the varistor
are kept short circuited. The polarity is correct if the reading on A1 is a few milliamperes.
Phases A and B can be tested first and then phases B and C. If the current transformers are
switched between main and reserve bus wires by isolator auxiliary switches, it is
recommended to perform the tests with the busbar isolators in both positions.
P72x/EN CM/C21 Commissioning and Maintenance

Page 22/28 MiCOM P721/P723

FIGURE 8: BUSBAR APPLICATION - PRIMARY INJECTION – POLARITY CHECK OF REFERENCE CT

The current transformers of each other circuit should be checked against the reference CT.
This is done by injecting primary current through the reference and each of the remaining
circuits. The P79x should be kept de-energized to effectively short circuit the high
impedance differential scheme. As shown in Figure 9, primary current is injected into one
pair of phases of the reference circuit with a temporary three phase short circuit applied in
the test circuit. The ratio of the reading on ammeter A2 to A3 should closely approximate to
the current transformer ratio. If the polarity is correct, then only a few milliamperes may be
read on A1. To verify the ratio and polarity of all current transformers, primary injection
should be performed between A and B and then between B and C phases.

FIGURE 9: BUSBAR APPLICATION - PRIMARY INJECTION – INTER-GROUP RATIO AND POLARITY

CHECK
The sensitivity of the scheme should also be tested by injecting primary current into one of
the current transformers only. The current required to operate the P72x with the maximum
number of current transformers in idle shunt should be measured. Since the supervision
relay has a low setting it should be left inoperative while performing the sensitivity test. To
verify that the correct value of stabilizing resistor is used, a voltmeter should be used to
Commissioning and Maintenance P72x/EN CM/C21

MiCOM P721/P723 Page 23/28

measure the voltage across the P72x and the stabilizing resistor. The voltage reading
should be noted when the P72x operates, and this voltage should be very close to the Vs
(stability voltage). The sensitivity test should be performed for each discriminating zone and
for the overall check zone. The primary operating current should be very close to the
effective relay setting or primary operating current calculated. Figure 10 shows the
sensitivity test connections. During this test the P79x auxiliary relay should be kept
energized, thus the stabilizing resistor is not short circuited.

FIGURE 10: BUSBAR APPLICATION - PRIMARY INJECTION – SENSITIVITY TEST

4.9 Final checks
The tests are now complete. Remove all test or temporary shorting leads, etc.. If it is
necessary to disconnect any of the external wiring from the relay to perform the wiring
verification tests, ensure that all connections are replace in accordance with the relevant
external connection or scheme diagram.
If a MMLG test block is installed, remove the MMLB01 test plug and replace the MMLG
cover so that the protection is put into service.
Ensure that all event, fault and disturbance records, alarms and LEDs have been reset
before leaving the relay.
P72x/EN CM/C21 Commissioning and Maintenance

Page 24/28 MiCOM P721/P723

5. MAINTENANCE
5.1 Equipment failure
The MiCOM P723 and P721 are fully digital and self-diagnosing. As soon as an internal
fault is detected, depending on its type (minor or major), an alarm message is displayed as a
priority on the front panel LCD before the fault LED is illuminated (fixed or flashing) and the
watchdog relay is closed (if the fault is a major one).
The watchdog facility provides two output relay contacts, one normally open and one
normally closed that are driven by the processor board. These are provided to give an
indication that the relay is in a healthy state.
An equipment failure (major or minor) cannot be acknowledged on the front panel (using the
dedicated tactile button keypad). Only the disappearance of the cause will acknowledge the
fault and hence reset the fault LED.
All tests are performed while the relay boots. Background software tasks, except for volatile
memory tests, are performed only when the relay boots and on any setting changes.
5.1.1 Minor fault
A communication failure is regarded by the MiCOM P721 and P723 relays as a minor fault. If
the communication is at fault, the MiCOM P721 and P723 protection and automation
modules are not affected. The MiCOM relay is fully operational. The watchdog relay is
energized (35-36 contact open and 36-37 contact closed).
Message:
"COMM.ERROR": Communication fault
Cause:
Hardware or software failure of the communication module
Action:
Withdraw the active part and return it to the factory for repair.
Alternative: If communication is not used, disable communication in the COMMUNICATION
menu (Communication ? = No).
5.1.2 Major fault
In MiCOM P721 and P723 relays, major faults are all software and hardware failures except
for communication faults. As soon as this type of failure is detected, the watchdog (WD) is
de-energized (35-36 contact closed and 36-37 contact open) and all operations are stopped
(protection, automation, communication).
Commissioning and Maintenance P72x/EN CM/C21

MiCOM P721/P723 Page 25/28

5.1.3 Hardware and software faults

Messages:
"DEFAULT SETTING": Indication that the relay is running the default setting
"SETTING ERROR": Failure in the setting
" CALIBRATION ERROR.": Calibration zone failure
"CT ERROR": Analogue channel failure
Cause:
Hardware or software failure
Action:
Restart the protection software (refer § 5.3).
If the software fault still remains after restart, withdraw the active part and return the module
to the factory for repair.
5.2 Method of repair
5.2.1 Replacing the active part
BEFORE CARRYING OUT ANY WORK ON THE EQUIPMENT, THE
USER SHOULD BE FAMILIAR WITH THE CONTENTS OF THE SAFETY
GUIDE SFTY/4LM/E11 OR LATER ISSUE, OR THE SAFETY AND
TECHNICAL DATA SECTIONS OF THE TECHNICAL MANUAL AND
ALSO THE RATINGS ON THE EQUIPMENT RATING LABEL.

The case and the rear terminals blocks have been designed to facilitate removal of the
MiCOM P72x relay should replacement or repair become necessary without disconnect the
scheme wiring.
NOTE: The MiCOM range of relays have integral current transformer shorting
switches which will close when the active part is removed from the
case.
Remove the upper and lower flap without exerting excessive force. Remove the external
screws. Under the upper flap, turn the extractor with a 3 mm screwdriver and extract the
active part of the relay by pulling from the upper and lower notches on the front panel of the
MiCOM relay.
To reinstall the repaired or replacement relay follow the above instructions in reverse,
ensuring that no modification has been made to the scheme wiring.
On completion of any operations which require the relay to be removed from its case, verify
that the four fixing screws are fitted at the corners of the front panel under the flaps. These
screws secure the chassis (removable part) to the relay case, ensuring good seating and
contact.
5.2.2 Replacing the complete relay
To remove the complete relay (active part and case) the entire wiring must be removed from
the rear connector.
Before working at the rear of the relay, isolate all current supplies to the MiCOM relay and
ensure that the relay is no longer powered.
WARNING: NEVER OPEN THE SECONDARY CIRCUIT OF A CURRENT
TRANSFORMER SINCE THE HIGH VOLTAGE PRODUCED MAY BE
LETHAL AND COULD DAMAGE THE INSULATION.
Remove all wiring (communication, logic inputs, outputs, auxiliary voltage, current inputs).
Disconnect the relay earth connection from the rear of the relay.
P72x/EN CM/C21 Commissioning and Maintenance

Page 26/28 MiCOM P721/P723

Remove the screws used to fasten the relay to the panel, rack, etc.. These are the screws
with the larger diameter heads that are accessible when the upper and lower flaps are
installed.
Carefully withdraw the relay from the panel or rack because it will be heavy due to the
internal transformers.
To reinstall the repaired or replacement relay, follow the above instructions in reverse,
ensuring that each terminal block is relocated in the correct position and that the case earth
and communication are replaced.
Once reinstallation is complete the relay should be recommissioned.
5.3 Problem solving
5.3.1 Password lost or not accepted
Problem:
Password lost or not accepted
Cause:
MiCOM P721 and P723 relays are supplied with the password set to AAAA.
This password can be changed by the user (refer OP PARAMETERS menu).
Action:
There is an additional unique recovery password associated with the relay which can be
supplied by the factory or service agent, if given details of its serial number (under the upper
flap of the front panel). With this serial number, contact your Schneider Electric local dealer
or Customer Contact Center (http://www.schneider-electric.com/CCC).
5.3.2 Communication
5.3.2.1 Values measured locally and remotely.
Problem:
The measurements noted remotely and locally (via RS485 communication) differ.
Cause:
The values accessible on the front face via the Measurement menu are refreshed every
second. Those fed back via RS485 communication and accessible by the Schneider
Electric’s Setting software generally have skeletal refreshing frequencies. If the refreshing
frequency of the supervision software differs from that of MiCOM P721 and P723 relays (1s),
there may be a difference between indicated values.
Action:
Adjust the frequency for refreshing the measurements of the supervision software or of the
setting software to 1 second.
5.3.2.2 MiCOM relay no longer responds
Problem:
No response from MiCOM P721 and P723 relays when asked by the supervision software
without any communication fault message.
Cause:
Mainly, this type of problem is linked to an error in the MiCOM P721 and P723
communication parameters.
Commissioning and Maintenance P72x/EN CM/C21

MiCOM P721/P723 Page 27/28

Action:
Check MiCOM P721 and P723 communication parameters (data rate, parity, etc.) are in
accordance with the supervision settings.
Check MiCOM P721 and P723 network address.
Check that this address is not used by another device connected on the same LAN.
Check that the other devices on the same LAN answer to supervision requests.
5.3.2.3 A remote command is not taken in account
Problem:
The communication between the relay and the PC is correct, but the relay does not accept
any remote command or file downloading.
Cause:
Generally this is due to the fact that the relay is in a programming situation, therefore the
password is active.
Action:
Check that the relay password has not been active for the last 5 minutes.
P72x/EN CM/C21 Commissioning and Maintenance

Page 28/28 MiCOM P721/P723

BLANK PAGE
Connection Diagrams P72x/EN CO/A11

MiCOM P721/P723

CONNECTION DIAGRAMS
 Alternative : Restricted Earth Fault Protection (Delta connection) Alternative : Restricted Earth Fault Protection ( Star connection)
A

A B 37
B C + 33 35
WD
Ctrl shorting relay Auxiliary 36 { Watch dog (4)
C {
voltage - 34 6
4 Programmable tripping
RL1
2 { output
12
10
RL2
MiCOM P721/P723

8 { Programmable output
16 Ctrl shorting relay
RL3
Connection Diagrams

14
(+V)Auxiliary voltage
P791 P791 20
RL4 18 { Programmable output
55 55
1A 1A
R St. R St.
56 56

(-V) (-V)
Auxiliary voltage Auxiliary voltage
MiCOM
P721
47 P791 stabilising resistors 47
5A 5A
48 48
+
EQUIPMENT RATING LABEL."

Programmable input 22 L1
{ 24
-
A +

Programmable input 26 L2
{ 28 ( : Link terminals 30 and 32 if Case earth connection
-
* the relay is connected at the
end of the RS485 bus )
29
C B * 30
Case earth
Phase rotation - Port communication
31 RS 485
1 2 29 30 32
3 4 31 32 +
5 6 33 34
7 8 35 36
9 10 37 38 Nota :

SCHEME REPRESENTING MiCOM RELAY OFF

11 12 39 40 (1) (a) CT shorting links make before (b)
13 14 41 42 and (c) disconnect
15 16 43 44 (2) CT connection are typical only
17 18 45 46 (b) Short terminals break before (c)
19 20 (3) Earth terminals are typical only
47 48 (c) Long terminals
21 22 49 50
23 24 (d) Pins terminals (pcb type) (4) The MICOM P120/P121 relays are shown with supply off.
51 52
25 26 53 54
27 28 55 56

Module terminal blocks

P3955ENa
viewed fromp rear
(with integral case earth link)
SHOULD BE FAMILIAR WITH THE CONTENTS OF THE SAFETY GUIDE
BEFORE CARRYING OUT ANY WORK ON THE EQUIPMENT, THE USER

SECTION OF THE TECHNICAL MANUAL AND ALSO THE RATINGS ON THE

SFTY/4LM/E11 OR LATER ISSUE, OR THE SAFETY AND TECHNICAL DATA
Page 1/2
P72x/EN CO/A11
 Alternative : Restricted Earth Fault Protection ( Star connection)

A
B
Ctrl shorting relay
C
Page 2/2

49 Three-Phase High Impedance Differential

1A

CT1
CTn

CT2
50
51 37
1A 33 35
Auxiliary + WD
52 36 { Watch Dog (4)
voltage {
53 - 6
34 Programmable tripping
1A
P72x/EN CO/A11

49 4
P791 RL1
54 1A 2 { output
55 R St. 12
50
1A 51 10
R St. RL2
56 1A 8 { Programmable output
41 Ctrl shorting relay
52 16
5A 53
(-V) RL3 14
42 R St. 1A (+V)Auxiliary voltage
Auxiliary voltage 20
43 54
5A RL4 18 { Programmable output
55
44 3
1A
45 RL5 1 { Programmable output
56
5A 41 7
A R St. RL6
46 5A 5 { Programmable output
47 Auxiliary voltage 42 9
5A 43 RL7 11
(-V) { Programmable output
48 5A 13
44 RL8 15 { Programmable output
C B P793 45
Phase rotation 5A
46 MiCOM
Alternative : Restricted Earth Fault Protection (Delta connection) 47
P791 and P793 stabilising resistors 5A

A
48 P723
+
B Programmableinput 22 L1
Ctrl shorting relay Terre boîtier
{ 24
C -
Case earth +

Programmable input 26 L2
49 { 28 ( : Link terminals 30 and 32 if
- Case earth connection
1A 1 2 29 30 + * the relay is connected at the
3 4 31 32 17 end of the RS485 bus )
50 Programmableinput { 19 L3
51 5 6 33 34 - 29
+
1A 7 8 35 36 *
9 10
21 L4 30
52 37 38 Programmable {
input 23
-
53 11 12 39 40 + - Port communication
1A 13 14 41 42 { 25 L5 31 RS 485
P791 Programmable 27 32
54 15 16 43 44 input - +
55

SCHEME REPRESENTING MiCOM RELAY OFF

17 18 45 46
1A 19 20 47 48
R St.
56 21 22 49 50
41 23 24 51 52
5A
(-V) 25 26 53 54 Module terminal blocks
Auxiliary voltage
42 27 28 55 56
43 viewed fromp rear
5A
(with integral case earth link)
Nota :
44 (1) (a)
45 CT shorting links make before (b) and (c) disconnect
5A
46 (b) Short terminals break before (c)
47 (c)
5A Long terminals
48 (d) Pins terminals (pcb type)
(2) CT connection are typical only

P3954ENa
(3) Earth terminals are typical only
(4) The MICOM relays are shown with supply off.
MiCOM P721/P723
Connection Diagrams
Commissioning Test & Record Sheets P72x/EN RS/A11

MiCOM P721/P723

COMMISSIONING TEST
& RECORD SHEETS
Commissioning Test & Record Sheets P72x/EN RS/A11

MiCOM P721/P723 Page 1/22

CONTENTS

1. COMMISSIONING TEST SHEETS 3

1.1 Relay identification 3
1.2 Commissioning test record 3

2. COMMISSIONING SETTING RECORD SHEETS 6

2.1 OP PARAMETERS Menu 6
2.2 CONFIGURATION Menu 6
2.2.1 Connection menu 6
2.2.2 LEDs 5 to 8 configuration 7
2.2.3 Group select configuration 7
2.2.4 Alarms configuration 8
2.2.5 Inputs configuration 8
2.2.6 Relays maintenance 8
2.3 COMMUNICATION Menu 9
2.4 PROTECTION G1 Menu 10
2.4.1 [87N] Earth differential protection 10
2.4.2 [95N] Earth bus-wire supervision 10
2.4.3 [87] Phase differential protection (P723 only) 10
2.4.4 [95] Phase bus-wire supervision (P723 only) 11
2.5 PROTECTION G2 Menu 11
2.5.1 [87N] Earth differential protection 11
2.5.2 [95N] Earth bus-wire supervision 11
2.5.3 [87] Phase differential protection (P723 only) 12
2.5.4 [95] Phase bus-wire supervision (P723 only) 12
2.6 AUTOMAT.CTRL Menu 13
2.6.1 TRIP Command allocation 13
2.6.2 Latch function allocation 13
2.6.3 Blocking Logic 1 function allocation 14
2.6.4 Blocking Logic 1 function allocation 14
2.6.5 OUTPUT RELAYS allocation 14
2.6.6 LATCH OUTPUT RELAYS allocation 15
2.6.7 LOGIC INPUT allocation 16
2.6.8 CIRCUIT BREAKER FAILURE 16
2.6.9 LOGIC EQUATIONS 17
2.7 RECORDING Menu 21
2.7.1 FAULT RECORD Record 21
2.7.2 INSTANTANEOUS Record 21
2.7.3 DISTURBANCE RECORD 21
P72x/EN RS/A11 Commissioning Test & Record Sheets

Page 2/22 MiCOM P721/P723

BLANK PAGE
Commissioning Test & Record Sheets P72x/EN RS/A11

MiCOM P721/P723 Page 3/22

1. COMMISSIONING TEST SHEETS

BEFORE CARRYING OUT ANY WORK ON THE EQUIPMENT, THE
USER SHOULD BE FAMILIAR WITH THE CONTENTS OF THE SAFETY
GUIDE SFTY/4LM/D11 OR LATER ISSUE, OR THE SAFETY AND
TECHNICAL DATA SECTION OF THE TECHNICAL MANUAL AND ALSO
THE RATINGS ON THE EQUIPMENT RATING LABEL.

1.1 Relay identification

Commissioning date :
Engineer :
Substation :
Circuit :
Network nominal frequency:

MiCOM Overcurrent relay model :

‰ P721 ‰ P723
Serial number :
Rated current In :
Auxiliary voltage Uaux :
Communication protocol :
Language :

1.2 Commissioning test record

(put a cross after each checked stage)

Serial number check ?

All current transformer shorting switches closed ?

Wiring checked against diagram (if available) ?

Case earth installed ?

Test block connections checked (if installed) ?

Insulation tested ?
P72x/EN RS/A11 Commissioning Test & Record Sheets

Page 4/22 MiCOM P721/P723

Auxiliary supply control

Auxiliary voltage to relay

Auxiliary voltage value ________________ Vdc/Vac

Watchdog contacts
With auxiliary supply off Terminals 35 and 36

With auxiliary supply on Terminals 36 and 37

Measurements
Applied value Relay value
PHASE CT INPUT
Phase A current _______________ A A
Phase B current _______________ A A
Phase C current _______________ A A
EARTH CT INPUT
Earth current _______________ A A
Phase protection test
Theoretical value Relay value
Threshold I Diff _______________ A
I Diff Threshold A
I Diff drop Threshold A
Timer
Fault Timer tdiff at 2*I Diff ______________ ms A
Fault Timer tdiff at 10*I Diff ______________ ms A
Reset Timer tReset at 2*I Diff ______________ ms A
Reset Timer tReset at 10*I Diff ______________ ms A
Check Zone _______________ A
Reset Timer tReset ______________ ms A
Commissioning Test & Record Sheets P72x/EN RS/A11

MiCOM P721/P723 Page 5/22

Earth protection test

Theoretical value Relay value
Threshold Earth Diff _______________ A
I Diff Threshold A
I Diff drop Threshold A
Timer
Fault Timer tdiff at 2*I Diff ______________ ms A
Fault Timer tdiff at 10*I Diff ______________ ms A
Reset Timer tReset at 2*I Diff ______________ ms A
Reset Timer tReset at 10*I Diff ______________ ms A

Commissioning Engineer Date

_________________________ _______________
P72x/EN RS/A11 Commissioning Test & Record Sheets

Page 6/22 MiCOM P721/P723

2. COMMISSIONING SETTING RECORD SHEETS

2.1 OP PARAMETERS Menu

Password :
Reference :
Software version :

Frequency : ‰ 50 Hz ‰ 60 Hz

2.2 CONFIGURATION Menu

2.2.1 Connection menu

Protection line select ‰ Earth ‰ Phase

Input Selection ‰ Current ‰ Voltage

If protection Line = Earth

E/Gnd Text ‰ N ‰ E ‰ G
Line CT Primary Ω
E/Gnd CT Primary Primary earth CT ratio
E/Gnd CT Secondary Secondary earth CT ratio ‰ 1A ‰ 5A

If protection Line = Phase

Phase A Text ‰ A ‰ L1 ‰ R
Phase B Text ‰ B ‰ L2 ‰ S
Phase C Text ‰ C ‰ L3 ‰ T
Stabiliz resist L1 (A, R) Ω
Stabiliz resist L2 (B, S) Ω
Stabiliz resist L3 (C, T) Ω
Line CT Primary Primary phase CT ratio
Line CT Secondary Secondary phase CT ratio ‰ 1A ‰ 5A
Commissioning Test & Record Sheets P72x/EN RS/A11

MiCOM P721/P723 Page 7/22

2.2.2 LEDs 5 to 8 configuration

• = available with this model.

LED 5 LED 6 LED 7 LED 8

P721

P723
Functions
Yes Yes Yes Yes
[87] Diff • ‰ ‰ ‰ ‰
[87N] Diff • • ‰ ‰ ‰ ‰
[87] tDiff • ‰ ‰ ‰ ‰
[87N] tDiff • • ‰ ‰ ‰ ‰
[87CZ] Check zone • ‰ ‰ ‰ ‰
[95] Sup • ‰ ‰ ‰ ‰
[95N] Sup • ‰ ‰ ‰ ‰
[95] tSup • ‰ ‰ ‰ ‰
[95N] tSup • • ‰ ‰ ‰ ‰
[95A] tSupA • ‰ ‰ ‰ ‰
[95B] tSupB • ‰ ‰ ‰ ‰
[95C] tSupC • ‰ ‰ ‰ ‰
Input 1 • • ‰ ‰ ‰ ‰
Input 2 • • ‰ ‰ ‰ ‰
Input 3 • ‰ ‰ ‰ ‰
Input 4 • ‰ ‰ ‰ ‰
Input 5 • ‰ ‰ ‰ ‰
tAux 1 • • ‰ ‰ ‰ ‰
tAux 2 • • ‰ ‰ ‰ ‰
tAux 3 • ‰ ‰ ‰ ‰
tAux 4 • ‰ ‰ ‰ ‰
tEqu.A • • ‰ ‰ ‰ ‰
tEqu.B • • ‰ ‰ ‰ ‰
tEqu.C • • ‰ ‰ ‰ ‰
tEqu.D • • ‰ ‰ ‰ ‰
tEqu.E • • ‰ ‰ ‰ ‰
tEqu.F • • ‰ ‰ ‰ ‰
tEqu.G • • ‰ ‰ ‰ ‰
tEqu.H • • ‰ ‰ ‰ ‰

2.2.3 Group select configuration

Change group input ‰ Menu ‰ Input

Setting group ‰ 1 ‰ 2
P72x/EN RS/A11 Commissioning Test & Record Sheets

Page 8/22 MiCOM P721/P723

2.2.4 Alarms configuration

Inst. Self Reset? ‰ YES ‰ NO

Reset Led on fault ‰ YES ‰ NO
Alarm tAux1 ‰ YES ‰ NO
Alarm tAux2 ‰ YES ‰ NO
Alarm tAux3 (P723 only) ‰ YES ‰ NO
Alarm tAux4 (P723 only) ‰ YES ‰ NO
Alarm tAux5 (P723 only) ‰ YES ‰ NO

2.2.5 Inputs configuration

Inputs (P721 only) 2 1

‰ ‰
Inputs (P723 only) 5 4 3 2 1
‰ ‰ ‰ ‰ ‰
Voltage input DC ‰ DC ‰ AC

2.2.6 Relays maintenance

← ‰ P721 →
← ‰ P723 →
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
Fail Safe Relay

Maintenance Mode ‰ YES ‰ NO

← ‰ P721 →
← ‰ P723 →
Relays 8 7 6 5 W 4 3 2 1
CMD
Commissioning Test & Record Sheets P72x/EN RS/A11

MiCOM P721/P723 Page 9/22

2.3 COMMUNICATION Menu

NOTE: Menu content depends on the communication protocol.

Communication ?
‰ YES ‰ NO
Rear Comm. Address
Baud Rate
‰ 300 bds ‰ 600 bds

‰ 1.200 bds ‰ 2.400 bds

‰ 4.800 bds ‰ 9.600 bds

‰ 19.200 bds ‰ 38 400 bds

Parity
‰ Odd ‰ Even ‰ None
Data bits
‰ 7 ‰ 8
Stop bits
‰ 1 ‰ 2
Spont. Event.
‰ All ‰ IEC only ‰ None
Command blocking
‰ YES ‰ NO
Signal Blocking
‰ YES ‰ NO
Measure Enabling
‰ ASDU 3.4&9 ‰ ASDU 9

‰ ASDU 3.4 ‰ None

Front Comm. Address
Date Format
‰ Private ‰ IEC
P72x/EN RS/A11 Commissioning Test & Record Sheets

Page 10/22 MiCOM P721/P723

2.4 PROTECTION G1 Menu

2.4.1 [87N] Earth differential protection

[87N] Earth Diff

protection? ‰ Yes ‰ No:
[87N] Threshold I diff= In
[87N] Threshold V diff= V
[87N] Flt Timer t Diff s
[87N] Flt Timer t Reset s
[87N] Measure Filter
‰ Sample ‰ Fast sam- ‰ Fourier
mode ple mode mode

2.4.2 [95N] Earth bus-wire supervision

[95N] Earth bus-wire sup?

‰ Yes ‰ No:
[95N] Threshold I Sup= In
[95N] Threshold V Sup= V
[95N] Flt Timer t Sup s
[95N] Flt Timer t Reset s
[95N] Measure Filter
‰ Sample ‰ Fast sam- ‰ Fourier
mode ple mode mode

2.4.3 [87] Phase differential protection (P723 only)

[87] Phase Diff prot?

‰ Yes ‰ No:
[87] Threshold I diff= In
[87] Threshold V diff= V
[87] Flt Timer t Diff s
[87] Check zone?
‰ Yes ‰ No:
[87] Rst Timer t Reset s
[87] Measure Filter
‰ Sample ‰ Fast sam- ‰ Fourier
mode ple mode mode
Commissioning Test & Record Sheets P72x/EN RS/A11

MiCOM P721/P723 Page 11/22

2.4.4 [95] Phase bus-wire supervision (P723 only)

[95] Phase bus-wire sup?

‰ Yes ‰ No:
[95] Threshold I Sup= In
[95] Threshold V Sup= V
[95] Flt Timer t Sup s
[95] Flt Timer t Reset s
[95] Measure Filter
‰ Sample ‰ Fast sam- ‰ Fourier
mode ple mode mode

2.5 PROTECTION G2 Menu

2.5.1 [87N] Earth differential protection

[87N] Earth Diff

protection? ‰ Yes ‰ No:
[87N] Threshold I diff= In
[87N] Threshold V diff= V
[87N] Flt Timer t Diff s
[87N] Flt Timer t Reset s
[87N] Measure Filter
‰ Sample ‰ Fast sam- ‰ Fourier
mode ple mode mode

2.5.2 [95N] Earth bus-wire supervision

[95N] Earth bus-wire sup?

‰ Yes ‰ No:
[95N] Threshold I Sup= In
[95N] Threshold V Sup= V
[95N] Flt Timer t Sup s
[95N] Flt Timer t Reset s
[95N] Measure Filter
‰ Sample ‰ Fast sam- ‰ Fourier
mode ple mode mode
P72x/EN RS/A11 Commissioning Test & Record Sheets

Page 12/22 MiCOM P721/P723

2.5.3 [87] Phase differential protection (P723 only)

[87] Phase Diff prot?

‰ Yes ‰ No:
[87] Threshold I diff= In
[87] Threshold V diff= V
[87] Flt Timer t Diff s
[87] Check zone?
‰ Yes ‰ No:
[87] Rst Timer t Reset s
[87] Measure Filter
‰ Sample ‰ Fast sam- ‰ Fourier
mode ple mode mode

2.5.4 [95] Phase bus-wire supervision (P723 only)

[95] Phase bus-wire sup?

‰ Yes ‰ No:
[95] Threshold I Sup= In
[95] Threshold V Sup= V
[95] Flt Timer t Sup s
[95] Flt Timer t Reset s
[95] Measure Filter
‰ Sample ‰ Fast sam- ‰ Fourier
mode ple mode mode
Commissioning Test & Record Sheets P72x/EN RS/A11

MiCOM P721/P723 Page 13/22

2.6 AUTOMAT.CTRL Menu

2.6.1 TRIP Command allocation

P721 P723
Function
Yes Yes
Trip [87] tDiff ‰
Trip [87N] tDiff ‰ ‰
Trip tAux 1 ‰ ‰
Trip tAux 2 ‰ ‰
Trip tAux 3 ‰ ‰
Trip tAux 4 ‰
Control Trip ‰
Trip Equ A ‰ ‰
Trip Equ B ‰ ‰
Trip Equ C ‰ ‰
Trip Equ D ‰ ‰
Trip Equ E ‰ ‰
Trip Equ F ‰ ‰
Trip Equ G ‰ ‰
Trip Equ H ‰ ‰

2.6.2 Latch function allocation

P721 P723
Function
YES YES
Latch [87N] tDiff ‰ ‰
Latch [87] tDiff ‰
Latch t Aux 1 ‰ ‰
Latch t Aux 2 ‰ ‰
Latch t Aux 3 ‰
Latch t Aux 4 ‰
Latch Control Trip ‰ ‰
Latch tEqu.A ‰ ‰
Latch tEqu.B ‰ ‰
Latch tEqu.C ‰ ‰
Latch tEqu.D ‰ ‰
Latch tEqu.E ‰ ‰
Latch tEqu.F ‰ ‰
Latch tEqu.G ‰ ‰
Latch tEqu.H ‰ ‰
P72x/EN RS/A11 Commissioning Test & Record Sheets

Page 14/22 MiCOM P721/P723

2.6.3 Blocking Logic 1 function allocation

P721 P723
Function
Yes Yes
[87N] tDiff ‰ ‰
[87] tDiff ‰
tAux 1 ‰ ‰
tAux 2 ‰ ‰
tAux 3 ‰
tAux 4 ‰

2.6.4 Blocking Logic 1 function allocation

P721 P723
Function
Yes Yes
[87N] tDiff ‰ ‰
[87] tDiff ‰
tAux 1 ‰ ‰
tAux 2 ‰ ‰
tAux 3 ‰
tAux 4 ‰

2.6.5 OUTPUT RELAYS allocation

← P721 →
← P723 →
RL2 RL3 RL4 RL5 RL6 RL7 RL8
P721

P723

Function
Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
[87N] Diff • • ‰ ‰ ‰ ‰ ‰ ‰ ‰
[87N] tDiff • • ‰ ‰ ‰ ‰ ‰ ‰ ‰
[87] Diff • ‰ ‰ ‰ ‰ ‰ ‰ ‰
[87] tDiff • ‰ ‰ ‰ ‰ ‰ ‰ ‰
[87CZ] ChkZone • ‰ ‰ ‰ ‰ ‰ ‰ ‰
[95N] Sup • • ‰ ‰ ‰ ‰ ‰ ‰ ‰
[95N] tSup • • ‰ ‰ ‰ ‰ ‰ ‰ ‰
[95] Sup • ‰ ‰ ‰ ‰ ‰ ‰ ‰
[95] tSup • ‰ ‰ ‰ ‰ ‰ ‰ ‰
Buswire Short • • ‰ ‰ ‰ ‰ ‰ ‰ ‰
[95A] tSup A • ‰ ‰ ‰ ‰ ‰ ‰ ‰
[95B] tSup B • ‰ ‰ ‰ ‰ ‰ ‰ ‰
[95C] tSup C • ‰ ‰ ‰ ‰ ‰ ‰ ‰
Commissioning Test & Record Sheets P72x/EN RS/A11

MiCOM P721/P723 Page 15/22

← P721 →
← P723 →
RL2 RL3 RL4 RL5 RL6 RL7 RL8

P721

P723
Function
Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
CB Fail • • ‰ ‰ ‰ ‰ ‰ ‰ ‰
t Aux 1 • • ‰ ‰ ‰ ‰ ‰ ‰ ‰
t Aux 2 • • ‰ ‰ ‰ ‰ ‰ ‰ ‰
t Aux 3 • ‰ ‰ ‰ ‰ ‰ ‰ ‰
t Aux 4 • ‰ ‰ ‰ ‰ ‰ ‰ ‰
Active group • • ‰ ‰ ‰ ‰ ‰ ‰ ‰
Control trip • • ‰ ‰ ‰ ‰ ‰ ‰ ‰
Input1 • • ‰ ‰ ‰ ‰ ‰ ‰ ‰
Input2 • • ‰ ‰ ‰ ‰ ‰ ‰ ‰
Input3 • ‰ ‰ ‰ ‰ ‰ ‰ ‰
Input4 • ‰ ‰ ‰ ‰ ‰ ‰ ‰
Input5 • ‰ ‰ ‰ ‰ ‰ ‰ ‰
tEqu. A • • ‰ ‰ ‰ ‰ ‰ ‰ ‰
tEqu. B • • ‰ ‰ ‰ ‰ ‰ ‰ ‰
tEqu. C • • ‰ ‰ ‰ ‰ ‰ ‰ ‰
tEqu D • • ‰ ‰ ‰ ‰ ‰ ‰ ‰
tEqu E • • ‰ ‰ ‰ ‰ ‰ ‰ ‰
tEqu. F • • ‰ ‰ ‰ ‰ ‰ ‰ ‰
tEqu. G • • ‰ ‰ ‰ ‰ ‰ ‰ ‰
tEqu. H • • ‰ ‰ ‰ ‰ ‰ ‰ ‰

2.6.6 LATCH OUTPUT RELAYS allocation

Output 2
‰ YES ‰ NO
Output 3
‰ YES ‰ NO
Output 4
‰ YES ‰ NO
Output 5 (P723)
‰ YES ‰ NO
Output 6 (P723)
‰ YES ‰ NO
Output 7 (P723)
‰ YES ‰ NO
Output 8 (P723)
‰ YES ‰ NO
P72x/EN RS/A11 Commissioning Test & Record Sheets

Page 16/22 MiCOM P721/P723

2.6.7 LOGIC INPUT allocation

2.6.7.1 Inputs

Inputs

P120

P123
Function
1 2 3 4 5
Unlatch • • ‰ ‰ ‰ ‰ ‰
Aux 1 • • ‰ ‰ ‰ ‰ ‰
Aux 2 • • ‰ ‰ ‰ ‰ ‰
Aux 3 • ‰ ‰ ‰ ‰ ‰
Aux 4 • ‰ ‰ ‰ ‰ ‰
Block Logic 2 • • ‰ ‰ ‰ ‰ ‰
Start Disturb • • ‰ ‰ ‰ ‰ ‰
Start Block Logic 1 • • ‰ ‰ ‰ ‰ ‰
Start Block Logic 2 • • ‰ ‰ ‰ ‰ ‰
Change setting • • ‰ ‰ ‰ ‰ ‰
Reset Leds • • ‰ ‰ ‰ ‰ ‰
Maint. Mode • • ‰ ‰ ‰ ‰ ‰
Local Mode • • ‰ ‰ ‰ ‰ ‰
Synchro • • ‰ ‰ ‰ ‰ ‰
[87CZ] Chk Zone • ‰ ‰ ‰ ‰ ‰

2.6.7.2 tAux

Aux 1 : Time tAux 1 s

Aux 2 : Time tAux 2 s
Aux 3 : Time tAux 3 (P723) s
Aux 5 : Time tAux 4 (P723) s

2.6.8 CIRCUIT BREAKER FAILURE

CB Fail ? ‰ YES ‰ NO
t Diff < = In
V Diff < = V
CB Fail Time tBF ms
Commissioning Test & Record Sheets P72x/EN RS/A11

MiCOM P721/P723 Page 17/22

2.6.9 LOGIC EQUATIONS

Equ. A Boolean Logic

A.00 ‰ = / ‰ = NOT
A.01 ‰ OR / ‰ = OR NOT / ‰ AND / ‰ = AND NOT
A.02 ‰ OR / ‰ = OR NOT / ‰ AND / ‰ = AND NOT
A.03 ‰ OR / ‰ = OR NOT / ‰ AND / ‰ = AND NOT
A.04 ‰ OR / ‰ = OR NOT / ‰ AND / ‰ = AND NOT
A.05 ‰ OR / ‰ = OR NOT / ‰ AND / ‰ = AND NOT
A.06 ‰ OR / ‰ = OR NOT / ‰ AND / ‰ = AND NOT
A.07 ‰ OR / ‰ = OR NOT / ‰ AND / ‰ = AND NOT
A.08 ‰ OR / ‰ = OR NOT / ‰ AND / ‰ = AND NOT
A.09 ‰ OR / ‰ = OR NOT / ‰ AND / ‰ = AND NOT
A.10 ‰ OR / ‰ = OR NOT / ‰ AND / ‰ = AND NOT
A.11 ‰ OR / ‰ = OR NOT / ‰ AND / ‰ = AND NOT
A.12 ‰ OR / ‰ = OR NOT / ‰ AND / ‰ = AND NOT
A.13 ‰ OR / ‰ = OR NOT / ‰ AND / ‰ = AND NOT
A.14 ‰ OR / ‰ = OR NOT / ‰ AND / ‰ = AND NOT
A.15 ‰ OR / ‰ = OR NOT / ‰ AND / ‰ = AND NOT
T Operate ms
T Reset ms

Equ B Boolean Logic

B.00 ‰ = / ‰ = NOT
B.01 ‰ OR / ‰ = OR NOT / ‰ AND / ‰ = AND NOT
B.02 ‰ OR / ‰ = OR NOT / ‰ AND / ‰ = AND NOT
B.03 ‰ OR / ‰ = OR NOT / ‰ AND / ‰ = AND NOT
B.04 ‰ OR / ‰ = OR NOT / ‰ AND / ‰ = AND NOT
B.05 ‰ OR / ‰ = OR NOT / ‰ AND / ‰ = AND NOT
B.06 ‰ OR / ‰ = OR NOT / ‰ AND / ‰ = AND NOT
B.07 ‰ OR / ‰ = OR NOT / ‰ AND / ‰ = AND NOT
B.08 ‰ OR / ‰ = OR NOT / ‰ AND / ‰ = AND NOT
B.09 ‰ OR / ‰ = OR NOT / ‰ AND / ‰ = AND NOT
B.10 ‰ OR / ‰ = OR NOT / ‰ AND / ‰ = AND NOT
B.11 ‰ OR / ‰ = OR NOT / ‰ AND / ‰ = AND NOT
B.12 ‰ OR / ‰ = OR NOT / ‰ AND / ‰ = AND NOT
B.13 ‰ OR / ‰ = OR NOT / ‰ AND / ‰ = AND NOT
B.14 ‰ OR / ‰ = OR NOT / ‰ AND / ‰ = AND NOT
B.15 ‰ OR / ‰ = OR NOT / ‰ AND / ‰ = AND NOT
T Operate ms
T Reset ms
P72x/EN RS/A11 Commissioning Test & Record Sheets

Page 18/22 MiCOM P721/P723

Equ. C Boolean Logic

C.00 ‰ = / ‰ = NOT
C.01 ‰ OR / ‰ = OR NOT / ‰ AND / ‰ = AND NOT
C.02 ‰ OR / ‰ = OR NOT / ‰ AND / ‰ = AND NOT
C.03 ‰ OR / ‰ = OR NOT / ‰ AND / ‰ = AND NOT
C.04 ‰ OR / ‰ = OR NOT / ‰ AND / ‰ = AND NOT
C.05 ‰ OR / ‰ = OR NOT / ‰ AND / ‰ = AND NOT
C.06 ‰ OR / ‰ = OR NOT / ‰ AND / ‰ = AND NOT
C.07 ‰ OR / ‰ = OR NOT / ‰ AND / ‰ = AND NOT
C.08 ‰ OR / ‰ = OR NOT / ‰ AND / ‰ = AND NOT
C.09 ‰ OR / ‰ = OR NOT / ‰ AND / ‰ = AND NOT
C.10 ‰ OR / ‰ = OR NOT / ‰ AND / ‰ = AND NOT
C.11 ‰ OR / ‰ = OR NOT / ‰ AND / ‰ = AND NOT
C.12 ‰ OR / ‰ = OR NOT / ‰ AND / ‰ = AND NOT
C.13 ‰ OR / ‰ = OR NOT / ‰ AND / ‰ = AND NOT
C.14 ‰ OR / ‰ = OR NOT / ‰ AND / ‰ = AND NOT
C.15 ‰ OR / ‰ = OR NOT / ‰ AND / ‰ = AND NOT
T Operate ms
T Reset ms

Equ. D Boolean Logic

D.00 ‰ = / ‰ = NOT
D.01 ‰ OR / ‰ = OR NOT / ‰ AND / ‰ = AND NOT
D.02 ‰ OR / ‰ = OR NOT / ‰ AND / ‰ = AND NOT
D.03 ‰ OR / ‰ = OR NOT / ‰ AND / ‰ = AND NOT
D.04 ‰ OR / ‰ = OR NOT / ‰ AND / ‰ = AND NOT
D.05 ‰ OR / ‰ = OR NOT / ‰ AND / ‰ = AND NOT
D.06 ‰ OR / ‰ = OR NOT / ‰ AND / ‰ = AND NOT
D.07 ‰ OR / ‰ = OR NOT / ‰ AND / ‰ = AND NOT
D.08 ‰ OR / ‰ = OR NOT / ‰ AND / ‰ = AND NOT
D.09 ‰ OR / ‰ = OR NOT / ‰ AND / ‰ = AND NOT
D.10 ‰ OR / ‰ = OR NOT / ‰ AND / ‰ = AND NOT
D.11 ‰ OR / ‰ = OR NOT / ‰ AND / ‰ = AND NOT
D.12 ‰ OR / ‰ = OR NOT / ‰ AND / ‰ = AND NOT
D.13 ‰ OR / ‰ = OR NOT / ‰ AND / ‰ = AND NOT
D.14 ‰ OR / ‰ = OR NOT / ‰ AND / ‰ = AND NOT
D.15 ‰ OR / ‰ = OR NOT / ‰ AND / ‰ = AND NOT
T Operate ms
T Reset ms
Commissioning Test & Record Sheets P72x/EN RS/A11

MiCOM P721/P723 Page 19/22

Equ. E Boolean Logic

E.00 ‰ = / ‰ = NOT
E.01 ‰ OR / ‰ = OR NOT / ‰ AND / ‰ = AND NOT
E.02 ‰ OR / ‰ = OR NOT / ‰ AND / ‰ = AND NOT
E.03 ‰ OR / ‰ = OR NOT / ‰ AND / ‰ = AND NOT
E.04 ‰ OR / ‰ = OR NOT / ‰ AND / ‰ = AND NOT
E.05 ‰ OR / ‰ = OR NOT / ‰ AND / ‰ = AND NOT
E.06 ‰ OR / ‰ = OR NOT / ‰ AND / ‰ = AND NOT
E.07 ‰ OR / ‰ = OR NOT / ‰ AND / ‰ = AND NOT
E.08 ‰ OR / ‰ = OR NOT / ‰ AND / ‰ = AND NOT
E.09 ‰ OR / ‰ = OR NOT / ‰ AND / ‰ = AND NOT
E.10 ‰ OR / ‰ = OR NOT / ‰ AND / ‰ = AND NOT
E.11 ‰ OR / ‰ = OR NOT / ‰ AND / ‰ = AND NOT
E.12 ‰ OR / ‰ = OR NOT / ‰ AND / ‰ = AND NOT
E.13 ‰ OR / ‰ = OR NOT / ‰ AND / ‰ = AND NOT
E.14 ‰ OR / ‰ = OR NOT / ‰ AND / ‰ = AND NOT
E.15 ‰ OR / ‰ = OR NOT / ‰ AND / ‰ = AND NOT
T Operate ms
T Reset ms

Equ. F Boolean Logic

F.00 ‰ = / ‰ = NOT
F.01 ‰ OR / ‰ = OR NOT / ‰ AND / ‰ = AND NOT
F.02 ‰ OR / ‰ = OR NOT / ‰ AND / ‰ = AND NOT
F.03 ‰ OR / ‰ = OR NOT / ‰ AND / ‰ = AND NOT
F.04 ‰ OR / ‰ = OR NOT / ‰ AND / ‰ = AND NOT
F.05 ‰ OR / ‰ = OR NOT / ‰ AND / ‰ = AND NOT
F.06 ‰ OR / ‰ = OR NOT / ‰ AND / ‰ = AND NOT
F.07 ‰ OR / ‰ = OR NOT / ‰ AND / ‰ = AND NOT
F.08 ‰ OR / ‰ = OR NOT / ‰ AND / ‰ = AND NOT
F.09 ‰ OR / ‰ = OR NOT / ‰ AND / ‰ = AND NOT
F.10 ‰ OR / ‰ = OR NOT / ‰ AND / ‰ = AND NOT
F.11 ‰ OR / ‰ = OR NOT / ‰ AND / ‰ = AND NOT
F.12 ‰ OR / ‰ = OR NOT / ‰ AND / ‰ = AND NOT
F.13 ‰ OR / ‰ = OR NOT / ‰ AND / ‰ = AND NOT
F.14 ‰ OR / ‰ = OR NOT / ‰ AND / ‰ = AND NOT
F.15 ‰ OR / ‰ = OR NOT / ‰ AND / ‰ = AND NOT
T Operate ms
T Reset ms
P72x/EN RS/A11 Commissioning Test & Record Sheets

Page 20/22 MiCOM P721/P723

Equ. G Boolean Logic

G.00 ‰ = / ‰ = NOT
G.01 ‰ OR / ‰ = OR NOT / ‰ AND / ‰ = AND NOT
G.02 ‰ OR / ‰ = OR NOT / ‰ AND / ‰ = AND NOT
G.03 ‰ OR / ‰ = OR NOT / ‰ AND / ‰ = AND NOT
G.04 ‰ OR / ‰ = OR NOT / ‰ AND / ‰ = AND NOT
G.05 ‰ OR / ‰ = OR NOT / ‰ AND / ‰ = AND NOT
G.06 ‰ OR / ‰ = OR NOT / ‰ AND / ‰ = AND NOT
G.07 ‰ OR / ‰ = OR NOT / ‰ AND / ‰ = AND NOT
G.08 ‰ OR / ‰ = OR NOT / ‰ AND / ‰ = AND NOT
G.09 ‰ OR / ‰ = OR NOT / ‰ AND / ‰ = AND NOT
G.10 ‰ OR / ‰ = OR NOT / ‰ AND / ‰ = AND NOT
G.11 ‰ OR / ‰ = OR NOT / ‰ AND / ‰ = AND NOT
G.12 ‰ OR / ‰ = OR NOT / ‰ AND / ‰ = AND NOT
G.13 ‰ OR / ‰ = OR NOT / ‰ AND / ‰ = AND NOT
G.14 ‰ OR / ‰ = OR NOT / ‰ AND / ‰ = AND NOT
G.15 ‰ OR / ‰ = OR NOT / ‰ AND / ‰ = AND NOT
T Operate ms
T Reset ms

Equ. H Boolean Logic

H.00 ‰ = / ‰ = NOT
H.01 ‰ OR / ‰ = OR NOT / ‰ AND / ‰ = AND NOT
H.02 ‰ OR / ‰ = OR NOT / ‰ AND / ‰ = AND NOT
H.03 ‰ OR / ‰ = OR NOT / ‰ AND / ‰ = AND NOT
H.04 ‰ OR / ‰ = OR NOT / ‰ AND / ‰ = AND NOT
H.05 ‰ OR / ‰ = OR NOT / ‰ AND / ‰ = AND NOT
H.06 ‰ OR / ‰ = OR NOT / ‰ AND / ‰ = AND NOT
H.07 ‰ OR / ‰ = OR NOT / ‰ AND / ‰ = AND NOT
H.08 ‰ OR / ‰ = OR NOT / ‰ AND / ‰ = AND NOT
H.09 ‰ OR / ‰ = OR NOT / ‰ AND / ‰ = AND NOT
H.10 ‰ OR / ‰ = OR NOT / ‰ AND / ‰ = AND NOT
H.11 ‰ OR / ‰ = OR NOT / ‰ AND / ‰ = AND NOT
H.12 ‰ OR / ‰ = OR NOT / ‰ AND / ‰ = AND NOT
H.13 ‰ OR / ‰ = OR NOT / ‰ AND / ‰ = AND NOT
H.14 ‰ OR / ‰ = OR NOT / ‰ AND / ‰ = AND NOT
H.15 ‰ OR / ‰ = OR NOT / ‰ AND / ‰ = AND NOT
T Operate ms
T Reset ms
Commissioning Test & Record Sheets P72x/EN RS/A11

MiCOM P721/P723 Page 21/22

2.7 RECORDING Menu

2.7.1 FAULT RECORD Record

Fault Record
Fault Time : :
Fault date / /
Active Set Group ‰1 ‰ 2
Faulted phase ‰ None ‰ Phase A ‰ Phase B
‰ Phase C ‰ Earth
Threshold
Fault Magnitude A
IA Diff R.M.S A
IB Diff R.M.S A
IC Diff R.M.S A
IN Diff R.M.S A

2.7.2 INSTANTANEOUS Record

Number ‰1 ‰ 2 ‰ 3 ‰ 4 ‰ 5
Hour : : :
Date / /
Origin
Length s

Trip ‰ YES ‰ NO

2.7.3 DISTURBANCE RECORD

Pre-time ms
Post-time ms
Disturb Rec Trig
‰ ON INST. ‰ ON TRIP
P72x/EN RS/A11 Commissioning Test & Record Sheets

Page 22/22 MiCOM P721/P723

BLANK PAGE
Hardware/Software Version P72x/EN VC/C21
History and Compatibility
MiCOM P721/P723

HARDWARE VERSION
HISTORY AND
COMPATIBILITY
Hardware/Software Version P72x/EN VC/C21
History and Compatibility
MiCOM P721/P723 Page 1/4

CONTENTS

1. MiCOM P721 3

2. MiCOM P723 4
P72x/EN VC/C21 Hardware/Software Version
History and Compatibility
Page 2/4 MiCOM P721/P723

BLANK PAGE
Hardware/Software Version P72x/EN VC/C21
History and Compatibility
MiCOM P721/P723 Page 3/4

1. MiCOM P721
Relay Type P721
Backward
S1
Software Date of Compatibility
Full Description of Changes Compati-
Version Issue with previous
bility
hardware
V11.B 03/2009 V11.B software the first software for the P721 hardware V2.14 HARD 5
(first issue) V3.0
V11.D 12/2011 New Schneider Electric Brand V3.4 HARD 5
P72x/EN VC/C21 Hardware/Software Version
History and Compatibility
Page 4/4 MiCOM P721/P723

2. MiCOM P723
Relay Type P723
Backward
S1
Software Date of Compatibility
Full Description of Changes Compati-
Version Issue with previous
bility
hardware
V11.B 03/2009 V11.B software is the first software for the P723 V2.14 HARD 5
hardware (first issue) V3.0
V11.D 12/2011 New Schneider Electric Brand V3.4 HARD 5
 Customer Care Centre
http://www.schneider-electric.com/CCC

 2012 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.

Schneider Electric
35 rue Joseph Monier
92506 Rueil-Malmaison
FRANCE
Phone: +33 (0) 1 41 29 70 00
Fax: +33 (0) 1 41 29 71 00
www.schneider-electric.com Publishing: Schneider Electric
Publication: P72x/EN T/C21 10/2012